JP7509443B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

For example, Patent Document 1 describes a gaming machine in which a reserved image corresponding to the number of reserved positions stored in the memory unit is displayed in the reserved image display area.

JP 2016-140643 A

However, in gaming machines such as those described in the above patent documents, there was room for further improvement in the presentation of the game in order to increase the interest of the game.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention, which achieves the above object, is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentations according to commands sent from the main control means. The main control means includes an acquisition means (e.g., a random number acquisition unit 231) for acquiring judgment information when a start condition is satisfied, a judgment means (e.g., a special symbol judgment unit 234) for executing a judgment as to whether or not a special game is to be performed according to the judgment information, and a judgment means (e.g., a special symbol judgment unit 235) for acquiring the judgment information when the judgment has not been executed. The display control means includes a memory means (e.g., RAM 203) for storing the special symbols as reserved memory, and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol variable control unit 233) for performing cycle fluctuations a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbols and then displaying the special symbols stationary for a predetermined period of time. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance in which a performance symbol (e.g., decorative symbol 41) is displayed in a variable manner and then displayed stationary in association with the variable display and stationary display of the special symbols, and a specific symbol (e.g., small symbol 56) is displayed in a variable manner in association with the variable display and stationary display of the special symbols. and then stop displaying the performance pattern, stop displaying the performance pattern at a timing after the end of the last cyclic variation in the variable display of the special pattern and before the lapse of the predetermined time, start displaying the variable display of the specific pattern at a timing after the start of the first cyclic variation in the variable display of the special pattern and before the end of the first cyclic variation , additionally displaying the pending display in accordance with an increase in the pending memory, and reducing displaying the pending display in accordance with a decrease in the pending memory when a specific command related to the variable display is received, the display area of the pending display includes a first display area and a second display area in which the pending display can be displayed after being displayed in the first display area, and when the pending display is displayed in both the first display area and the second display area, if the specific command related to the variable display is received without receiving the specific command related to the variable display, the pending display in the second display area is made non-displayable and the reducing display of the pending display in the first display area is executed .

The above symbols in this section are given as examples in explaining the present invention, and do not limit the scope of the present invention.

The present invention can improve the entertainment value of presentations that use presentation images, etc.

1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. (a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display disposed at the bottom left of the game board, (b) is a partial plan view of a pachinko game machine, and (c) is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display disposed at the bottom left of the game board. A diagram showing the internal configuration of a control unit of a pachinko game machine of this embodiment. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an image/audio control unit and a lamp control unit of the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a game control unit of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by a game control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the operation of the game control unit during power interruption processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the main control processing of a game control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a gate switch process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of processing during a stop. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a customer waiting setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of normal pattern processing. A flowchart showing the contents of the large prize winning port processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a game status setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of an electric tulip process. These figures show an example of the configuration of random numbers used in this embodiment, where (a) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot random number, (b) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot pattern random number, (c) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a reach random number, and (d) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a winning random number. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. 1A and 1B are block diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of a RAM of a game control unit, where (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a memory area, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in (a). 1A and 1B are block diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of the RAM of the performance control unit, where (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved memory area, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in (a). 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a pre-determination process. 11A and 11B are flowcharts showing the operation of the performance control unit, where FIG. 11A is a diagram showing main processing, and FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a command receiving process. A flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination performance selection process and the performance selection process of Figure 26. A flowchart showing the contents of the big win effect selection process of Figure 26. 27 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending performance selection process of FIG. 26. 27 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command receiving process of FIG. 26. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect button processing. A diagram showing the display information of the information display device in each game area. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a main process of a general control unit. A diagram showing the initial processing of the reels by the lamp control unit. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an origin return process of a lamp control unit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an initial operation process of a lamp control unit. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a board role initial operation pattern determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a frame role initial operation pattern determination table. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing a specific example of initializing various driving sources during a setting change. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources during preparation for clearing the RWM. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources during setting confirmation. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing a specific example of initializing various driving sources after clearing the RWM; 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources after confirming settings. This is a variable presentation pattern table for a jackpot in a low probability non-time-saving play state. A variable presentation pattern table for small wins and losses in a low-probability no-time-reduction play state is shown. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. An explanatory diagram of each performance in variable performance example 1. An explanatory diagram of each performance in variable performance example 1. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A figure showing a modified example of the presentation in the variable presentation example. A figure showing a modified example of the presentation in the variable presentation example. A figure showing a modified example of the presentation in the variable presentation example. A figure showing a modified example of the presentation in the variable presentation example. A figure showing a modified example of the presentation in the variable presentation example. A figure showing a specific example of the changing display of special patterns on a special pattern display device. 11A to 11C are diagrams showing examples of display presentations for each presentation mode. A figure showing an example of the display of the number of reserved items. This is a timing chart when the variable performance starts from the waiting state for customers. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 76. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 76. This is a timing chart for when a starting win occurs during a variable performance. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 79. This is a timing chart for executing variable effects continuously. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 81. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 81. This is a timing chart for when the stopping command is not received properly and a variable performance begins. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 84. This is a timing chart for when the normal variable performance ends and the machine waits for customers. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 86. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 86. This is a timing chart for when the end of the normal variation performance is delayed because the stop command cannot be received properly. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 89. This is a timing chart for when the miss normal reach variation presentation ends and the machine enters a waiting state for customers. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 91. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 91. This is a timing chart for when a variable performance is executed after a miss SPSP reach performance ends. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 94. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 94. This is a timing chart for when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation presentation ends. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 97. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 97. This is a timing chart for when power is restored after an outage occurs during a variable performance. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 100. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 100. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 100. This is a timing chart for when the start command cannot be received normally during a look-ahead performance. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 104. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 104. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where a power-on command is received while a menu image is being displayed. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 107. A figure showing an example of a pattern change action presentation of a decorative pattern. A figure showing an example of a pattern change action presentation of a decorative pattern. A figure showing an example of a pattern change action presentation of a decorative pattern. A figure showing an example of a pattern change action presentation of a decorative pattern. A figure showing an example of a pattern change action presentation of a decorative pattern. A figure showing an example of a pattern change action presentation of a decorative pattern. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between an event that occurs when a command cannot be received and the chance eye light emission presentation. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between an event that occurs when a command cannot be received and the reach light emission effect. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between an event that occurs when a command cannot be received and the timing of execution of a light-emitting effect using a decorative pattern.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
First Embodiment
[Basic configuration of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment.
1, a pachinko game machine 100 as an example of a game machine is configured to pay out prize balls when a game ball shot out in response to a player's instruction enters a prize ball. The pachinko game machine 100 includes a game board 110 from which the game balls are shot out, and a frame member 150 that surrounds the game board 110. The game board 110 is attached to the frame member 150 in a removable manner.

The game board 110 is equipped with a game area 111 on the front where games are played with game balls, a rail member 112 that forms a path along which game balls launched from below rise and head toward an upper position of the game area 111, and a guide member 113 on the right side of the game area 111 that guides the game balls.
In this embodiment, an image display unit 114 that displays various images for effects is disposed in a position in the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. This image display unit 114 has a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and displays, for example, decorative patterns to inform the player of the pattern lottery result (pattern change result) as the player progresses through the game, and displays effect images using the appearance of characters or items, or hold displays, which will be described later.
In addition, a movable role object 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects are provided on the front side of the game board 110. The movable role object 115 performs various effects by moving on the game board 110, and the board lamp 116 performs various effects by emitting light.

In the game area 111, there are arranged game nails and windmills (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game balls fall. In addition, in the game area 111, various devices related to winning prizes and lotteries are arranged at predetermined positions. In addition, in the game area 111, there is arranged an outlet 117 for discharging game balls that are shot into the game area 111 but do not enter a winning hole, out of the game area 111. In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 is equipped with an out ball detection switch (SW) 227 (see FIG. 3 described later) for detecting out balls, which are game balls that flow into the outlet 117.

In this embodiment, various prize-winning and lottery-related features include a first start hole 121 and a second start hole 122 that start a special pattern lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball wins, and a start gate (hereinafter simply called a gate) 124 that starts a normal pattern lottery (opening/closing lottery) when a game ball passes through. In FIG. 1, the gates 124 are provided on the left and right of the game area 111, with the left gate 124 written as 124L and the right gate 124 written as 124R. The first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122 here refer to the winning hole that triggers the operation of a predetermined special pattern display device. Specifically, the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122 are provided with switches (first start hole switch 211 and second start hole switch 212 described below) that detect the passage of the game ball when a winning prize is awarded. When the game ball enters the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122, the switch detects the passage of the game ball, which triggers the activation of the special symbol display device.

The second starting hole 122 is equipped with an electric tulip (opening/closing member) 123 as a normal electric device in which a pair of tulip-shaped wings are opened and closed by an electric solenoid and light up. The electric tulip 123 is configured so that when the wings are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122, but when the wings are open, the entrance to the second starting hole 122 expands, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122. When the normal pattern lottery is won, the electric tulip 123 opens its wings for a specified time (e.g., 0.15 to 1.8 seconds) and a specified number of times (e.g., 1 to 3 times) while lighting up or flashing.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as game states, a low probability state with a low probability of winning and a high probability state with a higher probability of winning than the low probability state, based on the probability of winning in a jackpot lottery. The machine is controlled to either the low probability state or the high probability state based on a predetermined condition.
The pachinko game machine 100 has a game state in which there are fewer chances of winning the second starting hole 122, and an electric support state in which there are more chances of winning the second starting hole 122 than in the no electric support state. The game state is controlled to either the no electric support state or the electric support state under a predetermined condition, such as triggered by a jackpot or the number of times a special symbol lottery is drawn. The electric support state is a game state controlled by one or a combination of, for example, shortening the normal symbol variation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, and increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery.
Further, the pachinko game machine 100 has, as game states, a no-time-reduction state in which the special pattern variation time is long, and a time-reduction state in which the special pattern variation time is shorter than that in the no-time-reduction state.
In this embodiment, the electric support state and the time-saving state are controlled simultaneously. In the following description, the electric support state and the time-saving state are simply referred to as the time-saving state, and the no electric support state and no time-saving state are simply referred to as the no time-saving state.

In this embodiment, as other roles related to winning and lottery, a special electric role, a large prize opening 125 that opens according to the result of a special symbol lottery, and a normal prize opening 126 that does not perform a lottery even if a game ball wins are arranged on the game board 110. A large prize opening door 125D that opens and closes the large prize opening 125 is provided in the large prize opening 125. In the following description, the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of the large prize opening door 125D may be described as the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of the large prize opening 125 for convenience.
In this embodiment, a display 130 is disposed at the bottom left of the game board 110 to display information regarding the lottery results and the number of reserved balls.

In the pachinko gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the second start hole equipped with the electric tulip 123 and the big prize hole 125 are located in the right area of the gaming area 111. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, when attempting to win the second start hole 122 or the big prize hole 125, the gaming ball is made to flow down into the right area of the gaming area 111.

In addition, various boards (not shown) are attached to the back of the game board 110, such as a game control board that determines whether a special symbol has won, a presentation control board that controls the presentation overall, an image control board that controls the presentation using images and sounds, and a lamp control board that controls the presentation using various lamps and movable parts 115. In addition, a switching power supply (not shown) is arranged on the back of the game board 110, which converts the supplied 24V AC power into DC power and outputs it to the various boards.

The frame member 150 is equipped with a launching device (not shown) that electrically launches game balls at a predetermined time interval (e.g., 100 balls per minute) with a ball-hitting force corresponding to the angle of operation when the player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 clockwise. The frame member 150 also includes a supplying device (not shown) that supplies game balls to the launching device one by one in sequence at a timing linked to the player's operation of the lever 152, and a tray 153 that temporarily stores the game balls supplied by the supplying device to the launching device. Balls are paid out to the tray 153 by a payout unit, for example.
In this embodiment, the plate 153 is configured as an integrated upper and lower plate, but a configuration example in which the upper plate and the lower plate are separated is also conceivable. Also, a configuration example in which the handle 151 of the launching device is made to emit light under a predetermined condition is also conceivable.

The frame member 150 also has a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the launch of the game balls even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the launching device, and an ejection button 155 for dropping the game balls accumulated in the tray 153 into a box (not shown) and removing them.
The frame member 150 also includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 that notify the game status and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and perform various effects. The speaker 156 performs various effects using music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of an illuminant such as an LED, and performs various effects using light with lighting/flashing patterns, differences in light emission color, etc. It should be noted that the frame lamp 157 may be configured to perform effects by changing the direction of light irradiation.
The frame member 150 also includes a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

Figure 2 is a diagram explaining a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment, where Figure 2(a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display 130 arranged at the bottom left of the gaming board 110, Figure 2(b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and (c) is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display 80 arranged at the bottom left of the gaming board.
As shown in FIG. 2A, the display 130 of the pachinko game machine 100 includes a first special symbol display 221 that operates in response to winning at the first start port 121, a second special symbol display 222 that operates in response to winning at the second start port 122, and a normal symbol display 223 that operates in response to passing through the gate 124. The first special symbol display 221 displays a special symbol in a variable manner and then stops to display the lottery result based on the winning at the first start port 121. The second special symbol display 222 displays a special symbol in a variable manner and then stops to display the lottery result based on the winning at the second start port 122. As will be described in detail in the second embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 perform cycle fluctuations (cycle display) in which the change in the display mode is one cycle (=256 ms) multiple times, and stop display when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed.
The normal symbol display 223 displays the lottery result by displaying the normal symbol variably and then stopping it based on the game ball passing through the gate 124. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are each composed of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode of the LEDs. Similarly, the normal symbol display 223 is also composed of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode of the LEDs.

The display 130 also includes a first special symbol reserved indicator 218 that operates in response to a reserved symbol on the first special symbol display 221, a second special symbol reserved indicator 219 that operates in response to a reserved symbol on the second special symbol display 222, and a normal symbol reserved indicator 220 that operates in response to a reserved symbol on the normal symbol display 223. In this embodiment, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, and the normal symbol reserved indicator 220 are each comprised of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the number of reserved symbols is displayed by the lighting state of the LEDs.

Here, the reservation will be explained. If a game ball enters the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbol (while the variable display for one winning is being performed), the variable display operation of the special symbol based on the later winning cannot be started because the special symbol is changing. Therefore, the later winning is stored up to a specified number (for example, four), and the right to start the special symbol for the winning game ball is reserved until the variable display operation for the previously winning game ball is completed.
The normal symbols are also processed in the same manner as the special symbols. The fact that such a reservation has been made and the number of reservations (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol reservation indicator 218, the second special symbol reservation indicator 219, and the normal symbol reservation indicator 220.

The display 130 further includes a status indicator 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In this embodiment, the status indicator 224 is configured as a display device with an array of three LEDs. One of the three LEDs lights up to indicate whether the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a high probability state where the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is high. The other LED lights up to indicate whether the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time-saving state where the special symbol variation time is short. The other LED lights up to indicate whether the status is favorable to the player by hitting to the right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

The display 130 also includes a round number display 225 that displays the number of rounds when the big prize opening 125 is activated in a big prize game that is played according to the results of the special pattern lottery. The big prize game will be described later. The round number display 225 is composed of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the number of rounds when the big prize opening 125 is activated in a big prize game is displayed by the lighting state of the LEDs.

The display 130 also includes a status confirmation indicator 226. The status confirmation indicator 226 is composed of a single LED and is used to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the LED goes out. In this way, since the status confirmation indicator 226 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily check whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. The status confirmation indicator 226 may be installed in any location as long as it is on the front (surface) of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same display mode (illuminated display) is used regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the display may be made so that it is possible to recognize which mode is set. For example, the status confirmation indicator 226 may be illuminated in the setting change mode and flashing in the setting confirmation mode, or vice versa.

In addition, in this embodiment, the status confirmation indicator 226 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be used in combination with other indicators. For example, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the round number indicator 225, the status indicator 224, etc. are turned off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko game machine 100 is equipped with an input device for the player to input for the effects. As shown in FIG. 2(b), in this embodiment, as an example of an input device, an effect button 161 and an effect key 162 consisting of a plurality of keys arranged in a substantially cross shape adjacent to the effect button 161 are arranged on the frame member 150. In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect is performed in which an operation to select one image from a plurality of images is accepted. In this case, for example, a player can operate the effect key 162 consisting of four keys arranged in a cross shape to indicate one of the plurality of images displayed on the image display unit 114, and operate the effect button 161 to select the indicated image. In addition, as the form of the input device, in addition to the illustrated effect button 161 and effect key 162, various input forms such as a lever or a handle can be adopted depending on the content of the effect, etc.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a sub-information display 80 inside the game area 111, which consists of a sub-first change display device 81, a sub-second change display device 82, a sub-first hold display device 83, a sub-second hold display device 84, a sub-regular map change display device 85, a sub-regular map hold display device 86, and a sub-right-hit display device 87.
The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs and is designed to be dynamically lit. The sub-information display 80 does not have an indicator such as the status check indicator 226 that indicates that the sub-information display 80 is in a setting change mode or setting check mode.

The sub-first variable indicator 81 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed, and the sub-second variable indicator 82 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed, and each is composed of one LED. When the display of the corresponding special symbol begins, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (0.5 seconds on → 0.5 seconds off), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary. In other words, the sub-first variable indicator 81 and the sub-second variable indicator 82 repeatedly perform a cyclic display in which one flash is one cycle (= 1 second), and light up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary.

The result of the special symbol jackpot determination may be notified by the sub-first variable display 81 or the sub-second variable display 82. In this case, the LED may be lit in the case of a jackpot and turned off in the case of a miss.

The sub-first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold information items (first hold number) described below, and the sub-second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold information items (second hold number) described below, and each is composed of two LEDs. When the hold number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the hold number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the hold number is "2", the left LED is turned on, when the hold number is "3", the left LED is blinking and the right LED is turned on, and when the hold number is "4", the left and right LEDs are blinking.

The sub-regular symbol variation display 85 is for displaying (informing) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the regular symbol starts, the LED blinks (varies) at a specified interval. Then, when the regular symbol is displayed in a static state, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a win, and goes out in the case of a loss) is displayed in a static state.

In addition, the sub-regular pattern change indicator 85 may be configured to flash while displaying the normal pattern change, and to light up or go out when the normal pattern is displayed as stopped, so that it is possible to know whether or not the normal pattern change is being displayed.

The sub-regular map reserve indicator 86 is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (regular map reserve number) and is composed of two LEDs. When the regular map reserve number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the regular map reserve number is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, when the regular map reserve number is "2", the left LED flashes and the right LED is lit, and when the regular map reserve number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub right-hit indicator 87 is intended to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-hand area of the game area 111 (so-called right hit), and is composed of one LED. The LED lights up during a jackpot state (special game) and during a time-saving game state, and is turned off in other game states.

[Configuration of the control unit]
Next, a control unit that controls the operation and processes signals in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of the image/audio control unit and the lamp control unit of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control unit includes a game control unit 200 as a main control means for determining whether a special symbol has been selected. In addition, as sub-control means, the control unit includes a performance control unit 300 for overall control of the performance, and a payout control unit 330 for controlling the payout of balls.

[Game control unit configuration and functions]
The game control unit 200 includes a CPU 201 which performs calculations when determining whether a special symbol has been won, a ROM 202 which stores programs to be executed by the CPU 201 and various data, and a RAM 203 which is used as a working memory for the CPU 201, etc.

The game control unit 200 controls the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 to be either a high probability state or a low probability state, or either a no-time-reduction state or a time-reduction state. As a result, the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 becomes either a high probability time-reduction game state, which is a high probability state and a time-reduction state, a low probability time-reduction game state, which is a low probability state and a time-reduction state, a high probability no-time-reduction game state, which is a high probability state and a no-time-reduction state, or a low probability no-time-reduction game state, which is a low probability state and a no-time-reduction state. Then, the game control unit 200 switches between the high probability state and the low probability state, and between the no-time-reduction state and the time-reduction state, based on a predetermined condition. In addition, the game control unit 200 performs control such as increasing the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery in the time-reduction state compared to the no-time-reduction state, shortening the normal pattern fluctuation time, and extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123.

The game control unit 200 draws a special pattern when a game ball enters the first start port 121 or the second start port 122. Then, a special game such as a big win game is played depending on the result of the special pattern drawing. In the special game, the game control unit 200 controls the big win port 125, which is a special electric device, to repeat a round in which the open state is maintained until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have entered) is met a predetermined number of times. The game control unit 200 then controls the interval between opening and closing operations when the big win port 125 opens.

In addition, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol lottery when the gaming ball passes through the gate 124. Then, the game control unit 200 controls the operation of the electric tulip according to the result of the normal symbol lottery.
In addition, the game control unit 200 sets holds that occur when the game ball enters the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 during special pattern change, and holds that occur when the game ball passes through the gate 124 during normal pattern change.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sends information related to game control, such as the results of the special pattern lottery and the normal pattern lottery, information on changing between the high probability state and the low probability state, information on changing between the no-time-reduction state and the time-reduction state, and hold setting information, to the presentation control unit 300 using commands described later.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first start gate 121, the second start gate 122, the big prize gate 125, and the normal prize gate 126, the game control unit 200 instructs the payout control unit 330 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls per game ball according to the place where the game ball entered. For example, the game control unit 200 sends an instruction command (command) to the payout control unit 330 so that three prize balls are paid out when the game ball enters the first start gate 121, four prize balls are paid out when the game ball enters the second start gate 122, thirteen prize balls are paid out when the game ball enters the big prize gate 125, and ten prize balls are paid out when the game ball enters the normal prize gate 126. Note that even if it is detected that a game ball has passed through the gate 124, it does not instruct the payout control unit 330 to pay out prize balls linked to the gate.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out prize balls in accordance with an instruction from the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 obtains information on the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit 330. In this way, the number of paid out prize balls is managed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game control unit 200 is connected to a detection means including a first start port detection unit (first start port switch (SW)) 211 that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 121, a second start port detection unit (second start port switch (SW)) 212 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 122, an electric tulip opening/closing unit 213 that opens and closes the electric tulip 123, and a gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 that detects the passage of a game ball through the gate 124.
In addition, the game control unit 200 is connected to a large prize opening detection unit (large prize opening switch (SW)) 215 which detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 125, a large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216 which sets the large prize opening door 125D of the large prize opening 125 to a closed state and a protruding, tilted open state, and a normal prize opening detection unit (normal prize opening switch (SW)) 217 which detects the entry of a game ball into the normal prize opening 126.

In addition, the game control unit 200 is connected to a first special pattern reserved display 218 which displays the number of reserved, unchanging symbols that have entered the first start port 121 while the special pattern is changing, a second special pattern reserved display 219 which displays the number of reserved, unchanging symbols that have entered the second start port 122 while the special pattern is changing, and a normal pattern reserved display 220 which displays the number of reserved, unchanging symbols that have passed through the gate 124 while the normal pattern is changing.
In addition, the game control unit 200 is connected to a first special pattern display 221 which displays the change in special pattern that occurs when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 and the result of the special pattern lottery, a second special pattern display 222 which displays the change in special pattern that occurs when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122 and the result of the special pattern lottery, a normal pattern display 223 which displays the change in normal pattern and the result of the normal pattern lottery, and a status display 224 which displays the status of the pachinko game machine 100.

Then, the detection signals detected by the first start gate switch 211, the second start gate switch 212, the gate switch 214, the big prize gate switch 215 and the normal prize gate switch 217 are sent to the game control unit 200. In addition, control signals from the game control unit 200 are sent to the electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, the big prize gate door opening/closing unit 216, the first special symbol reserve indicator 218, the second special symbol reserve indicator 219, the normal symbol reserve indicator 220, the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the normal symbol indicator 223 and the status indicator 224. As a result, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the number of prize balls paid out as described above.

Also mounted on the front side of the gaming control board are a RAM clear switch 228 for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the RAM 203 of the gaming control unit 200 or to update a setting value (probability of determining a jackpot), which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game, a setting key switch 229 for inputting a signal to switch to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, by operating the setting key, an information display 230 for displaying performance information and setting values that allow the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components.

The information display 230 is composed of four seven-segment displays (230a to 230d, see FIG. 39 below) arranged in the left-right direction. The two seven-segment displays 230a and 230b from the left form an identification segment for displaying identification information showing the type of performance information (data type), and the two seven-segment displays 230c and 230d from the right form a numeric segment for displaying numerical information showing setting values and numerical values of the performance information (see FIG. 38). Static lighting is used to display setting values, and dynamic lighting is used to display performance information.

The game control unit 200 is further connected to an external information terminal board 350 for the board, which transmits various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. The game control unit 200 transmits information obtained from the payout control unit 330 regarding the number of prize balls paid out and information indicating the status of the game control unit 200, etc., to the host computer via the external information terminal board 350 for the board.

[Configuration and functions of the dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 330 comprises a CPU 331 which performs calculations when controlling the payout of balls, a ROM 332 which stores programs executed by the CPU 331 and various data, etc., and a RAM 333 which is used as a working memory for the CPU 331, etc.
The payout control unit 330 then controls the payout of balls based on commands sent from the game control unit 200.
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 receives a command from the game control unit 200 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location where the game ball has entered (such as the first starting hole 121). Then, the payout control unit 330 controls the payout drive unit 334 to pay out the number of prize balls specified in the command. The payout drive unit 334 here is composed of a drive motor that sends out game balls from a storage unit for game balls.

Also connected to the payout control unit 330 are a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, a ball presence detection unit 336 that detects whether game balls are stored in the storage unit (not shown), and a full tank detection unit 337 that detects whether the tray 153 that holds the game balls used by the player when playing and the paid-out prize balls is full or not. The payout control unit 330 receives detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs a predetermined process according to these detection signals.
Furthermore, the payout control unit 330 is connected to a frame external information terminal board 340 that transmits various information to a host computer installed in the hall. The payout control unit 330 transmits, for example, information on the number of prize balls instructed to be paid out by the payout drive unit 334 and information on the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the payout ball detection unit 335 to the host computer via the frame external information terminal board 340. The payout control unit 330 also transmits similar information to the game control unit 200.

[Configuration and functions of the production control unit]
The performance control unit 300 is equipped with a CPU 301 which performs calculations when controlling the performance, a ROM 302 which stores programs to be executed by the CPU 301 and various data, a RAM 303 which is used as working memory for the CPU 301, and a real-time clock (RTC) 304 which measures the date and time.
The performance control unit 300 sets the performance contents based on, for example, the result of the determination of whether or not a special symbol lottery has been won and the variation pattern sent from the game control unit 200. At that time, the performance contents corresponding to the operation input may be set in response to an operation input from the user using the performance button 161 or the performance key 162. In this case, for example, a signal corresponding to the operation (operation signal) is received from a controller (not shown) such as the performance button 161, and the operation content identified by this operation signal is reflected in the performance settings.
Furthermore, when a game is suspended for a predetermined period of time, the performance control unit 300 instructs the setting of a screen display for waiting customers as one of the performance effects.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 sets the presentation contents based on the change information between the high probability state and the low probability state, and the change information between the no time-saving state and the time-saving state received from the game control unit 200.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 sends commands to the image/audio control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 to instruct the execution of the set performance contents.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 is connected to an image/audio control unit 310 that controls the performance using images and sounds, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls the performance using various lamps and movable props 115.

[Image/audio control unit configuration and functions]
As shown in FIG. 4, the image/audio control unit 310 includes a CPU 311 which performs calculations when controlling the images and sounds that express the performance content, a ROM 312 in which programs executed by the CPU 311 and various data are stored, a RAM 313 which is used as a working memory for the CPU 311, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314, a CGROM 315, and an SNDROM 316.

Then, based on the commands sent from the performance control unit 300, the image/audio control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156.
Specifically, the CGROM 315 stores image data such as pattern images and background images to be displayed on the image display unit 114 during play, decorative images for notifying the player of lottery results, characters and items for displaying advance notices to the player, etc. Also, the SNDROM 316 stores various types of sound data such as music and voice to be output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data, as well as sound effects such as jingles.
Based on the pending number command or variable performance start command sent from the performance control unit 300, the CPU 311 analyzes the animation pattern, creates a display list that summarizes drawing commands, and sends the display list to the VDP 314.

Based on the display list received from the CPU 311, the VDP 314 reads out image data and sound data stored in the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, respectively. Furthermore, the VDP 314 performs drawing processing for background image display, pattern image display, pattern image variation, character/item display, and the like using the read image data, and performs sound processing using the read sound data. The VDP 314 then controls the screen display on the image display unit 114 using the image data that has been subjected to the drawing processing. The VDP 314 also controls the sound output from the speaker 156 using the sound data that has been subjected to the sound processing.
In this embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform audio processing in addition to drawing processing, but this is not limiting, and a separate processor dedicated to audio processing may be provided.

[Lamp control unit configuration and functions]
The lamp control unit 320 includes a CPU 321 which performs calculations when controlling the illumination of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable part 115, a ROM 322 in which programs executed by the CPU 321 and various data are stored, and a RAM 323 which is used as a working memory for the CPU 321, etc.
The lamp control unit 320 controls the lighting/flashing and light color of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the command sent from the performance control unit 300. It also controls the operation of the movable prop 115.

Specifically, ROM 322 of lamp control unit 320 stores lighting/flashing pattern data and light color pattern data (light emission pattern data) for board lamp 116 and frame lamp 157 according to the performance content set by performance control unit 300. CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in ROM 322 that corresponds to the command sent from performance control unit 300. Then, lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of board lamp 116 and frame lamp 157 according to the read light emission pattern data.
In addition, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores operation pattern data of the movable role object 115 according to the performance content set by the performance control unit 300. The CPU 321 controls the operation of the movable role object 115 based on the read operation pattern data.

In this embodiment, the game control unit 200, the presentation control unit 300, the image/sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 are each individually configured in a game control board as a main board arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110, and a presentation control board, an image control board, a lamp control board, and a payout control board as sub-boards.
4, the performance button 161 and the performance key 162 are connected to the performance control unit 300 and controlled by the performance control unit 300, but are not limited to this. The performance button 161 and the performance key 162 may be connected to the lamp control unit 320 and controlled by the lamp control unit 320.

[Functional configuration of the game control unit]
Next, the functional configuration of the game control unit 200 will be described.
Fig. 5 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the game control unit 200. As shown in Fig. 5, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol variation control unit 233, a special symbol determination unit 234, and a normal symbol variation control unit 236 as functional units for executing various lottery processes.
The game control unit 200 also includes a variation pattern selection unit 235 as a functional unit that executes processing associated with the variation of special symbols.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 is equipped with a large prize opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, a prize ball processing unit 239, an output control unit 240, and a random number control unit 241, which are functional units that control the operation of various gimmicks and execute data processing related to prize balls, etc.

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used in the special symbol lottery and a random number value used in the normal symbol lottery. In the case of the random number value used in the special symbol lottery, specifically, one number (random number value) is selected (acquired) from a predetermined range of numbers for each type of random number, on the condition that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122. The acquired random number value is used for the judgment by the special symbol judgment unit 234. Although the details will be described later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number indicating whether or not there is a jackpot, a pattern random number indicating the type of jackpot, a variable pattern random number, a reach random number, and the like.
In the case of the random number used in the normal symbol lottery, specifically, one number (random number) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numbers on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 124. The obtained random number is used for the determination by the normal symbol determination unit 232. Note that as the random number used in the normal symbol lottery, in addition to a winning random number indicating whether or not there is a win, a pattern random number indicating the type of win or a variable pattern random number may be set.
When a special pattern lottery is held, the special pattern change control unit 233 controls the change of the special pattern on the first special pattern display device 221 or the second special pattern display device 222 according to the lottery result.

When the special symbols start to change, the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. 20 described later to determine whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if a jackpot is won, and whether it is a small jackpot or a miss if a jackpot is not won. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to the special symbol when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 211 or the second start port switch 212, which are detection means, and the special symbol determination unit 234 determines whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired random number value. The lottery for the special symbol (jackpot lottery) described above refers to the processing in the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234.

Here, the "jackpot" is divided into several types according to the game state that occurs after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, the type of jackpot is determined by the combination of no time-saving state or time-saving state, and high probability state or low probability state. In other words, the types of jackpots based on the game state that occurs after the jackpot game ends include a jackpot that results in a high probability time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends (hereinafter, a jackpot in a high probability time-saving game state), a jackpot that results in a low probability time-saving game state (hereinafter, a jackpot in a low probability time-saving game state), a jackpot that results in a high probability no time-saving game state (hereinafter, a jackpot in a high probability no time-saving game state), and a jackpot that results in a low probability no time-saving game state (hereinafter, a jackpot in a low probability no time-saving game state). Each of these jackpots is associated with an individual special symbol, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the type of special symbol that was won in the special symbol lottery.

In addition, "jackpots" can be divided into jackpots where the jackpot play time is long and a large number of game balls can be expected to be paid out, and jackpots where the jackpot play time is short and almost no game balls can be expected to be paid out. The former are called "long jackpots" and the latter are called "short jackpots." For example, in a "long jackpot," a round in which the open state of the jackpot opening 125 is maintained until a predetermined condition is met (for example, 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have been won) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). In a "short jackpot," a round in which the jackpot opening 125 is open for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

In addition, in the case of a "small win" when a big win is not won, a small win game is played in which the big winning port 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). When a small win is won, the game state before the small win is continued even after the small win game ends. In other words, if the game state when the small win is won is a high probability time-saving game state, the high probability time-saving game state continues even after the small win game ends, and the game state does not transition. Similarly, if the game state when the small win is won is a low probability no time-saving game state, the low probability no time-saving game state continues even after the small win game ends, and the game state does not transition.
In addition, a "small win" is a type of "loss", and none of the above game states that are advantageous to the player are set.

The variation pattern selection unit 235 selects the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 221 or the second special symbol display unit 222. Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern based on the judgment result of whether or not to play a big win game and the judgment result of whether or not to set a variation pattern (for example, 13.5 seconds or more) that can perform a reach performance in the decorative symbol variation performance accompanying the special symbol variation. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol. The details of the operation of the variation pattern selection unit 235 and the special symbol variation control unit 233 will be described later.
Here, "reach" refers to a presentation that makes the player expect a big win with decorative symbols, which will be described later.

When the normal symbol starts to change, the normal symbol determination unit 232 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. 20(d) to determine whether the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win or not. That is, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not to play the auxiliary game of opening and closing the electric tulip 123 based on the random number value for the normal symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231. In addition, when multiple types of wins are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the "type of win" when the judgment result is a win. The normal symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the normal symbol determination unit 232.
When a normal pattern lottery is held, the normal pattern change control unit 236 controls the change of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display device 223 according to the lottery result.
When the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines that the normal symbol lottery results in a "win," the electric tulip operation control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times, creating a state in which the game ball can easily win in the second starting hole 122. When a "loss" is determined, the electric tulip 123 does not open in this manner. The operation patterns of the electric tulip 123 will be described later, but there are, for example, an operation pattern in which the electric tulip 123 opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds, and an operation pattern in which the electric tulip opens three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a "big win" in the special symbol lottery, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 controls the opening operation of the big prize opening 125 in an operation pattern specified based on the type of big prize won as a big prize game. Also, when the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a "small win" in the special symbol lottery, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 opens the big prize opening 125 for a specified time and a specified number of times as a small prize game.
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets commands for managing the number of winning balls for various prize-winning and lottery-related devices and for controlling the payout of prize balls according to winnings.
The output control unit 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 and the payout control unit 330 .
The random number control unit 241 updates various random number values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at a predetermined timing.

[Basic operation of the gaming machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 initializes various devices and sets them as basic processing at startup. After performing the basic processing, the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes main control processing, which is a series of processing related to the progress of the game. When the power is turned off, the game control unit 200 also executes a series of power-off processing.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the operation of the basic process by the game control unit 200.
When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the gaming control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) (step (hereinafter, step is abbreviated as "S") 601). Then, the gaming control unit 200 judges whether or not a RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S602).
If the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S602), the game control unit 200 next judges whether or not a backup flag relating to the operation when the power is cut off is ON (S603).
If the backup flag is ON (Yes in S603), the game control unit 200 next judges whether or not the checksum created when the power was cut off is normal (S604).
If the checksum is normal (Yes in S604), the game control unit 200 then executes a recovery process (S605). In this recovery process, the game control unit 200 sets the sub-control means such as the performance control unit 300 in response to recovery from a power-off state. Specifically, the game control unit 200 outputs a command to the performance control unit 300 to set the sub-control means so as to reflect the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 at the time the power is cut off (whether or not a jackpot game is being played, whether the game is in a high probability state or a low probability state, whether the game is in a time-saving state or not). In addition, in this recovery process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes in S602), the backup flag is OFF (No in S603), or the checksum is abnormal (No in S604), the game control unit 200 then performs initialization processing by clearing the memory contents of RAM 203 (S606) and setting the working area of RAM 203 (S607). The game control unit 200 then outputs a command to the performance control unit 300 to set (initialize) the sub-control means, and sets the sub-board (sub-control means) (S608). Setting the sub-board includes clearing RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S605) is completed, or after the sub-board setting (see S608) is completed, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for game control (S609).Then, the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes interrupt permission (S610), interrupt prohibition (S611), symbol random number control process (S612), initial value random number update process (S613), and judgment of whether the power cutoff flag is ON or not (S614) as a loop process.
Here, the interrupt permission (S610) and interrupt prohibition (S611) are provided to enable execution of an interrupt process during execution of this loop process (S610 to S614). In this embodiment, the main control process in the game control is executed by this interrupt process. The details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S612), the game control unit 200 updates the variable pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S613), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random number values used in game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, if the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S614), the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off, and the gaming control unit 200 repeatedly executes the loop process (S610 to S614) and the main control process by interruption. On the other hand, if the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S614), the gaming control unit 200 starts a process for cutting off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (processing at the time of power cutoff).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the operation of the game control unit 200 during power interruption processing.
In the power interruption process, the game control unit 200 first clears the settings of the output ports for various outputs (S701). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S702). Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the backup flag (S703), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S704), and transitions to an infinite loop.

[Main control process of gaming machine]
Next, the main control process of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko game machine 100, and instructs the presentation control unit 300, which is a sub-control means, to control the presentation, and instructs the payout control unit 330 to control the payout of winning balls.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control process of the game control unit 200.
The main control process is a series of processes in game control, and is repeatedly executed at preset fixed time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). In this embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at preset fixed time intervals, and executes the main control process as an interrupt process when the interrupt is permitted (see S610) in the loop process shown in Fig. 6. As shown in Fig. 8, in the main control process, a random number update process, a switch process, a pattern process, an electric role process, a prize ball process, and an output process are executed in sequence (S801 to S806).

In the random number update process (S801), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241 and updates the values of various random numbers used in game control by the game control unit 200. Details of setting random numbers and updating random number values will be described later.

As the switch processing (S802), a start port switch processing and a gate switch processing are performed.
In the start port switch processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212 in Fig. 3, and executes processing for the special symbol lottery when the switch is turned ON. In addition, as will be described later in detail, when performing pre-determination processing in the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235 is called, and processing for pre-determination is executed.
In the gate switch processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the gate switch 214 in Figure 3, and when the switch is turned ON, executes processing for the normal pattern lottery.
The details of these switching processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S803), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are carried out.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol change control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the change pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol change and processing associated with this pattern change.
In the normal symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal symbol determination unit 232 and the normal symbol change control unit 236, and executes the normal symbol change and processing associated with this pattern change.
The details of these symbol processes will be described later.

As the electric role processing (S804), the big prize slot processing and the electric tulip processing are carried out.
In the large prize opening processing, the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the large prize opening operation control unit 237, and controls the opening operation of the large prize opening 125, which is a special electric device, based on predetermined conditions.
In the electric tulip processing, the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the electric tulip operation control unit 238, and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123, which is a normal electric role, based on predetermined conditions.
The details of these electric accessory processes will be described later.

In prize ball processing (S805), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239 and sets a control command for managing the number of winning balls and for paying out prize balls according to the winnings.

In the output process (S806), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for controlling the presentation to the presentation control unit 300, and outputs a command for controlling the payout to the payout control unit 330. The command for controlling the presentation is generated in each process from S802 to S804, and is stored (set) in a storage area for control commands provided in the RAM 203. The command for controlling the payout is generated in the process of S805, and is stored (set) in a storage area for control commands provided in the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a storage area set for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 sequentially checks the storage areas of each control command in the RAM 203, and if a control command is stored in each storage area (i.e., if a control command has been generated in the processing of S802 to S805), it reads out the control command and outputs it to the output destination (the performance control unit 300 or the payout control unit 330).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, output processing is performed at the end of a series of main control processing. That is, the commands generated in each of the processing steps S802 to S805 by the above-mentioned functions as the first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage area of RAM 203 for each processing step. Then, after these processing steps, output control unit 240 as the second processing means outputs all of the commands generated in each processing step that have been accumulated in the storage area of RAM 203. In other words, in this embodiment, when one cycle of main control processing is executed, the commands generated in the execution of that one cycle are output after the final command generation for that one cycle is performed.

[Modifications of the basic operation of the gaming machine]
In the operation example described with reference to Figures 6 to 8, an interrupt is permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and a main control processing consisting of a series of processing is executed as the interrupt processing. However, the main control processing may be configured to be repeatedly executed at regular intervals, and the specific implementation means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 6 to 8. For example, the main control processing may be incorporated into a series of operations of the basic processing, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the main control processing may be returned to at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Also, while the main control processing is incorporated into a series of operations of the basic processing, an interrupt may be generated at regular intervals, and if an interrupt is generated, the main control processing may be returned to the main control processing incorporated into the basic processing, as in the operation described with reference to Figures 6 to 8.

When a command generated in the basic process is output, in principle, each time a command is generated, it is stored in a command storage area of the RAM 203, and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called and output. The basic process is a special process such as an initial operation that is performed only when the power is turned on, unlike the main control process related to the progress of the game. The basic process is also a process that quickly outputs the generated command so that there are no gaps in the output process, since the processing procedure may vary due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on. Note that, in cases where commands are generated consecutively by multiple related processes, or in other cases, a processing procedure may be adopted in which multiple commands are stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and output together depending on the specific processing requirements.

[Random number update process by game control unit]
The random number value as the judgment information used for various lotteries in game control such as the special symbol lottery is counted by a counter, and starting from a predetermined initial value, one is added each time the random number update process (S801) of the main control process shown in FIG. 8 is performed. Then, the value at the time when each lottery is performed is obtained by the start port switch process (FIG. 9) and the gate switch process (FIG. 10), and is used in the special symbol process (FIG. 11) and the normal symbol process (FIG. 16). This random number counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number value reaches the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 20(a) described later), it returns to the initial value again. In addition, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, there is a risk that the winning value will be estimated based on the update interval and the initial value information. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 6, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process of S613.

[Start port switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the contents of the start port switch process of the switch process shown in S802 of FIG.
In this start port switch process, the process for the winning at the first start port 121 and the process for the winning at the second start port 122 are performed in sequence. Referring to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 first judges whether the game ball wins at the first start port 121 and the first start port switch 211 is ON (S901). If the first start port switch 211 is ON, the game control unit 200 next judges whether the number of reserved balls U1 of the winning balls at the first start port 121 that have not changed is less than the upper limit (S902). In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is set to 4 balls. If the number of reserved balls U1 has reached the upper limit (No in S902), the winning balls at the first start port 121 cannot be reserved any more, so the process for the winning balls at the first start port 121 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number U1 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S902), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for determining whether or not a win has been won this time, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S903). In this case, since the first starting hole 121 has won, a random number value for the special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process of S801. This random number value then determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the subsequent special symbol process. The random number values referred to here include a jackpot random number value that determines whether or not a jackpot is won, a small jackpot, or a miss, a symbol random number value (jackpot symbol random number value) that determines the type of jackpot (time-saving state or no-time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, high probability state or low probability state, long jackpot, short jackpot), a fluctuation pattern random number value that specifies the fluctuation pattern in the symbol fluctuation, a reach random number value that determines whether or not a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that can execute the reach performance described below is set when a miss occurs, and the like.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination process (S904). The pre-determination process is a process (pre-determination) in which a winning ball (reserved ball) that has already obtained a random number by winning at the starting hole but has not yet had its random number determined by the special pattern process described below is determined before the random number is determined by the special pattern process.

The performance control unit 300 of this embodiment can perform a preview performance that suggests the result of the random number judgment by the special pattern processing based on the result of the random number judgment (pre-judgment result) determined by the pre-judgment processing before the random number is judged by the special pattern processing and the judgment result is announced. This preview performance is performed, for example, using a reserved display performance (described later) displayed on the image display unit 114 in response to the occurrence of a winning ball (reserved ball) that has already acquired a random number by winning at the starting hole but has not yet been judged by the special pattern processing. This preview performance based on the pre-judgment suggests to the player the judgment result when the random number is judged by the special pattern processing afterwards for the reserved ball corresponding to the pre-judgment related to the preview performance. This allows the player to play while having expectations about the reserved ball. Details of the preview performance based on the pre-judgment will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U1 (S905).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information obtained by the pre-determination process of S904 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the performance control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S906).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the performance control unit 300 of the increase in the reserved number U1 due to S905 (S907), and ends the processing for the winning at the first starting port 121.

Next, processing for the winning at the second start port 122 is performed. Referring to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 next judges whether or not a game ball has won at the second start port 122 and the second start port switch 212 has been turned ON (S908). If the second start port switch 212 has been turned ON, the game control unit 200 next judges whether or not the number of reserved balls U2 that have not changed due to the winning at the second start port 122 is less than the upper limit (S909). In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is set to four balls. If the number of reserved balls U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S909), no more winning balls that have not changed can be reserved, and processing for the winning at the second start port 122 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number U2 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S909), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery due to this winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S910). In this case, since the winning occurred at the second starting port 122, a random number value for the special symbol lottery (jackpot random number value, jackpot symbol random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value, etc.) is acquired, as in S903 above. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process in S801. The result of the special symbol lottery is then determined in the subsequent special symbol process based on this random number value.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination process (S911). The contents of this pre-determination process are the same as those of S904.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U2 (S912).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S911 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the performance control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S913).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the performance control unit 300 of the increase in the reserved number U2 due to S912 (S914), and ends the processing for the winning at the second starting port 122.

[Gate switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the gate switch processing when a gaming ball passes through the gate 124.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first judges whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 has been turned ON (S1001). If the gate switch 214 has been turned ON, the game control unit 200 then judges whether the number of reserved balls G that have not yet been changed is less than the upper limit (S1002). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is set to 4 balls. If the number of reserved balls G has reached the upper limit (No in S1002), no more winning balls that have not yet been changed can be reserved, and the gate switch process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number G is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery due to this winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). In this case, since the winning is at gate 124, a random number value for the regular pattern lottery (such as a winning random number value) is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number G (S1004).
After the value of the reserved number G is added in S1004, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number G increase command in RAM 203 to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the increase in the reserved number G by S1004 (S1005), and terminates processing for the winning at gate 124.

[Special symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing of the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the big win game flag is ON in the flag setting (hereinafter, flag setting) set in the RAM 203 (S1101). Here, the big win game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.

If the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko game machine 100 is already in the jackpot, so the special symbol processing ends without starting the special symbol change (Yes in S1101). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1101), the special symbol change control unit 233 then judges whether the current state of the pachinko game machine 100 is in the special symbol change (S1102). If the special symbol is not changing (No in S1102), the special symbol change control unit 233 then performs processing on the reserved numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 9) of the special symbols that have not changed (S1103 to S1106). In this embodiment, the reserved number U1 related to the winning of the first start port 121 and the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second start port 122 are distinguished, so this processing is also performed individually for each corresponding start port.

Specifically, the special symbol change control unit 233 first judges whether the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second starting gate 122 is 1 or more (S1103). If the reserved number U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1103), the special symbol change control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the reserved number U2 (S1104). On the other hand, if the reserved number U2=0 (No in S1103), the special symbol change control unit 233 next judges whether the reserved number U1 related to the winning of the first starting gate 121 is 1 or more (S1105). If the reserved number U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1105), the special symbol change control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the reserved number U1 (S1106). On the other hand, if the reserved number U1 is 0 (No in S1105), this means that there is no winning combination to trigger the lottery for the special symbol, so the special symbol variation is not started, and a separate routine for setting up customer waiting is executed, and the process ends (S1116).
In this embodiment, priority is given to processing the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second start port 122. That is, if the reserved number U2 is 1 or more, processing is performed for the reserved number U2, and if the reserved number U2=0, processing is performed for the reserved number U1 (see S803 to S806). On the other hand, it is also possible to control the reserved numbers U1 and U2 to be decremented in the order of winning, regardless of whether the winning is at the first start port 121 or the second start port 122.

After subtracting the reserved number U1 or reserved number U2 in S1104 or S1106, the special symbol variation control unit 233 turns off the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1107). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1116, see FIG. 15 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a jackpot determination process and a variation pattern selection process by a separate routine (S1108, S1109). As will be described in detail later, this jackpot determination process and variation pattern selection process determines setting information (jackpot symbol, game state, variation pattern, etc.) for the variation of the special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222. This information is included in the variation start command sent to the performance control unit 300.

Then, the special symbol change control unit 233 starts changing the special symbols displayed by the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 shown in FIG. 2 based on the setting contents determined in the jackpot determination process and the change pattern selection process (S1110). Then, a change start command including setting information indicating the setting contents (jackpot symbol, game state, change pattern, etc.) is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1111). The change start command set in S1111 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG. 8.

If it is determined in S1102 that the special pattern is changing (Yes in S1102), or after the change start command is set in S1111, the special pattern change control unit 233 determines whether the change time has elapsed (S1112). In other words, it determines whether the time elapsed since the special pattern change started in S1110 has reached the change time set in the change pattern selection process in S1109. If the change time has not elapsed (No in S1112), the special pattern change continues, and the special pattern processing ends.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has elapsed (Yes in S1112), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 first stops the fluctuation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 at the symbol determined in the big win determination process of S1108 (S1113). A fluctuation stop command for stopping the decorative symbols, which will be described later, is set in the RAM 203 (S1114). Then, a different routine of during-stop processing is executed (S1115). The contents of the during-stop processing will be described later. The fluctuation stop command set in S1114 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG. 8.

[Jackpot Determination Processing by the Game Control Unit]
FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the contents of the big win determination process (S1108 in FIG. 11).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the jackpot random number value in the current special symbol lottery (S1201), and determines whether or not a jackpot or a small jackpot has been obtained (S1202, S1205). Whether or not a jackpot or a small jackpot has been obtained is determined by determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number obtained in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches the value set as the winning value for the jackpot or the value set as the winning value for the small jackpot (see FIG. 20(a)).

If the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a jackpot (Yes in S1202), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines the jackpot symbol random number value (S1203). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of jackpot (a jackpot in a high probability time-saving play state, a jackpot in a low probability no time-saving play state, etc.) is determined. The type of jackpot that will occur is determined by whether the value of the jackpot symbol random number obtained in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches any of the values preset for each type of jackpot (see FIG. 20(b)).

After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol (jackpot symbol) representing the type of jackpot determined by the jackpot symbol random number determination as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1204).

If the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a small win (No in S1202, Yes in S1205), the special symbol determination unit 234 then sets a symbol indicating a small win (hereinafter, a small win symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1206).

If the result of the random number determination in S1201 is neither a big win nor a small win (No in S1202 and S1205), the special symbol determination unit 234 then sets a symbol indicating that the lottery was lost (hereinafter, a losing symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1207).

[Variation pattern selection process by game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1109 in FIG. 11).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 (whether it is in a state without time reduction or in a state with time reduction, and whether it is in a state with high probability or a state with low probability) (S1301). Then, using the result of the determination in S1202 of the big win determination process (FIG. 12), it determines whether or not a big win has been won in this special symbol lottery (S1302). Then, if it is a big win (Yes in S1302), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out the variation pattern table for the big win from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1303).

On the other hand, if the player does not win the jackpot (No in S1302), the variation pattern selection unit 235 next judges a random number value to determine whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect to make the player expect a jackpot (S1304). Whether or not to perform the reach effect is determined by judging whether or not the reach random number value acquired in S903 or S910 in Fig. 9 matches a preset value (see Fig. 20(c)).
If the result of the determination using the random number value indicates that a reach effect is to be performed (Yes in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a reach-use variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1306). If the reach effect is not to be performed (No in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a loss-use variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a table that associates multiple pre-prepared fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times of 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) with the value of the fluctuation pattern random number.

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 judges the variation pattern random number value using the variation pattern random number value acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 and the variation pattern table set in S1303, S1306, and S1307 (S1308). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203 and selects a variation pattern according to the random number value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the variation pattern table referenced differs depending on the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is in a time-saving state or a non-time-saving state, and whether it is in a high-probability state or a low-probability state), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether it has been a jackpot or not, and if it has not been a jackpot, whether a reach performance is performed or not), etc., and therefore the determined variation pattern differs.

Then, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1308 as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1309). The setting information for the variation pattern set in S1309 is included in the variation start command set in S1111 of FIG. 11, and is sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG. 8. Details of the variation pattern selected in this embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Processing during stoppage by game control unit]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the contents of the during-stop process (S1115 in FIG. 11).
In this stop processing, the game control unit 200 first checks whether a flag indicating a time-saving state (hereinafter, time-saving flag) is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1401). If the time-saving flag is ON (Yes in S1401), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of lotteries (variation number) J in the time-saving state (S1402) and checks whether the number of lotteries J has become 0 (S1403). If the number of lotteries J=0 (Yes in S1403), the time-saving flag is turned OFF (S1404). The operation of turning ON the time-saving flag and setting the initial value of the number of lotteries J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large prize winning port process (FIG. 17) described later.

If the time-saving flag is OFF (No in S1401) or if the value of the number of lotteries J after turning the time-saving flag OFF in S1404 or after subtraction in S1402 is not 0 (No in S1403), the game control unit 200 then checks whether a flag indicating a high probability state (hereinafter, the high probability flag) is ON in the flag settings of RAM 203 (S1405). Note that if this high probability flag and the previous time-saving flag are both ON, the game is in a high probability time-saving game state, and if the high probability flag is ON and the time-saving flag is OFF, the game is in a high probability no time-saving game state.

If the high probability flag is ON (Yes in S1405), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of lotteries (number of variations) X in the high probability state (S1406), and checks whether the number of lotteries X has become 0 (S1407). Then, if the number of lotteries X=0 (Yes in S1407), the high probability flag is turned OFF (S1408). Note that the operation of turning ON the high probability flag and setting the initial value of the number of lotteries X are performed in the game state setting process (Figure 18) in the large prize entrance process (Figure 17) described below.

If the high probability flag is OFF (No in S1405) or if the value of the number of lotteries X after turning the high probability flag OFF in S1408 or after the subtraction in S1406 is not 0 (No in S1407), the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not a jackpot has been won in this special pattern lottery (S1409). If a jackpot has been won (Yes in S1409), the game control unit 200 then determines the type of jackpot (S1410). Note that here, as an example of determining the type of jackpot, it is determined whether or not it is a long jackpot.

Here, the determination of whether or not there is a jackpot can be made based on the result of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart in FIG. 20(b) described later is set, the answer is Yes in S1409. If a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is set in RAM 203 by the jackpot determination process, the answer is No in S1409.

If the type of jackpot is a long jackpot (Yes in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the long jackpot game flag (S1411). This causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become a jackpot game state (long jackpot game state) in which the type of jackpot is a long jackpot. Note that no distinction is made here between a high probability state and a low probability state for a long jackpot. Whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state is determined by turning on the corresponding flag in the game state setting process (Figure 18) in the jackpot winning port process (Figure 17) described below.

If the type of jackpot is not a long jackpot (No in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the short jackpot game flag (S1412). This causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become a jackpot game state (short jackpot game state) in which the type of jackpot is a short jackpot. As with the case of a long jackpot, no distinction is made between a high probability state and a low probability state in the case of a short jackpot.

After turning the jackpot game flag ON in S1411 or S1412, the game control unit 200 initializes the values of the number of lottery draws J and X (S1413). Furthermore, if the time-saving flag is ON in S1401 and the number of lottery draws J is not 0 in S1403, the game control unit 200 turns the time-saving flag OFF (S1414). Similarly, if the high probability flag is ON in S1405 and the number of lottery draws X is not 0 in S1407, the game control unit 200 turns the high probability flag OFF (S1414).

After initializing the values of the lottery count J and X in S1413, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation (S1417). Here, the content of the opening operation differs depending on whether the winning game flag is turned ON in S1411 or S1412. In other words, the opening operation is set according to the judgment result of the special symbol lottery.
After that, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command for performing an effect in an opening operation according to the big win game flag in the performance control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1418), and ends the processing during the stop. This opening command is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing shown in S806 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of the current special symbol lottery is not a big win (No in S1409), the game control unit 200 next judges whether the result of the current special symbol lottery is a small win or not (S1415). If it is not a small win (No in S1415), the stopped processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is a small win (Yes in S1415), the game control unit 200 starts a small win game (S1416). This sets the game state of the RAM 203 to a small win game state. In the small win game, as described above, the big prize opening 125 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the game ends after a predetermined time has elapsed.

[Customer waiting setting process by the game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1116 in FIG. 11).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1501). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag that is set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.

If the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and the process ends (Yes in S1501). On the other hand, if the customer waiting flag is OFF, the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1502), and turns the customer waiting flag ON (S1503). The customer waiting command set in S1502 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG. 8. The customer waiting flag is set when the variation of the special symbols has stopped and there are no reserved symbols.

[Normal symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing of the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this normal symbol processing, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when the normal symbol lottery is won. When the auxiliary game flag is set, the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip processing (FIG. 19) described later, and it is easy to win the second start hole 122 (auxiliary game state).

If the auxiliary game flag is ON, the auxiliary game state is already set and the normal symbol is stopped, so the normal symbol processing ends without starting the normal symbol change (Yes in S1601). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1601), the normal symbol change control unit 236 then judges whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during normal symbol change (S1602). If the normal symbol is not during change (No in S1602), the normal symbol change control unit 236 then judges whether the reserved number G (see FIG. 10) of unchanged normal symbols is 1 or more (S1603). If the reserved number G=0 (No in S1603), this means that there is no winning to start the lottery for the normal symbol, so the processing ends without starting the normal symbol change.

In contrast, if the reserved number G is 1 or more (Yes in S1603), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the reserved number G (S1604). Then, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in this normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not the normal symbol lottery has been won (S1605). Whether or not a winning number has been won is determined by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number obtained in S1003 of FIG. 10 matches the value set as the winning value in a table shown in FIG. 20(d) or the like described below.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (S1606). That is, if the normal symbol lottery is won, a symbol representing the win (hereinafter, winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol representing a loss in the lottery (hereinafter, losing symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the variation time of the normal symbol (S1607). This variation time is set based on the time-saving flag set in the processes of S1404, S1414 in FIG. 14, S1804, S1807 in FIG. 18 described later, etc. That is, if the time-saving flag is ON when setting by S1607, it is set to a short time (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and if the time-saving flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (e.g., 4.0 seconds). After this setting, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 starts the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIG. 2(a) and FIG. 3 based on the setting contents of S1607 (S1608). The variation pattern of the normal symbol can also be determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value for the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and in S1607, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines the random number value for the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, thereby setting the fluctuation time.

After the normal pattern change has started in S1608, or if it is determined in S1602 that the normal pattern is changing (Yes in S1602), the normal pattern change control unit 236 determines whether the change time has elapsed (S1609). In other words, it determines whether the time elapsed since the normal pattern change started in S1608 has reached the change time set in S1607. If the change time has not elapsed (No in S1609), the normal pattern change continues, and the normal pattern processing ends.

On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (Yes in S1609), the normal pattern variation control unit 236 stops the variation of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display 223 (S1610). Then, the normal pattern variation control unit 236 judges whether or not the result of the judgment in S1605 was a win (S1611). If it was a win (Yes in S1611), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1612). On the other hand, if the lottery was lost (No in S1611), the normal pattern processing ends without turning ON the auxiliary game flag.

[Big prize slot processing by game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the contents of the large prize opening process included in the electric role process shown in S804 of FIG.
In this special prize opening process, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the special prize opening flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). If the special prize opening flag is OFF, there is no prize in the special prize opening 125, so the special prize opening process is terminated (No in S1701). On the other hand, if the special prize opening flag is ON (Yes in S1701), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 next judges whether the pachinko game machine 100 is in the middle of an opening operation in the special prize operation control started in the stop process (FIG. 14) (S1702).

If the pachinko game machine 100 is in the opening mode (Yes in S1702), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 next judges whether the time (opening time) for the preset opening operation has elapsed (S1703). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation of the special prize opening 125 continues, and the special prize opening process is terminated (No in S1703). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1703), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 next sets the operation of the special prize opening 125 (S1704), initializes the number of winning prizes C (C=0) (S1705), adds 1 to the current value of the number of rounds R of the operation of the special prize opening 125 (S1706), and starts the operation (opens) of the special prize opening 125 (S1707).

In the operation setting of S1704, the operation pattern of the large prize opening 125 and the number of rounds (number of operation rounds) to be operated in that operation pattern are set. Examples of cases in which the large prize opening 125 is operated include a case in which a large prize opening is a long or short prize opening, or a small prize opening, in a special pattern lottery. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are set in various ways according to the type of the prize. In addition, in a large prize game, it is stipulated that the operation of the large prize opening 125 is performed multiple times (multiple rounds) in succession. As an example, in the case of a long prize, for example, it is operated for 15 rounds (15R), and in one round, it is opened once for 29.5 seconds. In the case of a short prize, for example, it is operated for 2 rounds (2R), and in one round, it is opened once for 0.9 seconds. To explain further, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a small prize, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. If we compare the operation of a short win with that of a small win in the above example, both open for 0.9 seconds twice. In other words, the operation of the big win opening 125 as seen by the player is the same in the case of a short win and a small win, and it is not possible to distinguish between a short win and a small win based solely on the operation of the big win opening 125 on the game board 110.

In addition, it is stipulated by law that the cumulative opening time of the large prize opening 125 must be set to within 1.8 seconds in the event of a small win. On the other hand, in the event of a large win (long or short win), the large prize opening 125 must be opened multiple times in succession. Therefore, in order to make it difficult to distinguish from the appearance of the operation in a small win from the operation in a short win as described above, in the event of a small win, an operation mode is set in which the large prize opening 125 opens two or more times within a range in which the cumulative opening time in one operation is within 1.8 seconds, and in the event of a short win, the number of rounds is set to the same number as the number of times it is opened in a small win.

Next, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 judges whether the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1704 has elapsed (S1708). If the open state of the large prize opening 125 has not elapsed the opening time (No in S1708), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 then judges whether the number of winning prizes C in the large prize opening 125 is equal to or greater than a specified number (e.g., 9 prizes) (S1709). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winning prizes C is less than the specified number, the operation state (open state) of the large prize opening 125 continues, so the large prize opening process is terminated (No in S1709). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1708) or the number of winning prizes C has reached the specified number (Yes in S1709), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 terminates the operation (closes) of the large prize opening 125 (S1710).

Next, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether the number of rounds R of the operation of the special prize opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1704 (S1711). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, and the special prize opening processing is terminated (No in S1711).

When the number of rounds R of the operation of the big win opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1711), the big win opening operation control unit 237 then starts the ending operation (S1712). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the big win game flag among the ending operations set in each game of the long win game and the short win game.
After this, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 sets an ending command for performing an ending operation corresponding to the big prize game flag in the performance control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1713). This ending command is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

Next, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of the operation of the special prize opening 125 to 0 (S1714), and then determines whether the time elapsed since the start of the ending operation has passed the time (ending time) at which the ending operation should be performed that has been set in advance (S1717). If the ending time has not passed, the ending operation continues, and the special prize opening process is terminated (No in S1717). On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (Yes in S1717), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then goes through a game status setting process by the game control unit 200 (S1718), and then turns off the special prize game flag, and terminates the special prize opening process (S1719). The contents of the game status setting process will be described later.

If it is determined in S1702 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening mode (No in S1702), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the game is ending (S1715). If the game is ending (Yes in S1715), the operation from S1717 onwards is executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko game machine 100 is not in the ending mode (No in S1715), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 next judges whether the special prize opening 125 is in operation (open) or not (S1716). If it is not in operation (No in S1716), the operation from S1705 onwards is executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S1716), the operation from S1708 onwards is executed.
In addition, the presentation performed in the small win game described above is the same as the presentation performed in the short win game, and it is not possible to distinguish between a short win and a small win from the presentation.

[Game Status Setting Process]
FIG. 18 shows the contents of the game status setting process (S1718) by the game control unit 200, which is executed when the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1717).
When the game state setting process is performed, the jackpot game flag is ON in S1701 in FIG. 17 as a prerequisite. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the game control unit 200 first judges the type of the jackpot (S1801, S1802, S1803, S1806). These judgments can be made based on the type of symbols set as setting information in the RAM 203 in the jackpot judgment process (FIG. 12), for example. These judgments are generally similar to S1202, S1203, and S1205 in the jackpot judgment process (FIG. 12), so the judgment results of S1202, S1203, and S1205 may be used.

If it is a small win (Yes in S1801), the game status will not change, and the game status setting process is terminated.
If the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving game state (No in S1801, Yes in S1802 and S1803), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1804). This sets the game state in the RAM 203 to a low-probability time-saving game state. The game control unit 200 also sets the initial value of the number of lotteries J (S1805) and ends the game state setting process. In the illustrated example, the initial value of the number of lotteries J is 100 times. Therefore, if 100 lotteries have been performed in the low-probability time-saving game state, the low-probability time-saving game state ends, and the game state becomes a low-probability no-time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is a low-probability, no-time-reduction jackpot (No in S1801, Yes in S1802, No in S1803), the game control unit 200 ends the process without turning on either the time-reduction flag or the high-probability flag. Therefore, the game state setting in RAM 203 for the game after this jackpot is a low-probability, no-time-reduction jackpot.

If the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving game state (S1801, No in S1802, Yes in S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1807) and sets the initial value of the number of lotteries J (S1808). In this case, the initial value of the number of lotteries J is 10,000 times in the illustrated example. In addition, the game control unit 200 turns on the high probability flag (S1809) and sets the initial value of the number of lotteries X (S1810). In the illustrated example, the initial value of the number of lotteries X is 10,000 times. As a result, the game state setting of the RAM 203 becomes a high-probability time-saving game state. Then, if the lottery in this high-probability time-saving game state has been performed 10,000 times, the high-probability time-saving game state ends, and the game enters a low-probability time-saving non-game state.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high probability no time-saving play state (No in S1801, S1802, S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on only the high probability flag (S1809) and sets the initial value of the number of lottery draws X (10,000 times) (S1810). This causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become a high probability no time-saving play state. Then, if the lottery draws have been performed 10,000 times in this high probability no time-saving play state, the high probability no time-saving play state ends and the state becomes a low probability no time-saving play state.

[Electric tulip processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the contents of the electric tulip processing of the electric role processing shown in S804 of FIG.
In the electric tulip processing, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). If the auxiliary game flag is OFF, the electric tulip 123 will not be opened, and the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S1901). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 next judges whether the electric tulip 123 is operating (S1902).

If the electric tulip 123 is not in operation (No in S1902), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 (S1903) and operates the electric tulip 123 with the set operation pattern (S1904). Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time-saving flag set in the processing of S1404, S1414 in FIG. 14, S1804, S1807 in FIG. 18, etc. For example, if the time-saving flag is OFF when setting in S1903, an operation pattern is set to open once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds, and if the time-saving flag is ON, an operation pattern is set to open three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds. In this way, normally, when the time-saving flag is ON (in the time-saving state), the electric tulip 123 is opened multiple times for a long time, and a winning support (electric tulip support) that makes it easier to win the second starting hole 122 is performed. In addition, multiple operation patterns (types of auxiliary games) of the electric tulip 123 when the time-saving flag is ON or OFF may be prepared, and the operation pattern may be set according to the type of win determined in the normal symbol process (see FIG. 16).

If it is determined in S1902 that the electric tulip 123 is in operation (Yes in S1902), or after the electric tulip 123 has been operated in S1904, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether the opening time for the set operation pattern has elapsed (S1905). If the opening time has not elapsed, the electric tulip 123 will continue to be in operation (open state), and the electric tulip processing will end (No in S1905). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1905), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 will turn off the auxiliary game flag and end the electric tulip processing (S1906).

[Random number determination method]
Here, we will explain in detail the random number determination method used in the big win determination process (Figure 12), the variable pattern selection process (Figure 13), the normal pattern process (Figure 16), etc.
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of random numbers (judgment table) used in the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery in this embodiment.
Figure 20(a) shows an example of the composition of a jackpot random number used in a special pattern lottery, Figure 20(b) shows an example of the composition of a jackpot random number used in a special pattern lottery, Figure 20(c) shows an example of the composition of a reach random number used in a special pattern lottery, and Figure 20(d) shows an example of the composition of a winning random number used in a normal pattern lottery.

Referring to FIG. 20(a), as the judgment value of the jackpot random number, two types of jackpots are set: a jackpot when the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 at the time of jackpot judgment is a low probability state, a jackpot when the game state at the time of jackpot judgment is a high probability state, and a small jackpot. The range of the random number (jackpot random number) is 300, from 0 to 299. In the case of a special pattern lottery (jackpot lottery) in a low probability state, only one winning value is set, and the winning probability is 1/300. In addition, in the case of a special pattern lottery in a high probability state, 10 winning values are set, and the winning probability is 10/300 (=1/30). That is, in the illustrated example, when the starting hole 121, 122 is won in a high probability state and a special pattern lottery is performed, the winning probability is 10 times higher than when a special pattern lottery is performed in a low probability state. In addition, the small prize value is set to three regardless of whether the probability is low or high, and the probability of winning is 3/300 (=1/100).
Here, taking the special symbol lottery in the low probability state as an example, it is determined whether the jackpot random number value (see S903, S910) obtained as a result of winning the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 matches the winning value "5" of the jackpot lottery in the low probability state in Fig. 20(a). Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery in the high probability state and the special symbol lottery for the small win.

Referring to FIG. 20(b), five types of jackpot symbols are available: low probability symbol A, low probability symbol B, high probability symbol A, high probability symbol B, and potential symbol. Here, low probability symbol A and low probability symbol B are symbols that indicate a jackpot in a low probability state, and among these, low probability symbol A indicates a jackpot in a long jackpot (8 rounds) and low probability time-saving game state. Low probability symbol B indicates a jackpot in a long jackpot (4 rounds) and low probability time-saving game state. High probability symbol A and high probability symbol B indicate a jackpot in a long jackpot (15 rounds) and high probability time-saving game state. High probability symbol C and high probability symbol D indicate a jackpot in a long jackpot (8 rounds) and high probability time-saving game state. High probability symbol E indicates a jackpot in a short jackpot (2 rounds) and high probability no time-saving game state. The potential symbol is a symbol that represents a short win (2 rounds) and a high probability jackpot in a no-time-reduction play state. Therefore, the high probability symbol B and the potential symbol have the same play state after a jackpot, but the potential symbol is set separately from the high probability symbol B to set the condition for a latent performance that does not clearly notify the player of the high probability state. The range of random number values is 250, from 0 to 249. In addition, for the jackpot symbol random number, a winning value is set for each of the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122, which are the trigger for the special symbol lottery.

In the low probability pattern A, 35 winning values are assigned to both the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122. Therefore, the probability of winning with the low probability pattern A when a jackpot is won is 35/250 (=7/50).
In the low probability pattern B, 15 winning values are assigned to both the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122. Therefore, the probability of winning with the low probability pattern B when a jackpot is won is 15/250 (=3/50).

For the high probability symbol A, 20 values are assigned as winning values when the symbol enters the first starting hole 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting hole 121, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol A is 20/250 (=2/25).
On the other hand, 150 values are assigned as the winning value when the second starting hole 122 is won. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol A is 150/250 (=15/25).

Five values are assigned to the high probability symbol B as the winning value when the symbol enters the first starting hole 121. Therefore, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol B when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting hole 121 is 5/250 (=1/50).
On the other hand, 25 values are assigned as the winning value when the second starting hole 122 is won. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol B is 25/250 (=1/10).

For the high probability symbol C, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the symbol enters the first starting hole 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting hole 121, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol C is 25/250 (=1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as the winning value when the second starting hole 122 is won. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol B is 10/250 (=1/25).

For the high probability symbol D, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the symbol enters the first starting hole 121. Therefore, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol D when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting hole 121 is 25/250 (=1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as the winning value when the second starting hole 122 is won. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol D is 10/250 (=1/25).

For the high probability symbol E, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the symbol enters the first starting hole 121. Therefore, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol E when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting hole 121 is 25/250 (=1/10).
On the other hand, five values are assigned as winning values in the case of winning the second starting hole 122. Therefore, in the case of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol E is 5/250 (=1/50).

A value of 100 is assigned to the potential symbol as a winning value when the symbol enters the first starting hole 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting hole 121, the probability of winning with the potential symbol is 100/250 (=2/5).
On the other hand, the second starting hole 122 is not assigned a winning value for the potential symbol, and if the second starting hole 122 wins, the potential symbol will not be the winning symbol.

Here, taking the low probability symbol A as an example, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number value (see S903, S910) obtained as a result of winning at the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122 matches the winning value "0 to 34" for the low probability symbol A in FIG. 20(b). Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the lottery for special symbols such as the low probability symbol B.

As described above, by varying the probability of winning the type of jackpot when the first start hole 121 is won and when the second start hole 122 is won, it is possible to provide a variety of gameplay features. In addition, by devising the layout of the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122 on the game board 110 so that it is easier to aim for either the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 in a specific state (mode), it is also possible to encourage players to participate more actively in the game.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is capable of setting a set value which is a stage of the advantageous degree of the game. In the pachinko gaming machine 100, the set value can be set to one of, for example, six stages of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5" and "6".
In the pachinko gaming machine 100, when the setting value is set to "1," the probability of winning is the lowest. For example, when the setting value is "1" and the state is a low probability, the probability of winning is 1/300. Also, when the setting value is "1" and the state is a high probability, the probability of winning is 10/300.
In the pachinko gaming machine 100, when the set value is set to "6," the winning probability is the highest. For example, when the set value is "6" and the game is in a low probability game state, the winning probability is 1/285. When the set value is "6" and the game is in a high probability game state, the winning probability is 10/285.
In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is set in the order of increasing set values "1"<"2"<"3"<"4"<"5"<"6".

Next, the determination of the reach random number will be explained. The reach random number is set according to the reserved number as described later. Here, as an example, the reach random number when the reserved number is 0 will be explained.
Referring to FIG. 20(c), the range of the random number value is 250 from 0 to 249, and 22 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (with reach) that is a variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach performance (for example, 13.5 seconds or more), and 228 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (without reach) that is not a variation pattern that can execute the reach performance (for example, less than 13.5 seconds). That is, in the illustrated example, when the special pattern lottery does not result in a jackpot, the reach performance is performed with a probability of 22/250 (=11/125). Here, the reach performance is a performance performed in the image display unit 114 when the special pattern changes. Hereinafter, the performance when the special pattern changes that does not have a variation pattern that can execute the reach performance is called a no-reach performance, and the performance when the special pattern changes that has a variation pattern that can execute the reach performance is called a reach performance.

Here, taking the case of a reach as an example, it is determined whether the reach random number value (see S903, S910) obtained as a result of winning at the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 matches the winning value of the reach in Figure 20 (c), which is "0 to 21". Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the special pattern lottery without a reach.

In many cases, when the special symbol changes, a performance using a decorative symbol is performed in the image display unit 114 in conjunction with the display control of the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 (hereinafter, when there is no need to distinguish between them, they are referred to as the special symbol display units 221 and 222). The decorative symbol is, for example, configured by displaying three rows of symbols consisting of a sequence of numbers in which the numbers 1 to 9 are written vertically in succession. Then, at the same time that the display of the special symbol changes in the special symbol displays 221 and 222 starts, the decorative symbol displayed in the image display unit 114 starts scrolling. Also, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of the special symbol changes (the start of scrolling of the decorative symbol), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped at the same time that the special symbol is stopped. Generally, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, the decorative symbol stops and three identical numbers are lined up in a straight line horizontally or diagonally. The effects that use decorative patterns that accompany the changing display of these special patterns are called changing effects.

In the reach performance, the following operation is performed on the decorative symbols as a variable performance. First, before the decorative symbols scrolling vertically (horizontally) are fixed and stopped, any two symbols (number series) are temporarily stopped first. At this time, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. To explain further, if the decorative symbols are scrolling vertically, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in a horizontal line.
Next, the scrolling speed of the last row gradually slows down, giving the player a sense of expectation that three identical numbers will line up in a straight line. After the last row temporarily stops, the three symbols are fixed and stopped.
Here, in the reach effect, before the three symbols are fixed and stopped, the SP reach effect or the SP/SP reach effect may be performed. The SP reach effect is generally called the super reach or the special reach, and is an effect that gives more hope for a big win than the reach, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear and a story unfolds. The SP/SP reach is generally called the super super reach or the special special reach, and is an effect that gives more hope for a big win than the SP reach, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear and a story unfolds.
In addition, as shown in Fig. 21 described later, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds), the SP reach or SP/SP reach performance is set to be executed. Note that the above-mentioned fluctuation performance performed together with the reach performance is also called reach-time fluctuation performance.
On the other hand, in the no-reach performance, the decorative symbols scrolling vertically (horizontally) are not determined and stopped before they are determined and stopped without the same numbers lining up in a straight line horizontally (vertically) or diagonally, without any performance that gives the player a sense of expectation like the reach performance.

In this way, when the result of the judgment of the jackpot random number is a miss, the reach random number determines whether to perform a reach effect in which the reach effect is an executable variation pattern on the image display unit 114, or a reach-free effect in which the reach effect is not an executable variation pattern. Also, the reach random number changes the execution rate of the reach effect according to the reserved number, enabling efficient game progress while giving the player an appropriate sense of expectation.
In addition, when a big win is won, a reach effect is performed, and the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in a state where the same numbers are lined up in a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. On the other hand, when a small win is won or a miss is won, the reach effect is performed, and the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in a state where the same numbers are not lined up in the straight line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the normal symbol lottery will be described.
20(d), the range of random number values is 10, from 0 to 9, with one value being assigned as the winning value when the time-saving flag is OFF, and nine values being assigned as the winning value when the time-saving flag is ON. Therefore, when a game ball passes through gate 124 in a non-time-saving state and a normal symbol lottery is held, there is a 1/10 probability of winning. In contrast, when a game ball passes through gate 124 in a time-saving state and a normal symbol lottery is held, there is a 9/10 probability of winning.

Here, taking the time-saving flag OFF as an example, it is determined whether the winning random number value (see S1003) obtained in response to the passage of the game ball through the gate 124, the first start port 121, or the second start port 122 matches the winning value "0" for the time-saving flag OFF in FIG. 20(d). Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the normal symbol lottery for the time-saving flag ON.

Although not shown, multiple winning patterns can be set with different contents of auxiliary games (opening patterns of electric tulips 123) to be played when a winning is determined in the normal symbol lottery. In this case, for example, a winning symbol random number for specifying the type of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set in the same way as the jackpot symbol random number for specifying the type of winning in the special symbol lottery (see FIG. 17(b)). Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value of the winning symbol random number together with the random number value of the winning random number in the gate switch process (see FIG. 10) by the random number acquisition unit 231, and identifies the type of winning based on the acquired random number value by the normal symbol determination unit 232.
It should be noted that the range of random numbers, the ratio of winning values, and each value of the winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in FIG. 20 are merely examples and are not limited to the values shown.

[Example of setting fluctuation patterns]
Next, an example of the setting of the fluctuation patterns and tables used in the fluctuation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13 will be described.
Fig. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the fluctuation pattern and the table used in the fluctuation pattern selection process shown in Fig. 13. Fig. 21 shows an example of the setting of the low probability time-saving non-play state. Although not shown, for other play states such as the high probability time-saving play state, a table of the setting of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is provided separately.
21 shows a setting example when a game ball enters the first start hole 121. When a game ball enters the second start hole 122, a table for setting a variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process may be provided separately, or a table to be referred to when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 may be shared and referred to.

As shown in FIG. 21, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (Yes in S1302 in FIG. 13), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on the jackpot symbol and the variation pattern random number. Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on whether the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. For example, when the jackpot symbol is a "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50-69" assigned to the "high probability symbol A" in FIG. 21, so "PB3" is selected as the variation pattern. The special symbol variation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss (No in S1302 in FIG. 13), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. Specifically, when the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "0", the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether the reach random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 is assigned to the reach random number range "0-21" assigned to the reserved number "0" of "miss" in FIG. 21, or to the reach random number range "22-249". If the acquired reach random number is within the reach random number range "0-21", the fluctuation pattern is determined based on whether the fluctuation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 together with the jackpot random number value matches any of the fluctuation pattern random number values assigned to the reach random number range "0-21". For example, if the fluctuation pattern random number is "51", it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range "50-89", so "PR4" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

As described above, the game control unit 200 determines the special symbol fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern random number value (see S903, S910 in FIG. 9) obtained when the game ball enters the start hole 121, 122, and conditions such as the game state of the pachinko game machine 100, the presence or absence of reach effect, the number of reserved balls, etc. Then, information on the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern is included in a fluctuation start command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300. In the performance control unit 300, as described later, a performance corresponding to (executable during) the fluctuation time specified based on the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation start command is selected and executed as the performance when the special symbol fluctuates.

[Configuration of RAM of the game control unit and RAM of the performance control unit for performing advance notice performance based on advance judgment]
Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the presentation control unit 300 in this embodiment for executing the advance notice presentation based on the advance judgment will be described.
Fig. 22 is a block diagram for explaining an example of the configuration of the RAM 203 (see Fig. 3) of the game control unit 200 according to this embodiment. Fig. 22(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the memory area 204, and Fig. 22(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memories shown in Fig. 22(a).

As shown in FIG. 22(a), the RAM 203 has a memory area 204 as a special symbol reservation memory area that stores the jackpot random number obtained by the jackpot random number lottery. This memory area 204 has eight memory sections corresponding to the maximum number of reserved numbers in the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122 (when the upper limit of each reserved number is 4). More specifically, the memory area 204 has a first memory section 204a, a second memory section 204b, a third memory section 204c, a fourth memory section 204d, a fifth memory section 204e, a sixth memory section 204f, a seventh memory section 204g, and an eighth memory section 204h.

As shown in FIG. 22(b), each of these memory units 204a-204h has an area for storing information indicating which starting port (first starting port 121 or second starting port 122) was won, an area for storing the obtained jackpot random number, an area for storing a pattern random number, an area for storing a reach random number, and an area for storing a variation pattern random number. That is, each of the memory units 204a-204h stores a jackpot random number, a pattern random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number.

Here, each random number is stored in order starting from the first storage unit 204a. To explain more specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage unit 204a to the eighth storage unit 204h, the acquired random number is stored in the first storage unit 204a. Also, for example, when random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit 204a to the fourth storage unit 204d, the acquired random number is stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

Fig. 23 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration example of the RAM 303 (see Fig. 3) of the performance control unit 300 according to this embodiment. Fig. 23(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved memory areas 305 and 306, and Fig. 23(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in Fig. 23(a).
As shown in FIG. 23(a), the RAM 303 includes a first reserved memory area 305 and a second reserved memory area 306 as reserved status memory areas that store the status of reserved balls. The first reserved memory area 305 and the second reserved memory area 306 correspond to the reserved status for the winning of the first starting hole 121 and the reserved status for the winning of the second starting hole 122, respectively, and each has four memory sections. Specifically, the first reserved memory area 305 includes a first memory section 305a, a second memory section 305b, a third memory section 305c, and a fourth memory section 305d. The second reserved memory area 306 includes a first memory section 306a, a second memory section 306b, a third memory section 306c, and a fourth memory section 306d.

As shown in FIG. 23(b), each of these storage units 305a-305d, 306a-306d has a reserved flag storage area for turning the reserved flag ON/OFF and a notification flag storage area for turning the notification flag ON/OFF. The reserved flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of reserved balls for each storage unit 305a-305d, 306a-306d. That is, for example, if the number of reserved balls due to winning in the first starting hole 121 is 3, the reserved flag is ON in the three reserved flag storage areas of the first to third storage units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform a notice performance based on the results of a preliminary judgment for each reserved ball. In the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform a notice performance based on the results of a preliminary judgment depending on the game state and the situation of the performance. Therefore, if a preview performance is to be performed, the notification flag is set to ON, and if a preview performance is not to be performed, the notification flag is set to OFF. For example, if a preview performance is to be performed for the third of the three reserved balls, the notification flag is set to ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage unit 305c.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the RAM 203 has an area (hereinafter, the pre-judgment information storage area) in which pre-judgment information is stored, in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 22(a). The pre-judgment information is information obtained by the pre-judgment process based on the above random numbers (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9). The contents of the pre-judgment information are the same as the information obtained as various judgment results in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11), and specifically, it is information for indicating whether or not a jackpot has been hit (and whether or not a small jackpot has been hit), the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been hit, whether the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is long enough to execute a reach performance, and the contents of the fluctuation pattern. The pre-judgment information stored in the pre-judgment information storage area is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 together with information on the reserve corresponding to the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-judgment process has been performed (hereinafter, the reserve information) or at a unique timing separately from this reserve information, and is included in the pre-judgment result command.

[Preliminary judgment process]
Next, the pre-determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) will be described in detail.
In the pre-determination process in this embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs pre-determination as follows, using a random number table similar to the example of the random number configuration described with reference to Figures 20 and 21.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination process (S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) according to this embodiment.
24, the game control unit 200 first judges whether the game state is a high probability state or not (S2401), and if it judges that it is a high probability state (Yes in S2401), it selects a table for the high probability state and performs a preliminary judgment of the jackpot random number and the jackpot pattern random number (S2402).On the other hand, if it judges that it is No in S2401, it selects a table for the low probability state and performs a preliminary judgment of the jackpot random number and the jackpot pattern random number (S2403).

After the preliminary judgment of the jackpot random number and the jackpot pattern random number in S2402 or S2403, the game control unit 200 judges whether the game state is in the time-saving state (S2404), and if it is judged to be in the time-saving state (Yes in S2404), selects a table for the time-saving state and performs a preliminary judgment of the reach random number (S2405).Furthermore, it selects a table for the time-saving state and performs a preliminary judgment of the fluctuation pattern random number (S2406).
On the other hand, if the answer is No in S2404, a table for a no-time-reduction state is selected to perform a preliminary determination of the reach random number (S2407).Furthermore, a table for a no-time-reduction state is selected to perform a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern random number (S2408).

Then, the game control unit 200 stores the results of the pre-determination of the jackpot random number, the pre-determination of the jackpot pattern random number, the pre-determination of the reach random number, and the pre-determination of the variation pattern obtained as described above in the pre-determination information storage area as pre-determination information (S2409). Furthermore, in order to send the pre-determination information to the performance control unit 300, a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S2410).

The above-mentioned preliminary judgment is performed using a random number value (see S903, S910 in FIG. 9) obtained in response to the entry of the game ball into the starting hole 121, 122, and a judgment table having a configuration similar to that of the judgment table used in the jackpot judgment process (see FIG. 20). In other words, the judgment itself after selecting the judgment table to be used is the same as the judgment in the jackpot judgment process (see S1201 in FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, the subroutine (see S1108 in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12) of the jackpot judgment process used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called, and the random number judgment in the above-mentioned preliminary judgment is performed.

By configuring in this manner, in this embodiment, there is no need to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for judging random numbers separately from the jackpot judgment process in order to judge the random numbers in the pre-judgment process. This reduces the number of control instructions, and suppresses an increase in the size of the programs related to the jackpot judgment process and the pre-judgment process. Also, as described above, if the judgment table used for the pre-judgment is configured in the same way as the judgment table used for the jackpot judgment, the judgment table used for the jackpot judgment may also be used for the pre-judgment.

...

In this case, the subroutine (see S1109 in FIG. 11 and FIG. 13) of the variation pattern selection process used in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 11) can be called and used to predict the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol processing may be used for the predictive table used to predict the variation pattern selection. By configuring in this way, the number of control commands related to predictive prediction of the variation pattern selection can be reduced, and an increase in the size of the program can be suppressed.

When the pre-judgment process and the jackpot judgment process during the special symbol change are performed in the same subroutine using the same judgment table group, the execution time of each process is different, so the pre-judgment result and the judgment result by the jackpot judgment process during the special symbol change may differ. That is, after the pre-judgment process is performed, the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 (high probability state or low probability state, time-saving state or no time-saving state) changes by the time the special symbol change starts. In this case, different types of judgment tables are used depending on the game state, so the specific judgment table used for judgment will be different when the pre-judgment process is performed and when the jackpot judgment process is performed. Therefore, even if the same random number value obtained when winning the start hole 121, 122 is used, the pre-judgment result and the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process may differ. In such a case, if the game state changes after the pre-judgment process is performed by the time the special symbol change starts, the performance control unit 300 may perform control such as (prohibition) not to perform the performance based on the pre-judgment result.

In accordance with the command output from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 as described above, the performance control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157. For example, when the performance control unit 300 receives a command indicating the start of a door opening error, the performance control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display a message such as "Please call an attendant" or an image indicating an abnormal state. The performance control unit 300 also causes the speaker 156 to output an alarm indicating an abnormal state, and restricts the output of music, voice, sound effects, and the like. The performance control unit 300 also turns on the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 in red, for example, to indicate an abnormal state.

In addition, although it has been described here that the performance control unit 300 notifies the occurrence of an error using all of the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157, it may be possible to use only some of these. The notification mode may be switched depending on the type of error. For example, when a door opening error occurs, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157 may all be used as described above. When a payout error occurs, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 notify the occurrence of an error. This allows staff at the gaming establishment (pachinko parlor) to easily determine the urgency of an error that has occurred in the gaming machine.

[Operation of the production control unit]
Next, the operation of the performance control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the operation of the performance control unit 300.
The operation of the performance control unit 300 consists of the main processing shown in Fig. 25(a) and the interrupt processing shown in Fig. 25(b). Referring to Fig. 25(a), the performance control unit 300 first performs initial settings at startup (S2501), sets the cycle of the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) (S2502), and then accepts interrupt processing while updating the random numbers used in performance control according to the set cycle (S2503).

The interrupt process is performed periodically according to the cycle set in S2502. Referring to FIG. 25(b), in this interrupt process, the performance control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs command reception process (S2511). In this command reception process, the performance content (performance pattern) is selected. The performance control unit 300 also performs performance button process to accept the operation of the performance button 161 by the player (S2512). After this, the performance control unit 300 performs command transmission process to transmit a command including information on the selected performance pattern to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S2513). As a result, a performance is performed by displaying an image and outputting sound on the image display unit 114, operating the movable role object 115, lighting the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, etc.

[Command reception processing by the production control unit]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command receiving process (S2511 in FIG. 25B).
In this command reception process, the performance control unit 300 first judges whether or not the preliminary judgment result command and the reserved number increase command have been received (S2601). The preliminary judgment result command and the reserved number increase command are commands that are set in the game control unit 200 in the start port switch process shown in Fig. 9 (S906, S907, S913, S914) and sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in Fig. 8.
Then, when the performance control unit 300 judges that the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command have been received (Yes in S2601), the performance control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the hold number stored in the RAM 303 (S2602). Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 performs a pre-determination performance selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S2603). The contents of the pre-determination performance selection process will be described later.

If the received command is neither a pre-determination result command nor a reserved number increase command (No in S2601), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the received command is a fluctuation start command (S2604). This fluctuation start command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 by the game control unit 200 (S1111) and sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG. 8.
If the received command is a fluctuation start command (Yes in S2604), the performance control unit 300 executes a performance selection process (S2605). When a fluctuation start command is received, a random number value for performance control used in the performance selection process is acquired. This random number value is a random number value that is periodically updated in S2503 of the main process shown in FIG. 25(a). The details of the performance selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a reserved number increase command, or a fluctuation start command (No in S2601 and S2604), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the received command is a fluctuation stop command (S2606). This fluctuation stop command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 by the game control unit 200 (S1114) and sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG. 8.
If the received command is a fluctuation stop command (Yes in S2606), the performance control unit 300 executes a fluctuation performance end process (S2607). In the fluctuation performance end process, the performance control unit 300 analyzes the received fluctuation stop command and sets a fluctuation performance end command in the RAM 303 to instruct the end of the pattern fluctuation performance.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a reserved number increase command, a fluctuation start command, or a fluctuation stop command (No in S2601, S2604, and S2606), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the received command is an opening command for starting the opening operation of the big win game (S2608). This opening command is a command that is set in the stopped state process shown in FIG. 14 (S1418) and sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG. 8.
If the received command is an opening command (Yes in S2608), the effect control unit 300 executes a big win effect selection process (S2609). The big win effect selection process will be described in detail later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a reserved number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, or an opening command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606, and S2608), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the received command is an ending command for starting the ending operation of the big win game (S2610). This ending command is a command that was set in the big win opening process shown in Fig. 17 (S1713) and sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in Fig. 8.
If the received command is an ending command (Yes in S2610), the performance control unit 300 executes an ending performance selection process (S2611). The details of the ending performance selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, or an ending command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606, S2608, and S2610), the performance control unit 300 then executes a customer waiting command reception process to transition the received command to a customer waiting state (S2612). The customer waiting command reception process will be described in detail later.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process (S2603) and the effect selection process (S2605) of FIG.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S2801). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the reserved number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S2802). Then, the effect control unit 300 selects an effect pattern (pre-determination effect pattern) to be used in the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination result command and the reserved number increase command (S2803).

Here, as the pre-determination performance pattern, various performance patterns can be provided that foretell the result of the random number determination by the special pattern processing before the start of the fluctuation based on the result of the random number determination by the special pattern processing. For example, a reserved display performance, a continuous notice performance, etc. can be provided as a pre-determination performance pattern. In this embodiment, when a reserved ball occurs, a display showing the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special pattern reserved display 218 and the second special pattern reserved display 219 of the display 130 (see FIG. 2), and a reserved display suggesting the occurrence of a reserved ball and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the image display unit 114 (reserved display performance). Therefore, in this reserved display performance, by reflecting the pre-determination result in the display mode of the reserved display, etc., a pre-determination performance can be provided that suggests to the player the judgment result when the random number determination by the special pattern processing is performed later for the reserved ball.

Note that, although the case where the pending display effect is used as the pre-determination effect has been described here, it is possible to perform a variety of preview effects by reflecting the various effects performed before the start of fluctuations based on the random number determination results by the special pattern processing. For example, effects using the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114, effects using the illumination of the board lamp 116 and frame lamp 157, effects using the operation of movable parts, effects using audio output such as music and sound effects, etc. can be set as pre-determination effect patterns.

In addition, the pre-determination performance is executed in conjunction with the pattern change for other winning balls that is performed before the pattern change for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which a pre-determination has been performed. In this embodiment, the reserved balls are limited to four per start port (first start port 121 or second start port 122) (see FIG. 9). Also, priority is given to the consumption of reserved balls in the second start port 122. In this case, for example, if a pre-determination is performed for a reserved ball in the second start port 122, pattern changes will be performed for up to four winning balls, including the currently changing change (referred to as the change in question), before the pattern change for that reserved ball is performed. In the advance notice performance for the reserved ball for which a pre-determination has been performed, if multiple pattern changes are performed before the pattern change for that reserved ball, an advance notice performance (continuous advance notice performance) that spans the multiple pattern changes may be performed.

Then, the performance control unit 300 sets a reserved number command containing the value of the reserved number after the addition and information on the pre-determined performance pattern selected in the pre-determined performance selection process in the RAM 303 (S2804). The reserved number command contains information indicating the selected pre-determined performance pattern to notify the CPU 311 of the image/audio control unit 310 of the pattern. By receiving the reserved number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected pre-determined performance pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data for representing the selected pre-determined performance pattern from the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, and displays the pre-determined performance using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156.

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S2811). It also subtracts 1 from the reserved number value stored in the RAM 303 (S2812). The effect control unit 300 then selects a fluctuation effect pattern for the pattern fluctuation by the image displayed on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (such as the type of jackpot, the game state after the jackpot, and fluctuation pattern) obtained from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command (S2813).

Finally, the performance control unit 300 sets a variable performance start command in the RAM 303 to instruct the start of execution of the selected performance (S2814). The variable performance start command includes information indicating the selected variable performance pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the selected pattern. By receiving the variable performance start command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected variable performance pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data for representing the selected variable performance pattern from the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, and displays the variable performance using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the selection process of the variation presentation pattern of the pattern variation in S2813, the variation presentation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. The variation presentation pattern of the decorative pattern, the background presentation, the notice presentation, etc. are determined based on the variation presentation pattern determined here. The variation presentation of the decorative pattern is a presentation display performed on the image display unit 114 in conjunction with the variation presentation of the special pattern performed on the first special pattern display device 221 or the second special pattern display device 222. In this variation presentation of the decorative pattern, a reach presentation, etc. is executed. Unlike this embodiment, if multiple variation presentation patterns are set for the variation pattern, the variation presentation pattern may be selected by lottery using a presentation random number (one of the random numbers updated in S2503 of FIG. 25(a), and the presentation random number value is obtained when the variation start command is received).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win effect selection process (S2609) of FIG.
In this big win effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information on the type of big win symbol) (S3001), and selects an effect pattern (big win effect pattern) (S3002). Then, the effect control unit 300 reads image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected big win effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets these data together with a big win effect start command instructing the selected effect in the RAM 303, and ends the big win effect selection process (S3003). This determines the effect during the big win. In addition, in the selection of the big win effect pattern (S3002), a judgment may be made based on a random number value obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (S2611) of FIG.
In this ending performance selection process, the performance control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information on the type of big win symbol) (S3101), and selects a performance pattern (ending performance pattern) (S3102). Then, the performance control unit 300 reads image data and sound data used for the performance by the selected ending performance pattern from the ROM 302, sets the ending performance start command that instructs the selected performance together with these data in the RAM 303, and ends the ending performance selection process (S3103). Note that in the selection of the ending performance pattern (S3102), a judgment may be made based on a random number value obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting command receiving process (S2612) of FIG.
The performance control unit 300 judges whether or not a customer waiting command for switching to a customer waiting state has been received (S3201). If a customer waiting command has been received (Yes in S3201), the performance control unit 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S3202) and sets the measurement flag in the RAM 303 to ON (S3203). On the other hand, if the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S3201), the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not the measurement flag stored in the RAM 303 is ON (S3204). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in S3204), the customer waiting command reception process ends.

If the measurement flag is ON (after Yes in S3204 or ON in S3203), the performance control unit 300 then determines whether the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time (e.g., 10 seconds) (S3205). If the time has not expired (No in S3205), the customer waiting command reception process ends. On the other hand, if the time has expired (Yes in S3205), the performance control unit 300 turns OFF the measurement flag stored in RAM 303 (S3206), sets a customer waiting performance command to perform a customer waiting performance (demo performance) in RAM 303, and ends the customer waiting command reception process (S3207).

When the command reception process is completed in this manner, one of the following commands is set in RAM 303: variable performance start command, variable performance end command, big win performance start command, ending performance start command, or customer waiting performance command.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button processing (S2512 in FIG. 25(b)).
In this effect button process, the effect control unit 300 first judges whether or not the player has operated the operation means such as the effect button 161 during a predetermined acceptance period (valid period) (S3301). Here, the operation of the operation means includes the effect button 161 being pressed to turn ON, and the center key or surrounding keys of the effect keys 162 being pressed to turn ON. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 100 is provided with an operation device other than the effect button 161 and the effect keys 162, such as a touch panel, it includes the detection of the operation of that device. The effect control unit 300 receives operation signals from the controllers of these devices and detects that an operation has been performed.

If an operating means such as the performance button 161 is operated (Yes in S3301), the performance control unit 300 sets a performance button command including information indicating the operation content of the operating means in RAM 303 and ends the performance button processing (S3302).

Then, the performance control unit 300 performs the command sending process (S2513) in FIG. 25(b) and sends the command set in the RAM 303 in the command receiving process and performance button process to the image/audio control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320. Based on the received command, the image/audio control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 then control the image display on the image display unit 114, the sound output, the operation of the movable prop 115, the illumination of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, etc., to execute the set performance.

[Information displayed on the information display in each gaming area]
Next, the display information of the information display 230 in each game section will be described with reference to Fig. 32. In the table of display information in Fig. 32, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of outs during normal play, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 230 are associated with each other.
Here, the first game section shown in Fig. 32 starts when the power is turned on for the first time. The setting of 60,000 total outs is a value that can approximately guarantee one day's operation of a pachinko game machine that produces 100 shots per minute. The normal base value is always displayed in two digits in the numeric segment. Also, if the normal number of outs is "0" or if the normal base value is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the numeric segment.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 230 includes "bL.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the current play section, "b1.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section one period before, "b2.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section two periods before, and "b3.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section three periods before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 230 includes "--", which indicates that there is no calculated normal base value, "00", which indicates that the normal base value is "0" or the normal out count is "0", "01" to "99", which indicate that the normal out count is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and "99.", which indicates that the normal base value is "100" or more. Note that if the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information will always be "0" and it will be displayed in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical segment does not change (it is displayed as a lit light) regardless of the play area or the number of outs during normal play, but the display mode of the identification information displayed in the identification segment changes (it is displayed as a flashing light or a lit light) depending on the play area or the number of outs during normal play (whether or not a calculated normal base value is present, and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth play zones, when displaying the identification information of a play zone in which there is no calculated normal base value, the identification information will be displayed in a blinking manner. In addition, in the second play zone and onwards, when displaying the identification information of the current play zone ("bL."), if the period in which the reliability of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during normal play is between 0 and 5999), the identification information will be displayed in a blinking manner. In all other cases, the identification information will be displayed in a lit manner.

Here, as an example of the display on the information display 230, if the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, the data selection counter value is "0", and the normal base value stored in the first area of the base memory area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 230 will flash "bL." and the numeric segment will light up and display "35".

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information displayed in the numeric segment does not use the decimal point DP of the seven-segment display, i.e., "00" to "99", whereas when the normal base value is "100" or more, the performance information displayed in the numeric segment uses the decimal point DP of the seven-segment display, i.e., "99.", making it easier to know that the normal base value is abnormal.

Also, when the base value is normally less than "10", a "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numeric segment, resulting in a two-digit display (e.g. "01"), making it possible to effectively use the two seven-segment displays as numeric segments and provide an easy-to-understand display.

In addition, when the normal base value for the current play area is displayed, if the number of normal outs for the current play area is between 0 and 5999, which is not enough to calculate the normal base value, the identification information "bL." displayed in the identification segment will flash, making it easier to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is unreliable information.

In addition, if no normal base value has been calculated, a non-numeric "- - " will be displayed in the numerical segment, making it easier to understand that no normal base value has been calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment.

In addition, rather than executing the game ball counting process, performance information calculation process, and performance display data setting process as information programs, it is also possible to execute one or two of them as game programs (for example, execute the game ball counting process within the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while executing the rest as information programs.

In addition, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display device 230 may be executed by the performance program, rather than by the output control process, which is the game program.

In addition, instead of using the out ball detection switch 227 to detect out balls consisting of game balls that have entered the normal prize entry port 126, the first start port 121, the second start port 122, and the large prize entry port 125, and game balls that have flowed into the discharge port 117, the out ball detection switch 227 may be configured to detect only game balls that have flowed into the out port. In that case, the number of outs (total number of outs, number of outs during normal play) may be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 227, the normal prize entry port switch 217, the first start port switch 211, the second start port switch 212, and the large prize entry port switch 215.

(Main processing of the general control unit)
The main processing of the image/audio control unit 310 will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the image/audio control unit 310. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from a power supply board (not shown), is input to the CPU 311.

First, the CPU 311 prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, the CPU performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting the built-in registers, granting access to the RAM 313, initializing (clearing to 0) all RAM areas of the RAM 313, starting the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate timer interrupts, and so on, and then in step T3, all interrupts are permitted.

In step T4, the CPU 311 performs an adjustment mode switching process. Specifically, by referring to an input signal from a changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by a gaming store staff member, the CPU 311 performs a process for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 and the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the image display unit 114, and for switching the adjustment mode related to the volume and light intensity adjustment (whether or not the volume can be adjusted, whether or not the light intensity can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5) and the initial value of the light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5) and the adjustment range of the light intensity value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)).

Here, a changeover switch (not shown) is provided on the game control board serving as the main board, and switches between adjustment modes related to the volume of the performance sounds output from the speaker 156 and the light intensity of the display devices (image display unit 114, sub-display unit (a display device that displays images related to the performance separately from the image display unit 114)) and various lighting devices (frame lamp 157, board lamp 116).
In addition, the setting (adjustment) of the volume and light values using a selector switch (not shown) can be performed at any time as long as the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on (after the image/sound control unit 310 has been started).

In step T5, the CPU 311 performs a volume adjustment process. Specifically, the CPU 311 performs a process to adjust the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the detection switch that detects the operation of the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player.

In step T6, the CPU 311 performs a light intensity adjustment process. Specifically, the CPU 311 performs a process to adjust the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the image display unit 114 based on a detection signal (down button detection signal, up button detection signal) from a detection switch that detects the operation of the effect keys 162 that can be operated by the player.

The setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the performance key 162 is restricted (limited) when the variable performance starts and ends (when the decorative pattern 41 stops). In addition, the settings (adjustments) of the volume value and light intensity value using the performance key 162 are restricted (limited) from when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on until the game progress control starts (specifically, during the setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, during the initial operation of various drive sources, etc., until a timer interrupt is started on the game control board), and during the notification (output of notification sound) of important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be notified with priority over a full tray error or a payout abnormality.

In addition, while the abnormality warning sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of the various sound effects (such as background music) output from the speaker 156 is reduced from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality warning sound ends, the volume of the various sound effects is restored to the volume before the reduction.

In step T7, the CPU 311 performs an eco mode control process. Specifically, the CPU 311 performs a process to control the start and end of an eco mode that reduces the amount of light from the backlight of the image display unit 114 to reduce power consumption.

In step T8, the CPU 311 determines whether or not it has received a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the performance control unit 300. If it has not received a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command, it proceeds to step T11. If it has received a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command, it proceeds to step T9.

In step T9, the CPU 311 performs an animation pattern setting process. Specifically, the CPU 311 performs a process of determining an animation pattern from an animation group of a type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and setting (setting) the animation pattern in a predetermined area of the RAM 313.

In step T10, the CPU 311 performs a sound pattern setting process. Specifically, the CPU 311 determines a sound pattern from a sound group of a type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and sets the sound pattern in a predetermined area of the RAM 313.

In step T11, the CPU 311 determines whether a frame switching flag is set in the RAM 313, indicating that it is time to update the frame of the image displayed on the image display unit 114. If the frame switching flag is set, the process proceeds to step T12. If the frame switching flag is not set, the process proceeds to step T4.

The frame switching flag is set by the V blank interrupt process, which is executed every time the image/audio control unit 310 receives a V blank signal sent from the VDP 314 every 1/30th of a second (the time it takes for the drawing and display of one frame of the performance image to be completed). Therefore, the processes in steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

In step T12, the CPU 311 clears the frame switch flag set in the RAM 313, and in step T13 performs a scene update process. Specifically, the CPU 311 refers to the scene switch counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter that are updated in the V blank interrupt process described above, and updates the address of the animation scene based on the animation pattern determined in step T9, and updates the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

In step T14, the CPU 311 performs drawing control processing. Specifically, in accordance with the priority order (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs, the CPU 311 generates a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address, outputs this display list to the VDP 314, and performs processing to instruct the drawing of a display image based on the display list.

As a result, the VDP 314 draws display images based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and also performs processing to display the images (performance images, abnormality notification images) drawn in the display frame buffer on the image display unit 114. In other words, the frame update timing becomes the start and end timing of various performances (image displays and sound outputs such as hold displays, variable performances, big win preview performances, and pre-reading performances) performed by the image display unit 114. Note that performances (performance operations of the movable role-player 115) directly controlled by the performance control unit 300 or lamp control unit 320 may or may not coincide with the frame update timing.

In step T15, the CPU 311 performs audio control processing. Specifically, the CPU 311 generates an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputs the audio control command to the image/audio control unit 310.

As a result, the image/audio control unit 310 performs processing to output various special sounds and notification sounds based on the voice control commands from the speaker 156. When this processing ends, the process proceeds to step T4.

In this way, when the variable presentation starts and ends (when the decorative pattern 41 stops), the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using a selector switch (not shown) that can be operated by game store staff, but volume and light intensity adjustments using the presentation key 162 that can be operated by the player are regulated (limited). This makes it difficult for players to miss important points such as the start and end of the variable presentation, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, during the notification (output of alarm sound) of important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal win, abnormal win, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be given priority over a full tray error or a payout abnormality, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using a changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by game store staff, but volume and light intensity adjustment using the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player is regulated (limited). This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the game store in adjusting the volume and light intensity while avoiding the inconvenience of a player not noticing the occurrence of an abnormality when trying to adjust the volume or light intensity.

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of the various sound effects (BGM, etc.) output from the speaker 156 is reduced from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of the various sound effects is restored to the volume before the reduction. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing the abnormality notification sound due to the various sound effects, and ensures the security of the gaming machine.

Note that while an abnormality is being notified (an alarm sound is being output), it may be impossible to set (adjust) the volume value or light intensity value using the effect key 162 that the player can operate, or the adjustment range of the volume value or light intensity value may be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of the lamp control unit)
The role initial processing of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a flowchart showing the role initial processing of the lamp control unit 320, and this processing is executed within a timer interrupt processing executed in the lamp control unit 320 at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the CPU 321 determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) has been received from the game control unit 200. If a power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102; if a power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the CPU 321 sets the initial processing number, which is updated during each process of the reel initial processing, to "1" to execute the origin return process for the reels (movable reels 115, sub-image display section (not shown), and performance button 161).

In step R103, the CPU 321 determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the process proceeds to step R105 without executing the origin return process for the reel. If the initial processing number is "1", the process proceeds to step R104, where it executes the origin return process and ends the current reel initial processing. Specifically, it performs processes such as executing the return operation of the reel (movable reel 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) to the origin position based on the input signal from the position detection sensor and setting the initial processing number to "2". The origin return process will be described in detail later.

In step R105, the CPU 321 determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the current reel initial processing is terminated without executing the initial operation processing of the reel, and if the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is performed and the current reel initial processing is terminated. Specifically, the CPU 321 performs processing such as performing an initial operation and initial light emission to check whether the reel is operating normally and setting the initial processing number to "0". Details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

In this way, according to the reel initial processing shown in FIG. 34, the origin return processing for returning the various reels to their origin positions and the initial operation processing for performing the initial operations and initial light emission of the various reels are not executed at the same time. Therefore, the return operations of the various reels to their origin positions and the initial operations and initial light emission of the various reels are not mixed, and it becomes possible to check the return operations separately from the initial operations and initial light emission.

In addition, according to the reel initial processing shown in FIG. 34, the origin return processing is executed before the initial operation processing. Therefore, the various reels start their initial operation from the origin position, making it easier to determine whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the various reels.

(Origin return process of lamp control unit)
The origin return process of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 35 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control unit 320.

In step R105-1, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number, which indicates the progress of the origin return status of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)), is "0". If the board role processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R105-3. If the board role processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the drive target to be returned to the origin is set to the movable role 115 (movable performance device), and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number is "1." If the board role processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R105-12. If the board role processing number is "1," the process proceeds to step R105-4, where the drive target to be returned to the origin is set to the sub display device (not shown), and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the CPU 321 determines whether the target reel is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it determines the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects whether each reel is in the origin position. If the target reel is not in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-6. If the target reel is in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the CPU 321 drives the drive motor to move the target board part so that the target board part returns to its origin position, and in step R105-7, increments by +1 the board part abnormality determination timer to determine the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the board part does not return to its origin position within a specified time.

In step R105-8, the CPU 321 determines whether the updated board role abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the board role abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit, it assumes that a return abnormality has occurred in the board role to be driven and proceeds to step R105-9. If the board role abnormality determination timer is not at its upper limit, it proceeds to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the CPU 321 sets in the RAM 323 recovery abnormality information (movable performance device recovery abnormality information, sub display device recovery abnormality information) indicating that a recovery abnormality has occurred in the target board role, and in step R105-10, clears the board role abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-11, the CPU 321 updates the board role processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "0", the board role processing number is updated to "1" to drive the sub-image display unit (not shown), and if the board role processing number is "1", the board role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to its origin.

In step R105-12, the CPU 321 determines whether the frame role processing number, which indicates the transition of the origin return status of the frame role (performance button 161), is "0." If the frame role processing number is "0," the process proceeds to step R105-13, and if the board role processing number is not "0," the process proceeds to step R105-20.

In step R105-13, the CPU 321 determines whether the performance button 161 is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it determines an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the performance button 161 is in the origin position. If the performance button 161 is not in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-14, and if the performance button 161 is in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the CPU 321 drives the effect button drive motor to move the effect button 161 so that the effect button 161 returns to its original position, and in step R105-15, increments by +1 the frame role object abnormality determination timer to determine the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the effect button 161 does not return to its original position within a predetermined time.

In step R105-16, the CPU 321 determines whether the updated frame role object abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit, it assumes that a return abnormality has occurred in the performance button 161 and proceeds to step R105-17. If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is not at its upper limit, it ends the current origin return process.

In step R105-17, the CPU 321 sets in the RAM 323 recovery abnormality information indicating that a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 161, and in step R105-18, clears the frame role object abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-19, the CPU 321 updates the frame role object processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame role object processing number is "0", the CPU 321 updates the frame role object processing number to "1" to end the process of returning the frame role object (performance button 161) to its origin.

In step R105-20, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role processing number is "2" and the frame role processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the CPU 321 clears the board role processing number and the frame role processing number, and in step R105-22, sets the initial processing number described above to "2" to execute the initial operation processing of the role, and ends this return to origin process.

In this way, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 35, when the movable role 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown), whose performance positions (movement areas) overlap when the power is turned on, are not in the origin position (standby position), they are not returned to the origin position (standby position) at the same time (at the same time) but are returned to the origin position in a specified order (the order of the movable role 115 → the sub-image display unit (not shown)). This makes it easier to check whether various board roles have returned to their origin positions. Also, when the movable role 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) are in contact with each other in a way that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to prevent the two roles from applying load to each other, and to prevent the inconvenience of both roles being damaged at the same time.

In addition, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 35, the return operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) to the origin position and the return operation of the frame role (performance button 161) to the origin position can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the return operation of the various roles can be shortened, and it becomes possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of the various roles to be executed next.

In addition, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 35, an upper limit is set on the time for each reel to return to its origin position. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the return motion of various reels never finishing. This makes it possible to avoid situations where various reels are performing a return motion during a variable performance, resulting in no performance being performed, and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 35, when both the return operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) to the origin position and the return operation of the frame role (performance button 161) to the origin position are completed, a process is performed to transition to the initial operation process. Therefore, the return operation of the various roles to their origin positions and the initial operation of the various roles are no longer performed simultaneously, making it possible to check the return operation and initial operation of the various roles separately.

The movable reel 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) are designed to return to their original positions in a predetermined order (movable reel 115 → sub-image display unit (not shown)), but they may also start to return to their original positions at the same time. In this way, the time required for the return operation of the movable reel 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) can be shortened, and a smooth transition to the initial operation of the various reels to be executed next can be made.

(Initial Operation Processing of Lamp Control Unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to Fig. 36. Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process of the lamp control unit 320.

In step R107-1, the CPU 321 determines whether the board feature processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operation status of the board feature, is "0." If the board feature processing number is "0," the process proceeds to step R107-2. If the board feature processing number is not "0," the process proceeds to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the CPU 321 determines whether or not return abnormality information for the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) has been set in the RAM 323. If return abnormality information has not been set, the process moves to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board role will be performed, and if return abnormality information has been set, in step R107-3, the board role processing number is set to "2" assuming that the initial operation of the board role will not be performed, and the process moves to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the CPU 321 selects a board role initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 37(a)) for determining the initial operation pattern of the board role. Details of the board role initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the CPU 321 determines the initial operation pattern of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and sets it in the RAM 323. Specifically, it refers to the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(a) and determines one initial operation pattern from among multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command and the presence or absence of return abnormality information.

In step R107-6, the CPU 321 increments the board feature processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board feature processing number is "0", the board feature processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board feature.

In step R107-7, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number is "1." If the board role processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R107-11. If the board role processing number is "1," the CPU 321 executes the initial operation of the board role according to the initial operation pattern of the board role set in the RAM 323 in step R107-8.

In step R107-9, the CPU 321 determines whether or not all steps of the initial operation of the board role have been completed. If all steps of the initial operation of the board role have not been completed, the process proceeds to step R107-11. If all steps of the initial operation of the board role have been completed, the board role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-10. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "1", the board role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of initializing the board role.

In step R107-11, the CPU 321 determines whether the frame role processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operating status of the frame role (performance button 161), is "0." If the frame role processing number is "0," the process proceeds to step R107-12. If the frame role processing number is not "0," the process proceeds to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the CPU 321 determines whether or not return abnormality information for the effect button 161 has been set in the RAM 323. If the return abnormality information has not been set, the process moves to step R107-14, assuming that the initial operation of the frame role object will be performed. If the return abnormality information has been set, in step R107-13, the process sets the frame role object processing number to "2", assuming that the initial operation of the frame role object will not be performed, and the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the CPU 321 selects a framed reel initial movement pattern determination table (see FIG. 37(b)) for determining the initial movement pattern of the framed reel. Details of the framed reel initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the CPU 321 determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role object (performance button 161) and sets it in the RAM 323. Specifically, it refers to the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(b) and determines one initial operation pattern from among multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command.

In step R107-16, the CPU 321 updates the frame role object processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame role object processing number is "0", the frame role object processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role object.

In step R107-17, the CPU 321 determines whether the frame role processing number is "1." If the frame role processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R107-21. If the frame role processing number is "1," the process proceeds to step R107-18, where the initial operation of the frame role is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the frame role set in the RAM 323.

In step R107-19, the CPU 321 determines whether or not all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have been completed. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have not been completed, the process proceeds to step R107-21. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have been completed, the frame role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-20. Specifically, if the frame role processing number is "1", the frame role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of initializing the frame role.

In step R107-21, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role processing number is "2" and the frame role processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

In step R107-22, the CPU 321 clears the board role processing number and the frame role processing number, and in step R107-23, it clears the initial processing number described above, and ends this initial operation processing.

In this way, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 36, the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) and the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 161) can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the initial operation of each role can be shortened, and it is possible to prevent the performance operation of each role during play from being hindered.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 36, if there is a return abnormality in the movable role 115 and sub-image display unit (not shown) that constitute the board role, the initial operation of the movable role 115 and sub-image display unit (not shown) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board role from completely failing or being damaged by forcibly initializing the board role in which a return abnormality has occurred.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 36, if there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 161 that constitutes the frame role object, the initial operation of the performance button 161 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as a complete failure or damage of the performance button 161 by forcibly performing the initial operation of the performance button 161 that is experiencing a recovery abnormality.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 36, even if the initial operation of the board part where a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame part where a return abnormality has not occurred is executed, and even if the initial operation of the frame part where a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the board part where a return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the part where a return abnormality has not occurred.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 36, the initial operation process ends when both the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) and the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 161) have been completed. This prevents a situation in which it is unclear whether the board role or the frame role is performing an initial operation or a performance operation, such as when the other is performing a performance operation while the other is performing an initial operation.

(Table for determining initial operation pattern of board role)
FIG. 37(a) is a diagram showing a board role initial operation pattern determination table for determining the initial operation pattern of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display section (not shown)).

The initial operation pattern determination table for the board role-playing device associates the type of command when the power is turned on, the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information, and the initial operation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the operating mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are also listed.

The initial operation patterns include patterns 01-03, which are determined when a power-on command is received, patterns 04-06, which are determined when a first power restoration command is received, indicating that the machine is waiting for customers, and patterns 07-09, which are determined when a second power restoration command is received, indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, or a third power restoration command is received, indicating that a jackpot is being played.

"Small descent of the movable performance device" refers to the movement (descent) of the movable performance device 115 from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly lower than the standby position, "large descent of the movable performance device" refers to the movement (descent) of the movable performance device 115 from the standby position to a performance position lower than the intermediate position, and "return to origin of the movable performance device" refers to the movement of the movable performance device 115 returning to the standby position.

"Sub-display device movement" refers to the operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) rising from the standby position to the performance position, and "sub-display device return to origin" refers to the operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) returning to the standby position.

The "movable performance device LED" refers to the multiple LEDs provided on the movable prop 115, and the "sub-display device LED" refers to the multiple LEDs provided around the screen of the sub-image display unit (not shown).

Note that the color of the movable performance device LED is not specified in initial operation pattern 02, initial operation pattern 05, and initial operation pattern 08. This is because the movable performance device LED flashes red to indicate an abnormality when the first movable member 115a returns to its original position.

In addition, the lighting color of the sub display device LED is not described in initial operation pattern 03, initial operation pattern 06, and initial operation pattern 09. This is because the sub display device LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality due to a recovery abnormality in the sub image display unit (not shown).

The first feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(a) is that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is the same when the power is turned on with the initialization of RAM 203 and when the power is restored without the initialization of RAM 203. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored, it is possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the board role.

The same initial action means that at least the movement pattern of the board parts in each step is the same, and the action time in each step may be the same or different.

In addition, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the movable role 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, or the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the movable role 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) may be different. In this way, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, when the operating mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the movable role 115 and/or the sub-image display unit (not shown) is made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is turned on may be executed by the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed by the initial operation when the power is turned on. In this way, it is easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The second feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(a) is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The third feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(a) is that while the light emission pattern of the initial light emission of the movable performance device LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, the light emission pattern of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The initial light emission pattern of the movable performance device LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, but the initial light emission pattern of the sub-display device LED is different. Conversely, the initial light emission pattern of the movable performance device LED may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, but the initial light emission pattern of the sub-display device LED may be the same.

In addition, both the light emission pattern of the initial light emission of the movable effect device LED and the light emission pattern of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state for customers. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(a) is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when a jackpot game is played. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fifth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(a) is that the initial light emission pattern during the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is different when power is restored to restore the waiting state and the special symbol is changing or being displayed, or when power is restored during a jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power restoration to restore the waiting state, or during the special symbol is changing or being displayed, or during a jackpot game.

When the power is restored during the display of the changing special symbols or during a jackpot game, both the movable performance device LED and the sub display device LED are turned off, but the movable performance device LED and the sub display device LED may be lit in the same illumination mode as when the power is restored to return to the waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(a) is that, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored, if there is a return abnormality in the movable role 115 but not in the sub-image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the movable role 115 is not performed but the initial operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) is performed, whereas if there is no return abnormality in the movable role 115 but there is a return abnormality in the sub-image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the movable role 115 is performed but the initial operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) is not performed. In this way, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation depending on whether there is a return abnormality or not.

(Frame role initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 37(b) is a diagram showing a frame role initial operation pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the initial operation pattern of the frame role (performance button 161).

The frame role initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of command when the power is turned on with the initial operation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the operating mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are listed.

"Performance button big rise" refers to the action of the performance button 161 rising from the standby position (initial position) to the performance position (upper position), and "performance button return to origin" refers to the action of the performance button 161 returning to the standby position.

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(b) is that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 161) is different when the power is turned on with the initialization of RAM 203 and when the power is restored without the initialization of RAM 203. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The second feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(b) is that the initial operation of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is set to perform an operation that is not performed by the initial operation of the effect button 161 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the performance button 161 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it becomes possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame device, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(b) is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 161) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(b) is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 161) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when the power is restored during a jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The LED on the effect button is set to turn off when the power is restored while the special symbol is changing or during a jackpot game, but the LED on the effect button may be set to light up in the same illumination mode as when the power is restored to return to the waiting state.

The fifth feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(b) is that the number of luminous colors in the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is different from the number of luminous colors in the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

Note that the number of colors emitted by the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of colors emitted by the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(b) is that the color of the light emitted by the initial illumination of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on includes a color of light that is not included in the color of light emitted by the initial illumination of the effect button 161 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The color of the light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is restored may include a color that is not included in the color of the light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(b) is that the time during which the effect button 161 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is different from the time during which the effect button 161 vibrates during an operation effect that is executed by operating the effect button 161 during an effective period that occurs while a variable effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the vibration is during the initial operation of the effect button 161.

The eighth feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(b) is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether it is at the origin position, is executed by overlapping with the initial operation of the performance button 161, which detects whether it is at the origin position. This makes it possible to check the operation of the performance button 161 and the button vibration motor at the same time, thereby shortening the time required for operation check.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while changing settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during a setting change will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during a setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating the movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 122, first large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LED that illuminates the large prize opening (first large prize opening 125) in a predetermined manner during a round of play is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status check display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned ON and a setting change operation (setting key switch 229 is ON and RAM clear switch 228 is ON) is performed, the setting change mode is started in the game control unit 200, and the state becomes a pre-start state before the control of the progress of the game is started.

At this time, the status confirmation display 226 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed, and the various drive sources start operating (drive sources = ON) as their initial operation. In addition, a setting change notification is started to indicate that the settings are being changed and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (display of a screen during setting change, and alternating output of a voice during setting change saying "Settings are being changed" and an initial operation confirmation voice saying "Please also check the operation of the solenoid"). In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At the time T2, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

If, at the timing of T10, the operation time of the various drive sources that started at the timing of T9 has not yet elapsed and the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is terminated, and the display of the setting value on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 is also terminated. Then, the game control unit 200 transitions from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) start on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above starts. In addition, the return and initial operations of the various roles (movable roles 115 (115a, 115b), sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) controlled by the performance control unit 300 start, and all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d on the information display 230 light up to start checking whether they are on. The initial operations of the various roles end after checking whether they are on the information display 230 ends.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 230, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Specific example of initializing various drive sources while preparing to clear RAM)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during RAM clear preparation will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during RAM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating the movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 122, first large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LED that illuminates the large prize opening (first large prize opening 125) in a predetermined manner during a round of play is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status check display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned ON and a RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed, the RAM clear preparation mode is started in the gaming control unit 200, and the state becomes a pre-start state before the control of the progress of the game is started.

At this time, the status confirmation display 226 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the RAM is being prepared for clearing, and the various drive sources start operating (drive sources = ON) as the initial operation. In addition, a RAM clear preparation notification starts (display of the clear preparation screen, alternating output of the notification voice saying "Press RAM clear again" and the initial operation confirmation voice saying "Check the operation of the solenoid") to indicate that the RAM is being prepared for clearing and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At the time T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

At time T10, if the RAM clear approval operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at time T9 has elapsed, the RAM clear preparation mode and RAM clear preparation notification will end, and the operation of the various drive sources will immediately stop (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources will end, and the game control unit 200 will transition from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the game progress is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) start on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above starts. In addition, the return and initial operations of the various roles controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable roles 115 (115a, 115b), sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) start, and all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d on the information display 230 light up to start checking whether they are on. The initial operation of the movable roles 115 ends after the lighting check of the information display 230 is completed.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 230, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while checking settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation will be described with reference to Fig. 40. Fig. 40 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating the movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 122, first large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LED that illuminates the large prize opening (first large prize opening 125) in a predetermined manner during a round of play is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status check display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and a setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts a setting confirmation mode and enters a pre-start state before control of the game progress begins.

At this time, the status confirmation display 226 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being confirmed, and the various drive sources start operating (drive source = ON) as their initial operation. Also, a setting confirmation notification is started to inform the user that the settings are being confirmed and to prompt the user to confirm the operation of the various drive sources (display of the setting confirmation screen, alternating output of the setting confirmation voice "Settings are being confirmed" and the initial operation confirmation voice "Please also check the operation of the solenoid"). Also, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At the time T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

If, at the timing of T10, the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at the timing of T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification end, and the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the display of the setting value on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 also ends. Then, the game control unit 200 transitions from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) start on the display 130, and the power restoration notification described above starts. In addition, the recovery operation and initial operation of the various roles controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) start, and all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d on the information display 230 are fully lit to start lighting confirmation. The initial operation of the movable role 115 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 ends.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 230, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

In this way, according to this embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control starts, various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) are initialized, so that when the pachinko game machine 100 is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game parlor, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome are being initially operated (pre-start state), the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, round number display 225, status display 224) except for the status confirmation display 226 are in a non-display (non-operating) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the game control unit 200 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome are being initially operated, a setting change notification is issued to indicate that a setting change is being made and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (a RAM clear preparation notification that the RAM is being prepared to be cleared and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources, and a setting confirmation notification that the settings are being confirmed and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources). This allows the worker (factory worker, game store staff) who checks the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 to be informed that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, and allows the worker to check the operation appropriately.

In addition, according to this embodiment, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are initialized in the setting change modes (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode), so there is no need to create multiple states in the pre-start state before the game progress control begins, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the pachinko game machine 100 (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, according to this embodiment, when a setting value confirmation operation (RAM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation) is performed and the pre-start state ends, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. This means that the initial operation of the various drive sources is not performed to a playable state, making it possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusing the operation of the various drive sources with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, various initial operations of the drive sources are performed to operate the movable bodies that affect the game outcome, and in the playable state in which the game progress control is performed, initial operations of the movable role 115 that does not affect the game outcome are performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, and operation checks can be performed appropriately.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the large prize opening door 125D are initially operating, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the large prize opening door 125D, and makes it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the large prize opening door 125D are initially operating, an open signal is not output even though the first large prize opening 125 is open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the game control unit 200, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device, such as a hall computer, which collects information output from the pachinko game machine 100, collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 230 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from when the gaming machine is powered on until the control of the game progress begins, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the gaming control unit 200.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, so it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on any of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d that displays the current setting value, so that the current setting value can be properly notified, ensuring convenience for the gaming establishment.

In this embodiment, in the setting change notification, RAM clear preparation notification, and setting confirmation notification, text such as "Initial operation of drive source" or "Please check the operation of the solenoid" that encourages visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources is not displayed, but such text may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the game progress control is started, all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d of the information display 230 are fully lit to check whether they are lit, but after the setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, or setting check mode, the lighting check may not be performed.

(Modification of Initial Operation of Various Driving Sources)
A modified example of initializing the various drive sources will be described below with reference to the drawings. This modified example differs from the above embodiment in that the drive source processing operation is performed after the setting change mode, the RAM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode is completed.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings)
A specific example of initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 41. Fig. 41 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating the movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 122, first large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LED that illuminates the large prize opening (first large prize opening 125) in a predetermined manner during a round of play is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status check display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned ON and a setting change operation (setting key switch 229 is ON, RAM clear switch 228 is ON) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts the setting change mode and enters a pre-start state before control of the game progress is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the setting change notification described above is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are terminated, the initial operation of the various drive sources is started, and the setting value displayed on the seven-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 226 is terminated, and an initial operation notification (display of an initial operation in progress screen, output of an initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is initiated to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the game control unit 200 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the game progress is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) start on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above starts. In addition, the return and initial operations of the various roles controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable roles 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) start, and all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d on the information display 230 light up to start checking whether they are on. The initial operations of the various roles end after the lighting check on the information display 230 is completed.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 230, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after clearing RAM)
A specific example of the case where various driving sources are initialized after the RAM is cleared in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example in the case where various driving sources are initialized after the RAM is cleared in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating the movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 122, first large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LED, which illuminates the large prize opening (first large prize opening 125) in a predetermined manner during a round of play, is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned ON and a RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts a RAM clear preparation mode and enters a pre-start state before the control of the game progress begins. At this time, the above-mentioned RAM clear preparation notification starts.

When the RAM clear approval operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed at timing T2, the RAM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of the various drive sources is started. At this time, an initial operation notification is started to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (display of an initial operation screen and output of an initial operation confirmation voice saying "Please check the operation of the solenoids").

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the game control unit 200 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the game progress is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) start on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above starts. In addition, the return and initial operations of the various roles controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable roles 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) start, and all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d on the information display 230 light up to start checking whether they are on. The initial operations of the various roles end after the lighting check on the information display 230 is completed.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 230, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initial operation of various drive sources after checking the settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources after setting confirmation in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 43. Fig. 43 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example in the modified example when initializing various drive sources after setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating the movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 122, first large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LED that illuminates the large prize opening (first large prize opening 125) in a predetermined manner during a round of play is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status check display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned ON and a setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is turned ON) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts a setting confirmation mode and enters a pre-start state before control of the game progress is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification are ended, the initial operation of the various drive sources is started, and the setting value displayed on the seven-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 226 is ended, and an initial operation notification (display of an initial operation in progress screen, output of an initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is started to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the game control unit 200 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the game progress is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) start on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above starts. In addition, the return and initial operations of the various roles controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable roles 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) start, and all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d on the information display 230 light up to start checking whether they are on. The initial operations of the various roles end after the lighting check on the information display 230 is completed.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 230, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

In this way, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before the control of the game progress begins, various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) are initialized, so that when the pachinko game machine 100 is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game parlor, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, according to this modified example, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome are being initially operated (in the pre-start state), the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, round number display 225, and status display 224) except for the status confirmation display 226 are in a non-display (non-operating) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the game control unit 200 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, according to this modified example, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are initially operated, an initial operation notification is issued to prompt the operator to check the operation of the various drive sources. This notifies the operator (factory worker, game store staff) who checks the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, enabling the operator to appropriately check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, even in the pre-start state before control of the game progress begins, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome are initialized after the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) ends, so there is no need to carry out complicated operations such as checking the operation of various drive sources while changing settings (RAM clear, setting confirmation), and operation checks can be carried out appropriately.

In addition, according to this modified example, after the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) ends, the operation of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game begins after an operation standby time has elapsed, so there is enough time between the end of the setting change (setting confirmation) and the start of the operation check of the various drive sources, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, the same initial operation notification is made regardless of whether the initial operation of the various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome is after the setting change mode, the RAM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode has ended. This simplifies the control of the initial operation notification, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the large prize opening door 125D are initially operating, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the large prize opening door 125D, and makes it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, various drive sources are initialized to operate movable bodies that affect the game outcome, and in the playable state in which the game progress control is performed, an initial operation of the movable part 115 that does not affect the game outcome is performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the large prize opening door 125D are initially operating, an open signal is not output even though the first large prize opening 125 is open, so that it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the game control unit 200 and to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the pachinko game machine 100 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, according to this modified example, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 230 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from when the gaming machine is turned on until the control of the progress of the game begins, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the gaming control unit 200.

In addition, according to this modified example, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, so it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, according to this modified example, during the setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, and setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on any of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d that displays the current setting value, so that the current setting value can be properly notified, ensuring convenience for the gaming establishment.

In addition, according to this modified example, the information display 230 is configured not to display setting values or performance information of the gaming machine during the initial operation of the various drive sources, so that the attention of the employees of the gaming facility can be focused on checking the initial operation of the various drive sources, and it becomes possible to accurately determine the malfunction of the various drive sources.

[Variable performance pattern table]
44 and 45 are diagrams showing examples of the variable presentation patterns and table settings used in the variable presentation pattern selection (S2813) in the presentation selection process of FIG. 27(b). Note that FIG. 44 shows a variable presentation pattern table for a big win in a low probability no time-saving play state, and FIG. 45 shows a variable presentation pattern table for a small win and a miss in a low probability no time-saving play state.

A plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table for the big win shown in Fig. 44. Variable performance patterns "EA1" to "EA6", "EB1" to "EB14", and "EC1 to EC2" are associated one-to-one with the variable performance patterns "PA1" to "PA6", "PB1" to "PB14", and "PC1 to PC2" set using Fig. 21 above.
In addition, a plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table for small wins and losses shown in Fig. 45. Variable performance patterns "ES1-ES2" and "ER1"-"ER10" are associated one-to-one with the variable performance patterns "PD1-PD2" and "PR1"-"PR10" set using Fig. 21 above.

Here, the variable presentation is a presentation for visually announcing the result of the special pattern lottery (i.e., whether or not a jackpot has been won) by displaying decorative symbols in a variable manner and then stopping the display.
In addition, in the illustrated variable performance pattern, "pseudo consecutive number of times", "normal", "SP reach", "SPSP reach" and "stop pattern" are set. Note that "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding performance is not executed.

Here, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" is the number of pseudo consecutive performances (pseudo consecutive). This pseudo consecutive performance is a performance that makes it look as if the decorative pattern is changing multiple times in the display of the special pattern. In the pseudo consecutive performance, the performance control unit 300 changes the decorative pattern before the reach state, temporarily stops the decorative pattern, and then starts the display of the decorative pattern again. In other words, in the pseudo consecutive performance, after the decorative pattern starts to change, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and changed again for a set number of pseudo consecutive times, and then the special pattern is stopped to end the display of the special pattern. Here, the temporary stop is a pseudo stop state in which the decorative pattern appears to be stopped at first glance, but in reality the pattern is slightly swaying. In other words, the temporary stop of the decorative pattern is a state in which the change is treated as continuing in terms of game control. In addition, the fixed stop of the decorative pattern refers to a state in which the special pattern is fixed as a stopped pattern in the variable display of one variation of the special pattern. In addition, in the pseudo continuous performance, the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative pattern again after the reach state is reached. Furthermore, in the pseudo continuous performance, the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative pattern again without temporarily stopping the decorative pattern after varying the decorative pattern.
In the illustrated example, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" is set to "-", "1", "2", or "3", i.e., between 0 and 3 times. The pseudo consecutive number of times is set in association with the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot, which is the degree to which a jackpot can be expected. In other words, the higher the pseudo consecutive number of times, the higher the expectation is set.

"Normal" indicates the type of reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the reach effect type.
"SP Reach" indicates the type of SP Reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP Reach effect. Also, the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is set so that the larger the number, the higher the expectation.

"SPSP Reach" refers to the type of SPSP Reach performance. In the illustrated example, one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP Reach performance. In addition, the higher the number, the higher the expectation, in the order of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3".

"Stopping symbols" refer to a combination of decorative symbols displayed as stopping symbols. In the illustrated example, the types of stopping symbols are "777", "666", "444", "RRR", "5X5", etc. In the illustrated example, the type of stopping symbol is set according to the type of jackpot. For example, for low probability symbols A and B, which are jackpots that result in a low probability state after a jackpot, the even stopping symbols "444" and "666" are set. Also, for high probability symbols A and C, which are jackpots that result in a high probability state after a jackpot, the odd stopping symbols "777" and "111" are set.

The performance control unit 300 determines the variable performance pattern based on the table shown in Fig. 44. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a variable performance pattern corresponding to the variable pattern set in the variable pattern selection process (see Fig. 13) based on the table shown in Fig. 44.
For example, in FIG. 44, when the "big win pattern" is the "high probability pattern A" and the variation pattern is "PB1", "EB1" is selected as the variation presentation pattern. In this variation presentation pattern "EB1", the "pseudo consecutive number of times" is "-", that is, the pseudo consecutive presentation is not executed. Also, "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach".

[Production image]
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, the performance image that the performance control unit 300 causes to be displayed on the image display unit 114 will be described.
As shown in Fig. 46, the effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114 by the control of the effect control unit 300. In this embodiment, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 includes the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, the small pattern 56, and the stage image 61. In addition, although details will be described later, the image display unit 114 may display a stop light-emitting image 62, a reserved change teasing image 63, a transition image 64, an SP reach image 65, an SPSP reach image 66, a button operation image 67, a double number light-emitting image 68, a revival image 69, a revival light-emitting image 70, a right hit image 71, and a recovery image 72.

[Decorative design 41]
As shown in FIG. 46(1), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed on the image display unit 114. When the three patterns constituting the decorative pattern 41 are described individually, the pattern arranged on the left side may be referred to as the "left decorative pattern 41", the pattern arranged in the center as the "middle decorative pattern 41", and the pattern arranged on the right side as the "right decorative pattern 41". When the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 are described together, they may be referred to as the "left and right decorative patterns 41". When the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, and the right decorative pattern 41 are described together, they may be referred to as the "three decorative patterns 41". Furthermore, the three decorative patterns 41 with matching numbers may be referred to as the "double number decorative pattern 41".

In this embodiment, the display modes of the decorative patterns 41 include a highly decorative display mode (see FIG. 46 (1)) in which character images are displayed in addition to letters such as numbers, and a less decorative display mode (see FIG. 54 (4)) in which letters such as numbers are displayed as the main display. Here, the display mode of the decorative patterns 41 is switched according to changes in the game state or the progress of the presentation. Details will be described later, but for example, less decorative decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation, and high probability time-saving game state, and less decorative decorative patterns 41 are displayed in other cases.

In the decorative pattern 41 changing presentation, the presentation control unit 300 changes and displays the three decorative patterns 41, for example, by vertical scrolling (scrolling downwards), and then first temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "0"), then temporarily stops the right decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "9"), and then temporarily stops the center decorative pattern (for example, the number "2"). In this way, after all decorative patterns 41 have been temporarily stopped, all decorative patterns 41 are finally stopped in accordance with the stopped display of the special patterns. The combination "029" of stopped decorative patterns 41 shown in Figure 46 (1) is an example of a combination when the special pattern lottery result is a loss.

[Variable image 51]
As shown in FIG. 46 (5), the image display unit 114 displays a variable image 51 indicating that the special symbol is being displayed (the decorative symbol 41 is being displayed) by the special symbol variable control unit 233 (see FIG. 5, etc.). That is, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol during the variable display of the special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the example shown in the figure, the lower left corner of the display area of the image display unit 114), and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the display disappears. In the example shown in the figure, the variable image 51 has a spherical shape. Also, in the example shown in the figure, a glossy image 51A is displayed in the variable image 51. The glossy image 51A is an image that imitates gloss. Also, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variable image 51 is determined based on the result of the pre-determination process. Furthermore, the display mode of the variable image 51, for example, the color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "color, etc.") changes based on the result of the pre-determination process, to notify or suggest the likelihood of winning the jackpot. For example, if the colors of the variable image 51 are set to white, flashing, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold, the colors may be set so that the later in this order, the higher the likelihood. "Flashing" refers to a display mode that appears to be flashing.

[Reserved image 52]
As shown in Fig. 46 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a reserved image 52 based on information in a memory area in the RAM 303 (see Fig. 3, etc.) corresponding to the currently reserved ball. In other words, the reserved image 52 is an image indicating that the right to determine a big win is reserved. In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the screen is determined based on the result of a pre-determination process.
The reserved image 52 has a smaller display size than the variable image 51. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 52 has a spherical shape. In the illustrated example, a glossy image 52A is displayed in the reserved image 52. The glossy image 52A is an image that imitates gloss. A reserved pedestal is displayed in the area where the reserved image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the reserved pedestal of the reserved image are displayed in different manners.

The display mode of the reserved image 52, for example, color, changes based on the result of the pre-determination process, to notify or suggest the likelihood of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, when the result of the pre-determination process is a jackpot, a color with a higher likelihood of winning is displayed than when the result is a miss. For example, when the colors of the reserved image 52 are set to white, flashing, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold, they may be set in this order so that the likelihood of winning increases in that order. Note that, hereinafter, the display mode of the variable image 51, which is white, and the display mode of the reserved image 52, which is white, may be referred to as the normal display mode.

As described above, a win at the first starting port 121 can result in up to four pending images. Therefore, a win at the first starting port 121 can result in up to four pending images 52 being displayed on the image display unit 114. In addition, in this embodiment, the multiple pending images 52 are displayed in the area to the right of the variable image 51, in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 to a position farther away, that is, from left to right.

Although detailed description is omitted, a maximum of four reserved images are also generated by winning at the second starting port 122. Therefore, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 by winning at the second starting port 122.
In the present embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically configured in the same or similar form. However, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be configured in different forms.

In addition, in the following description, the four pending images 52 displayed at maximum may be referred to as the "first pending image 52," the "second pending image 52," the "third pending image 52," and the "fourth pending image 52," in order of proximity to the variable image 51.

[Number of reserved calls: 55]
As shown in Fig. 46 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a reserved number display 55 based on information in the memory area corresponding to the reserved balls in the RAM 303 (see Fig. 3, etc.). This reserved number display 55 is an image showing the reserved number. Here, the reserved image 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes in number according to the reserved number for winning the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122.

[Small design 56]
As shown in Fig. 46 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a small symbol 56 indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the decorative symbol 41 is being displayed in a variable manner) based on winning at the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 by the special symbol variable control unit 233 (see Fig. 5, etc.). The small symbol 56 is controlled by the performance control unit 300, and is displayed in a variable manner and then in a stationary manner in accordance with the variable and stationary display of the special symbol.

In the illustrated example, the small patterns 56 are three images each corresponding to the decorative patterns 41, and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the image display unit 114. The small patterns 56 are displayed as images smaller in size than the decorative patterns 41. As described above, the decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or in a less decorative display mode, but the small patterns 56 are displayed only in a less decorative display mode. However, the small patterns 56 may be displayed in a more decorative display mode.

The small pattern 56 is displayed (e.g., scrolled vertically) in a manner that indicates that the special pattern is being displayed in a changing manner in response to a winning entry into the first starting gate 121 or the second starting gate 122. During scrolling, the small pattern 56 displays number images incrementing by one from "1" to "9," and then starts again at "1" and increments by one, this display being repeated, for example, at a cycle of 0.9 seconds. The small pattern 56 is displayed stationary when the special pattern is displayed stationary. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the stationary small pattern 56 matches the number indicated by the decorative pattern 41. To explain further, in the example of FIG. 46(1), the number corresponding to "029" of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as the small pattern 56.

[Stage image 61]
As shown in FIG. 46(1), the image display unit 114 displays a stage image 61 as a background for the decorative pattern 41 and the like. The stage image 61 is, for example, an image (stage, etc.) related to the content (idols, anime characters, etc.) that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the illustrated example, a space-themed image is displayed as the stage image 61. The stage image 61 is switched, for example, when a variable performance in one stage is performed a predetermined number of times. The stage image 61 may also be switched, for example, when a specific variable performance (for example, a variable performance in which a SPSP reach performance is performed) is performed. Furthermore, the stage image 61 may be switched depending on the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

[Example of production]
In this embodiment, various effects are executed when the effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114. For example, the effects when the effect image is displayed include action effects. In addition, although details will be described later, the effects when the effect image is displayed include a shift effect, an enlargement effect, a light emission effect, a stop non-display effect, a hold change effect, an increase display effect, an action effect when displayed, an SP end display effect, a promotion incentive effect, a revival effect, a revival non-display effect, and a temporary stop incentive effect.

[Movement Direction]
In this embodiment, an action presentation is executed. The action presentation is a presentation that displays the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 in an action. The action display is a display that makes the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 appear to the player as if it is moving. In this embodiment, the action presentation is executed according to the progress of the presentation. More specifically, the action presentation is executed while the variable presentation is being executed. In addition, the action presentation of this embodiment is also executed when the variable presentation is not being executed. By executing the action presentation, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52. In addition, by executing the action presentation, it is possible to suggest that the display mode of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 will change.
In this embodiment, the motion effects include a rotation effect, a partial swing effect, a whole swing effect, and a blinking effect. The specific effects of the rotation effect, the partial swing effect, the whole swing effect, and the blinking effect will be described in detail later.

[Example of change performance 1]
Next, referring to Fig. 46 to Fig. 49, the variation presentation (variation presentation example 1) of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 etc. will be specifically described. The variation presentation example 1 is a variation presentation example of the decorative pattern 41 in a low probability time-saving no-play state. In the variation presentation example 1, two variation presentations are performed.
The two variation effects shown in Figures 46 to 49 are both variation effects that are executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Figure 45. When "ER1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern", effects such as "normal" are not executed.

As shown in FIG. 46 (1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300. At this time, the decorative pattern 41, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, the small pattern 56, and the stage image 61 are displayed in the image display unit 114. The first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 are all displayed in the normal display mode. At this time, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 all have the glossy image 52A displayed in a predetermined initial position. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "4", which is the reserved number for winning entries into the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning entries into the second starting port. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped. Also, at this time, the sub-first variable display 83 shows "4".

Then, when the reserved number for the winning entry in the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the display of the next special symbol begins, the display of the small symbol 56 begins to change, as shown in FIG. 46 (2). When the small symbol 56 is shown to be changing (scrolling) at high speed in the drawing, the small symbol 56 is displayed with an arrow (↓) for ease of understanding. At this time, the reserved number display 55 in the first starting port 121 switches from "4" to "3". At this time, the display of the change on the sub-first change indicator 81 begins. At this time, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 displays "3".

Next, as shown in Fig. 46 (3), a shift effect is started. At this time, a rotation effect of the reserved image 52 is also started.
The shift performance is a performance in which the reserved image 52 is moved. In this shift performance, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 move toward the display position of the first reserved image 52, the display position of the second reserved image 52, and the display position of the third reserved image 52, respectively. In addition, in the shift performance, the first reserved image 52 moves toward the display position of the variable image 51.
The rotation performance, which is an example of the action performance, is a performance in which the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are rotated. In the rotation performance, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 continue to rotate in a clockwise direction at a constant speed. The rotation performance starts from a state in which the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 is located at an initial position. In the illustrated example, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 start rotating at the same time by the rotation performance.
When the rotation effect is started, the glossy image 52A is located at a non-initial position in the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52. The non-initial position is a position different from the initial position. In addition, the glossy image 52A is located at the same position in the rotation direction in the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52.

Next, as shown in Fig. 46 (4), the display of the decorative pattern 41 starts to change. At this time, the enlargement effect starts.
The enlargement effect is an effect of enlarging the display size of the reserved image 52. More specifically, the enlargement effect is an effect of enlarging the display size of the first reserved image 52 to the display size of the variable image 51. In the enlargement effect, the display size of the first reserved image 52 is gradually enlarged.

Next, the enlargement and shift effects are completed, and as shown in FIG. 46 (5), the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are displayed. At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all located at a half-rotation position. The half-rotation position is the position when the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51 or the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 rotates half a turn clockwise from the initial position. The half-rotation position is an example of a non-initial position. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a high-speed variable manner. When it is shown in the drawing that the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed (scrolled) in a high-speed variable manner, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by an arrow (↓) for easy understanding.

Next, as shown in Fig. 46 (6), the left decorative pattern 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it was fixedly stopped until the start of the variable display. In addition, when the decorative pattern 41 is shown to be temporarily stopped in the drawing, it is expressed using a display similar to a double quotation mark around the decorative pattern 41 for easy understanding. In addition, at this time, a light-emitting effect is performed using the left decorative pattern 41.
The light-emitting performance is a performance in which a specific light-emitting body provided in the pachinko game machine 100 is illuminated. Examples of the specific light-emitting body include the display screen of the image display unit 114, the movable role object 115, and the board lamp 116. When the light-emitting performance is realized using the image display unit 114, the light-emitting performance is a performance in which an image that appears to the player as if it is emitting light is displayed on the image display unit 114. In other words, the light-emitting performance is a performance in which an image that imitates light is displayed on the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, in the light-emitting performance, a stop-time light-emitting image 62 is displayed around the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 (number "7"). The stop-time light-emitting image 62 is an image that makes the player see that the decorative pattern 41 is emitting light when it is temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped. The stop-time light-emitting image 62 is, for example, an image that imitates light. In addition, the stop-time light-emitting image 62 is displayed for, for example, 0.5 seconds, and then becomes invisible. In other words, the execution time of the light-emitting performance using the stop-time light-emitting image 62 is 0.5 seconds. The stop light emission image 62 may be displayed in any color. The stop light emission image 62 may be displayed in the entirety or part of the area in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed.
In addition, when the left decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all located at their initial positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (7), the right decorative pattern 41 scrolls at a slow speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it had been fixed until the variable display started. At this time, a light-emitting effect is performed using the right decorative pattern 41. In the example shown, in the light-emitting effect, a light-emitting image 62 at the time of stopping is displayed around the display area of the right decorative pattern 41 (the number "8"). Also, at this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all located in a half-rotation position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (8), the middle decorative pattern 41 scrolls at a slow speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it had been fixedly stopped until the variable display started. At this time, a light-emitting effect is performed using the middle decorative pattern 41. In the example shown, in the light-emitting effect, a light-emitting image 62 at the time of stopping is displayed around the display area of the middle decorative pattern 41 (the number "5"). Also, at this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all located in their initial positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (9), after the three decorative symbols 41 continue to be temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped with the display of the special symbols. Here, the combination "758" of the decorative symbols 41 displayed as stopped in FIG. 47 (9) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. In addition, with the display of the special symbols, the small symbols 56 are also displayed as stopped. At this time, the combination "758" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the rotation performance of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is also continuing. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub first variable display 81 is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (10), the stop non-display effect begins.
The stop non-display effect is an effect in which the variable image 51 is hidden when the special symbol is stopped. This stop non-display effect can also be regarded as a disappearance effect in which the variable image 51 disappears. In the stop non-display effect, the transparency of the variable image 51 displayed in an opaque display mode gradually increases, and then the variable image 51 becomes invisible. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 is displayed in a semi-transparent display mode. Note that the transparency of the decorative symbol 41 does not change before and after the fixed stop.
In addition, when the stop non-display effect is started, the rotation effects of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all continuing. At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all positioned at half-rotation positions.

Next, the stop non-display effect ends, and the variable image 51 becomes non-displayed, as shown in FIG. 47 (11). Here, as the variable image 51 becomes non-displayed, the rotation effect of the variable image 51 ends. At this time, the rotation effects of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all still being performed. At this time, in the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52, all of the glossy images 52A are located in non-initial positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (12), the rotation effect of all of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is interrupted. At this time, the reserved image 52 in which the glossy image 52A is located at the initial position is displayed as the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52. More specifically, when the rotation effect is interrupted, the reserved image 52 in which the glossy image 52A is located at the initial position is displayed, regardless of the position of the glossy image 52A in the reserved image 52 immediately before the interruption.

Next, the reserved number for the winning entry into the first starting port 121 is subtracted, and when the display of the next special symbol begins, the display of the small symbol 56 begins to change, as shown in FIG. 48 (13). At this time, the reserved number display 55 in the first starting port 121 switches from "3" to "2". At this time, the display of the change in the sub-first change indicator 81 begins. At this time, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 displays "2".

Next, as shown in Fig. 48 (14), a shift effect is started. At this time, the rotation effect of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is resumed.
Next, the enlargement effect is performed, and the shift effect is ended, and the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, and the second reserved image 52 are displayed as shown in Fig. 48 (15). At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are all located at half-rotation positions. Also, the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (16), a hold change presentation using the second hold image 52 is started.
The reserved change presentation is a presentation that notifies or suggests the probability of winning a jackpot based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process by changing the display mode of the variable image 51 or the display mode of the reserved image 52. The reserved change presentation is started when the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51 or the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 is located at the initial position. The reserved change presentation also includes the display of a reserved change teasing image 63. The reserved change teasing image 63 is an image that teases whether or not the display mode of the variable image 51 or the display mode of the reserved image 52 will change.
In addition, when the reserve change performance using the second reserved image 52 is started, the rotation performance of all of the changing image 51, the first reserved image 52 and the second reserved image 52 is continued.

Next, the reserved change performance ends, and the second reserved image 52 is displayed in blue as shown in FIG. 48 (17). The second reserved image 52 displays a glossy image 52A and an aura image 52B. The aura image 52B is an image that imitates an aura. At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are all located at their initial positions. At this time, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is located at a predetermined initial position. At this time, a partial swing performance is started.
The partial shaking performance, which is an example of a motion performance, is a performance in which a part of the variable image 51 or a part of the reserved image 52 is shaken. In the illustrated example, in the partial shaking performance, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 continues to shake from side to side. The partial shaking performance is started from a state in which the aura image 52B is located at the initial position. When the partial shaking performance is started, the aura image 52B first starts to shake to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (18), the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are all aligned in the rotational direction. Also, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is located in a right-tilted position. A right-tilted position is a position where the target image (aura image 52B in the illustrated example) is tilted to the right from the initial position.

Next, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 and the reserved number for the entry into the first start hole 121 is added, the reserved number display 55 of the first start hole 121 switches from "2" to "3" as shown in FIG. 49 (19). At this time, the increase display effect and the display time operation effect are started. At this time, the sub first reserved display 83 also displays "3".
The increasing display effect is an effect in which new reserved images 52 are displayed as the number of reserved items increases. In the increasing display effect, the reserved images 52 are displayed in an opaque display mode after gradually changing from a highly transparent display mode to a less transparent display mode. In the illustrated example, the third reserved image 52 is displayed in a semi-transparent display mode.
The display operation performance is a performance in which the reserved image 52 is operated when the reserved image 52 is newly displayed. In the illustrated example, in the display operation performance, the third reserved image 52 moves from below the reserved pedestal corresponding to the third reserved image 52 toward above.
In addition, when the increase display effect and the display time operation effect are started, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are all aligned in the rotation direction. In addition, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is located in a left tilt position. The left tilt position is a position where the target image (aura image 52B in the illustrated example) is tilted leftward from the initial position.

Next, the increase display effect ends, and the third reserved image 52 is displayed in an opaque display mode as shown in FIG. 49 (20). At this time, the display operation effect ends, and the third reserved image 52 is displayed on the reserved pedestal corresponding to the third reserved image 52. At this time, the rotation effect of the third reserved image 52 begins. At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all aligned in the rotation direction. The aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is located at the initial position. On the other hand, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 have not yet reached the initial position. In other words, the aura image 52B completes one round trip in the left-right direction before the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 complete one rotation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (21), the three decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop. At this time, stop-time light-emitting images 62 are displayed around the display area of the left decorative pattern 41, the display area of the middle decorative pattern 41, and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41, respectively. Also, at this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all located in their initial positions. Also, at this time, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is located in a non-initial position.

Then, as the special symbols are stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 49 (22). Here, the combination "412" of the decorative symbols 41 shown in FIG. 49 (22) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. Also, as the special symbols are stopped, the small symbols 56 are also stopped and displayed. At this time, the combination "412" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the rotation effects of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all continuing. Also, at this time, the partial swing effect of the second reserved image 52 is continuing. Also, at this time, the aura image 52B is located in a left tilt position. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub first variable display 81 is stopped.

Figures 50 and 51 are explanatory diagrams of each effect in Variable Performance Example 1. The explanation of each effect shown in Figure 50 corresponds to Figures 46 (1) to 47 (12). The explanation of each effect shown in Figure 51 corresponds to Figures 48 (13) to 49 (22).

As shown in FIG. 50, at the time point (T1) of the variable performance example 1, the number of reserved winnings for the first starting port 121 is subtracted from "4" to "3", and the variable display of the special pattern begins.
After that, at time (T2), the sub-first change indicator 81 starts changing and the small symbol 56 starts changing. Also, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Also, the reserve number indicator 55 of the first start port 121 switches from "4" to "3".
After that, at time (T3), a shift effect is started. Also, a rotation effect of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 is started.

After that, at time (T4), the display of the decorative pattern 41 starts to change. Also, the enlargement effect starts.
Then, at time (T5), the shift effect and the expansion effect end.
After that, at time (T6), the light emission performance using the left decorative pattern 41 is started. Also, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 reach their initial positions. Here, the time P1 from time (T3) to time (T6) is the rotation period in the rotation performance of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. That is, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 repeatedly rotate once in the time P1 in the rotation performance. The time P1 is, for example, 2 seconds.

After that, at time (T7), the light-emitting effect using the left decorative pattern 41 ends. Here, the time P2 from time (T6) to time (T7) is the execution time of the light-emitting effect. The time P2 is, for example, 1 second. In other words, the time P2, which is the execution time of the light-emitting effect, is shorter than the time P1, which is the rotation period of the rotation effect.
After that, at time (T8), the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 reach their initial positions. Here, the time P3 from time (T6) to time (T8) is the rotation period in the rotation performance of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. This time P3 is the same time as the time P1.

After that, at time (T9), the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
After that, at time (T10), the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped. Also, the variable display on the sub first variable display 81 is stopped. Also, the small pattern 56 is displayed as a static display.

After that, at time (T11), the stop/non-display effect is started.
After that, at time T12, the rotation effect of the variable image 51 ends. Also, the stop non-display effect ends.
Then, at time (T13), the rotation effect of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is interrupted. Here, the time P4 from time (T10) to time (T11) is shorter than the time P5 from time (T11) to time (T12). Also, the time P4 is shorter than the time T6 from time (T12) to time (T13). Furthermore, the time P5 is longer than the time P6.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51, at time (T14), the number of reserved winnings for the first starting port 121 is subtracted from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the next special pattern begins.
After that, at time (T15), the sub-first change indicator 81 starts changing and the small symbol 56 starts changing. Also, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 changes from "3" to "2". Also, the reserve number indicator 55 of the first start port 121 switches from "3" to "2".
After that, at time (T16), the shift effect is started. Also, the rotation effect of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is resumed.

Then, at time (T17), the display of the decorative pattern 41 begins to change.
Then, at time (T18), the shift effect ends.
After that, at time (T19), the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are located at the initial positions. Also, the reserved change performance is started.
After that, at time (T20), the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 reach their initial positions. The reserved change performance ends. A partial swing performance of the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 starts.

Then, at time (T21), the number of reserved winnings for the first starting port 121 is increased from "2" to "3".
After that, at time (T22), the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from displaying "2" to displaying "3." Also, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 switches from "2" to "3." Also, an increase display effect is started. Also, a display operation effect is started.

After that, at time (T23), the increasing display effect and the display time action effect end. Also, the rotation effect of the third reserved image 52 starts. Also, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 reaches the initial position. Here, the time P7 from time (T20) to time (T23) is the period of oscillation of the aura image 52B in the partial oscillation effect. The time P7 is, for example, 1.5 seconds. That is, the time P7 is shorter than the time P1. In other words, the period of oscillation of the aura image 52B in the partial oscillation effect is shorter than the period of rotation in the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. Also, the time P8 from time (T22) to time (T23) is shorter than the time P5. That is, the time from the start to the end of the increasing display effect is shorter than the time from the start to the end of the stop non-display effect.

After that, at time (T24), the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 reach their initial positions. Here, the time P9 from time (T23) to time (T24) is shorter than the time P1. In other words, the time from when the rotation performance of the third reserved image 52 starts until the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 reaches its initial position is shorter than the rotation period in the rotation performance of the reserved image 52.
After that, at time (T25), the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
After that, at time (T26), the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped. Also, the variable display on the sub first variable display 81 is stopped. Also, the small pattern 56 is displayed as a static display.

In this embodiment, when the number of reserved balls decreases, the performance control unit 300 updates the display content of the reserved ball number display 55 and then starts the shift performance, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may start a shift performance when updating the display content of the pending number display 55, for example, if the number of pending balls decreases.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 starts the shift performance after starting the varying display of the small patterns 56, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may start the shift performance, for example, when the varying display of the small patterns 56 begins.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 starts the varying display of the decorative pattern 41 after starting the shift performance, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may start the shift performance after the varying display of the decorative pattern 41 has started.

Also, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 starts the shift performance after starting the change display on the sub-first change display 81, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may, for example, start a shift performance when starting the variable display on the sub-first variable display unit 81.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 starts the shift performance after stopping and displaying the decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may start a shift performance, for example, when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 starts the movement performance when starting the shift performance, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may start the action performance before starting the shift performance. Also, the performance control unit 300 may start the action performance after starting the shift performance. Also, the performance control unit 300 may start the action performance when ending the shift performance. Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may start the action performance after ending the shift performance.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 starts the shift performance after updating the display content of the reserved number display 55. In other words, the performance control unit 300 starts the moving display of the reserved image 52 after the display state of the reserved number display 55 changes in response to a decrease in the reserved memory stored in the RAM 203. Here, the reserved image 52 is regarded as the first reserved display. Also, the reserved number display 55 is regarded as the second reserved display.
When an effect using the reserved image 52 is performed, the player is likely to focus on the reserved image 52, so the player may recognize a change in the reserved number when the reserved image 52 starts to move. In this case, if the display mode of the reserved number display 55 does not change even when the reserved image 52 starts to move, the player may not be able to grasp the accurate reserved number. Therefore, in this embodiment, the reserved image 52 starts to move after the display mode of the reserved number display 55 changes, thereby preventing the player from being unable to grasp the accurate reserved number.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 ends the motion display of the variable image 51 after the decorative pattern 41 has temporarily stopped. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the variable performance has ended because the motion display of the variable image 51 has ended even before the decorative pattern 41 has temporarily stopped.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 starts moving the information display after the start of the variable display of the specific pattern. Here, examples of the specific pattern include the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56. Examples of the information display include the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. The moving display of the information display includes not only the moving display of the reserved image 52 to the display area of the reserved image 52, but also the moving display of the reserved image 52 to the display area of the variable image 51.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the variable presentation has started because the moving display of the information display has started even before the variable display of the specific pattern has started.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can start the moving display of the reserved image 52 after the cyclical display of the special pattern has started. Here, an example of the special pattern is the sub-first variable display 81. In this case, the moving display of the reserved image 52 can be started even before the cyclical display of the special pattern has started, which can prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the variable display of the special pattern has started.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 starts the moving display of the reserved image 52 after the cyclical display of the special symbol has started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the variable display of the special symbol has started because the moving display of the reserved image 52 has started even before the cyclical display of the special symbol has started.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 starts the moving display of the information display after the decorative pattern 41 is stopped. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the variable performance has ended because the moving display of the information display has started even before the decorative pattern 41 is stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying the pending image 52 in motion at a predetermined cycle.
When the reserved image 52 displays an action, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation using the reserved image 52, but even if the action display of the reserved image 52 is different from the action display in the reserved change presentation, the player may mistakenly believe that the reserved change presentation has been performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the reserved image 52 is displayed in an action at a predetermined cycle, thereby suppressing the player from mistaking the action display at this predetermined cycle for the reserved change presentation. Furthermore, it is possible to suggest that a reserved change presentation using the reserved image 52 may be performed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the pending image 52 in a predetermined cycle. On the other hand, after changing the display mode of the pending number display 55, the motion display of the pending number display 55 is not executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to accurately grasp the pending number due to the motion display of the pending number display 55, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute, for example, a first operation display that displays the first reserved image 52 in an operation at a predetermined cycle, and a second operation display that displays the second reserved image 52 in an operation at a predetermined cycle. The first operation display and the second operation display can be displayed in synchronization. Here, the first reserved image 52 is regarded as a first information display. Also, the second reserved image 52 is regarded as a second information display.
In this case, the appearance of the reserved image 52 displayed synchronously is improved compared to when the first and second action displays are displayed asynchronously, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, when starting to additionally display reserved image 52, performance control unit 300 displays reserved image 52 in a first operation mode. The first operation mode is, for example, an operation mode of reserved image 52 in a display-time operation performance. After displaying reserved image 52 in the first operation mode, performance control unit 300 can display reserved image 52 in a second operation mode that displays the image in an operation at a predetermined cycle. The second operation mode is, for example, an operation mode of reserved image 52 in an operation performance.
In this case, the player can easily notice that the reserved image 52 has been additionally displayed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, when starting to additionally display reserved image 52, performance control unit 300 displays reserved image 52 in a first display mode. The first display mode is, for example, a display mode of reserved image 52 while an increasing display performance is being executed. Then, performance control unit 300 can display reserved image 52 in the first display mode and then display it in a second display mode at a predetermined cycle. The second display mode is a display mode of reserved image 52 after the increasing display performance has ended.
In this case, the player can easily notice that the reserved image 52 has been additionally displayed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the special symbol is stopped, the performance control unit 300 can suspend the display of the reserved image 52 in a predetermined cycle while hiding the variable image 51. In this case, the player can know whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner depending on whether the reserved image 52 is being displayed in a predetermined cycle, thereby improving the interest of the game.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may, for example, after the special pattern has been stopped and displayed, stop displaying the pending image 52 at a predetermined cycle and hide the variable image 51.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 executes the motion display of the reserved image 52 between the time when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and the time when the next variable display is started, and can execute the motion display of the reserved image 52 even after the start of the next variable display. Examples of the stop display of the decorative pattern 41 include a provisional stop display of the decorative pattern 41 and a confirmed stop display of the decorative pattern 41.
In this case, interest in the game can be increased even when the decorative pattern 41 is not being displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the variable image 51 in a manner that changes the transparency of the variable image 51 when the motion display of the variable image 51 at a predetermined cycle ends. In this case, the motion display of the variable image 51 can be naturally ended without giving the player a sense of incongruity when the motion display of the variable image 51 ends, and the interest of the game can be improved.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may change the transparency of the variable image 51 after temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41 and then ending the motion display of the variable image 51 at a predetermined cycle. Also, in addition, the performance control unit 300 may change the transparency of the variable image 51 after temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41 and then ending the motion display of the variable image 51 at a predetermined cycle.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the decorative pattern 41 has stopped being displayed, while the performance control unit 300 is executing the operational display of the changing image 51 at a predetermined period, it is possible to change the transparency of the changing image 51 and then make the changing image 51 invisible.
In this case, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable about the disappearance of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 can be made to disappear naturally, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can cause the reserved image 52 to move from the first state to the second state at a predetermined cycle, and can start the movement display from the first state after the movement display of the reserved image 52 starts. The first state is, for example, the initial position of the glossy image 52A in the reserved image 52. The second state is, for example, a half-rotation position of the glossy image 52A in the reserved image 52.
In this case, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the varying display of the special symbols has begun, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the present embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the reserved image 52 in the first display mode in a first cycle, and then display the reserved image 52 in the second display mode in a second cycle different from the first cycle. The first display mode is, for example, a normal display mode. The second display mode is, for example, a blue display mode.
In this case, it is possible for the player to easily distinguish between the reserved image 52 in the first display mode and the reserved image 52 in the second display mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation period in the operation display of the pending image 52 is different from the execution time of the light-emitting effect using the decorative pattern 41.
In this case, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish between the action display of the reserved image 52 and the light-emitting effects, making it possible to realize a variety of effects and increasing the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can perform a switching display in which the reserved image 52 is displayed in a first cycle and the small pattern 56 is displayed in a second cycle. The first cycle and the second cycle are different in time.
In this case, the player is prevented from mistakenly believing that the action display of the reserved image 52 and the switching display of the small patterns 56 are linked, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to display the sub-first variable display 81 in a cycle in a first period and then stop the display, and display the reserved image 52 in a motion in a second period. The first period and the second period are different times. The cycle display is, for example, a flashing display.
In this case, the player is prevented from mistakenly believing that the cycle display of the sub-first variable display 81 and the operation display of the reserved image 52 are linked, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can move the decorative pattern 41 in a first direction in the variable display, and can move the reserved image 52 in a second direction. The first direction is, for example, the direction in which the decorative pattern 41 changes. The second direction is the direction in which the reserved image 52 moves in the action performance. The second direction is a direction different from the first direction.
In this case, it is possible for the player to easily distinguish between the moving display of the decorative pattern 41 and the moving display of the reserved image 52, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

[Example of change performance 2]
52 and 53 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 2) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Figures 52 and 53. Variable performance example 2 is a variable performance executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 45. When "ER3" is selected as this "variable performance pattern", "N1" is executed as "normal". In addition, in the following explanation, differences from variable performance example 1 will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as variable performance example 1 may be omitted.

As the previous special symbol is frozen and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 is frozen and displayed as shown in FIG. 52 (1). At this time, the small symbol 56 is frozen and displayed. At this time, the glossy image 52A and aura image 52B of the first reserved image 52 and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are all located in their initial positions. At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "2", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121. At this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped. At this time, the sub-first reserved display 83 is displaying "2".

Next, the reserved number for the winning entry into the first starting port 121 is subtracted, and when the display of the next special symbol begins, the display of the small symbol 56 begins to change, as shown in FIG. 52 (2). At this time, the reserved number display 55 in the first starting port 121 switches from "2" to "1". At this time, the display of the change in the sub-first change indicator 81 begins. At this time, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 displays "1".

Next, as shown in Fig. 52 (3), a shift effect is started. At this time, a rotation effect of the first reserved image 52 and the second reserved image 52 is started. At this time, a partial swing effect of the first reserved image 52 is started.
Next, the shift performance ends, and as shown in Fig. 52 (4), the variable image 51 and the first reserved image 52 are displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed.

52(5), the number "4" of the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. At this time, a stop light emitting image 62 is displayed around the display area of the left decorative pattern 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (6), the reach effect starts. More specifically, the number "4" of the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the reach effect is reached. At this time, a stop light-emitting image 62 is displayed around the display area of the right decorative pattern 41. At this time, the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is continuously performed. At this time, the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 is continuously performed.

53(7), the number "5" of the central decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. At this time, a stop light emission image 62 is displayed around the display area of the central decorative pattern 41.
Then, as shown in FIG. 53(8), three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the special symbols. Here, the combination "454" of the decorative symbols 41 shown in FIG. 53(8) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. Also, with the stop display of the special symbols, the small symbols 56 are also stopped and displayed. At this time, the combination "454" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the rotation performance of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Also, at this time, the partial swing performance of the variable image 51 is continuously performed. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub first variable display 81 is stopped.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the number of pending memories stored in the RAM 203 is one, the performance control unit 300 displays the pending number display 55 in the first area, and displays the pending image 52 in a second area different from the first area. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories stored in the RAM 203 is multiple, the performance control unit 300 displays the pending number display 55 in the first area, and displays the pending image 52 in a third area different from the first area. Here, the first area is, for example, the display area of the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121. The second area is, for example, the display area of the first pending image 52. The third area is, for example, the display area of the second pending image 52.
In this case, a wide display area can be used to realize an effect using the reserved image 52, and the player can easily grasp the number of reserved balls, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Example of change performance 3]
54 and 55 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 3) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Figures 54 and 55. Variable performance example 3 is a variable performance that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 45. When "ER4" is selected as this "variable performance pattern", "N2" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as the "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as the "SPSP reach". In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, in this variation performance example 3, the same performance as that explained in variation performance example 2 with reference to Figures 52 (1) to 52 (6) is performed. That is, the variable display of the special pattern begins, the motion performance of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 begins, and then the reach performance begins. In this case, as shown in Figure 54 (1), the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 41 and the number "4" which is the right decorative pattern 41 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in Fig. 54(2), a transition image 64 is displayed. At this time, the SP start non-display effect is started.
The transition image 64 is an image that notifies or suggests that the SP reach performance will be executed or that the SP reach performance will end. Here, a predetermined image is displayed as the transition image 64, but it may be a monochromatic image displayed in the entire image display area of the image display unit 114. For example, a so-called whiteout may be executed by displaying a white image as the transition image 64 on the image display unit 114. Also, a so-called blackout may be executed by displaying a black image as the transition image 64 on the image display unit 114.
The SP start non-display performance is a performance in which the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden when the SP reach performance starts. In the SP start non-display performance, the transparency of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52, which have been displayed in an opaque display mode, gradually increases, and then the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden. In the illustrated example, in the SP start non-display performance, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed in a semi-transparent display mode.
When the transition image 64 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 are both located at half-rotation positions. At this time, the motion effects of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are continuously performed.

Next, the SP start non-display effect ends, and the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden as shown in Fig. 54 (3). Accordingly, the rotation effect and partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 end.
Next, as shown in Fig. 54 (4), the SP reach effect starts. At this time, the SP image 65 is displayed.
The SP image 65 is an image indicating that a SP reach effect is being executed. The SP image 65 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini-game.
When the SP reach performance is started, the left and right decorative symbols 41 move to the corners (upper left corner and upper right corner) of the image display area in the image display unit 114. These left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a smaller size and in a less decorative manner than the decorative symbols 41 displayed before the SP reach performance is started (see FIG. 54(1)).

Next, as shown in Fig. 54 (5), the SPSP reach effect starts. At this time, an SPSP image 66 is displayed.
The SPSP image 66 is an image indicating that the SPSP reach effect is being executed. The SPSP image 66 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 fight.

54(6), the number "5" which is the central decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. At this time, the central decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a less decorative display mode and in a larger display size than the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right.
Next, as shown in Fig. 55(7), a transition image 64 is displayed. At this time, the SP end display effect is started.
The SP end display performance is a performance in which the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed when the SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) ends. In the SP end display performance, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52, which had been hidden, are gradually changed from a display mode with high transparency to a display mode with low transparency, and then are displayed in an opaque display mode. In the illustrated example, in the SP end display performance, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed in a semi-transparent display mode.
When the SP end display performance is started, the glossy image 51A and the aura image 51B of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 are all located at their initial positions. At this time, the rotation performance and partial swing performance of the variable image 51 and the rotation performance of the reserved image 52 are also started.

Next, the SP end display performance ends, and as shown in FIG. 55 (8), the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed in an opaque display mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 55(9), three highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped.

Then, as the special symbols are displayed, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 55 (10). Here, the combination of decorative symbols 41 displayed as stopped in FIG. 55 (10), "454", is an example of a combination when the special symbol lottery result is a miss. In addition, as the special symbols are displayed, the small symbols 56 are also displayed as stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols 56, "454", matches the combination of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the rotation and partial swinging of the variable image 51 and the rotation of the reserved image 52 are also being performed continuously. At this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 hides the information display when a special performance is executed in a specific performance. Also, in a specific performance, the small symbol 56 is displayed regardless of whether or not a special performance is executed. Here, the specific performance is, for example, a reach performance. Also, examples of the special performance include an SP reach performance and an SPSP reach performance.
In this case, the player can be made aware that the special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner, while being directed to the special effects, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display a predetermined information display that changes from a first display mode to a second display mode different from the first display mode. The performance control unit 300 can hide the information display of the second display mode when a special performance is executed in a specific performance, and redisplay the information display of the second display mode after the decorative pattern 41 has notified that it has been determined that a special game will not be executed. Furthermore, in a specific performance, the small pattern 56 is displayed regardless of whether or not a special performance is executed. The first display mode is, for example, a normal display mode. Also, the second display mode is, for example, a blue display mode. The special game is, for example, a jackpot game.
In this case, the player can be made aware that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and can be made to focus on the special effects. Furthermore, by redisplaying the information display, the player can be made aware that the variable display of the special symbols has not ended, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the present embodiment, the performance control unit 300 may hide the information display when a special performance is executed in the specific performance, and may not hide the information display when a special performance is not executed in the specific performance. In addition, the small symbol 56 is displayed in the specific performance regardless of whether or not the special performance is executed.
In this case, the player can be made aware that the special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner, while being directed to the special effects, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the special performance is executed in the specific performance, the performance control unit 300 can display the decorative pattern 41 changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, and can hide the information display from the operationally displayed state. Here, the first display mode is, for example, a display mode of the decorative pattern 41 with high decorativeness. Also, the second display mode is a display mode of the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness.
In this case, the player can concentrate on the special effects, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Example of change performance 4]
56 and 57 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 4) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Figures 56 and 57. Variable performance example 4 is a variable performance that is executed when "EA2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 44. When "EA2" is selected as this "variable performance pattern", "N2" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as the "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as the "SPSP reach". In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, in this variation performance example 4, the same performance as that explained in the variation performance example 3 with reference to Fig. 54 (1) to Fig. 54 (3) is performed. That is, the variation display of the special symbol starts, the operation performance of the variation image 51 and the reserved image 52 starts, the reach performance starts, and then the variation image 51 and the reserved image 52 become non-displayed, and the SP reach performance starts. In this case, the SP image 65 is displayed as shown in Fig. 56 (1).
Next, as shown in Fig. 56(2), the SPSP reach effect starts. At this time, an SPSP image 66 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (3), the repeated decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the combination "444," thereby informing the player that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger size than when the SPSP reach performance is being performed (see FIG. 56 (2)). At this time, the small pattern 56 maintains a state in which three patterns are displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 maintain an invisible state. At this time, the variable display on the sub first variable display 81 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(4), a promotion teasing effect begins.
The promotion teasing effect is an effect that teases whether or not a player will be promoted. Here, promotion is an effect in which the decorative pattern 41 that notifies or suggests that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win is temporarily stopped, and then changed to a decorative pattern 41 that notifies or suggests that the player will be in a more advantageous gaming state. In the illustrated example, a button operation image 67 is displayed as the promotion teasing effect.
The button operation image 67 is an image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 161. By displaying this button operation image 67, the player can recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 161. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates the effect button 161 is displayed as the button operation image 67. Note that when the button operation image 67 is displayed, a valid period suggestion image that suggests the valid period for operating the effect button 161 may be displayed together with the button operation image 67. Then, when the valid period for operating the effect button 161 has expired, the valid period suggestion image may be hidden.

If the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 67 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the combination "444" as shown in FIG. 56 (5). In other words, as a result of the promotion teasing effect being performed, the player is not promoted.

56(6), a light-emitting effect is started using the doublet decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, a light-emitting effect is performed in which a doublet luminous image 68 is displayed around each display area of the doublet decorative pattern 41.
The doublet light emitting image 68 is an image that makes the player see the doublet decorative pattern 41 that is temporarily stopped as if it is emitting light. The doublet light emitting image 68 is, for example, an image that imitates light. The doublet light emitting image 68 may be displayed in any color. The doublet light emitting image 68 may also be displayed in the whole or part of the area in which each of the doublet decorative patterns 41 is displayed. The doublet light emitting image 68 is displayed for, for example, 2.5 seconds. That is, the execution time of the light emitting effect using the doublet decorative pattern 41 is longer than the rotation period in the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52.

Then, as the special pattern stops, the decorative pattern 41 stops as shown in FIG. 57 (7). The number combination "444" of the decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In addition, "444" is displayed as the small pattern 56. That is, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 matches the combination "444". At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 remain in an undisplayed state. At this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a special effect is executed in a specific effect, the information display is hidden, and after the decorative symbol 41 notifies that a special game is determined to be executed, the information display may not be displayed. Then, in a specific effect, the small symbol 56 is displayed regardless of whether or not a special effect is executed.
In this case, the player is made aware that the special pattern is being displayed in a changing manner and is made to focus on the special effects, and further, the player is made to focus on the decorative pattern 41 which notifies the player that a jackpot game has been determined to occur, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

[Variation example 5]
58 to 60 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 5) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Figures 58 to 60. Variable performance example 5 is a variable performance executed when "EB3" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 44. When "EB3" is selected as this "variable performance pattern", "N2" is executed as "normal", "SP2" is executed as the "SP reach", and "SPSP2" is executed as the "SPSP reach". In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, in this variation performance example 5, the same performance as that explained in the variation performance example 3 with reference to Fig. 54 (1) to Fig. 54 (3) is performed. That is, the variation display of the special pattern starts, the operation performance of the variation image 51 and the reserved image 52 starts, the reach performance starts, and then the variation image 51 and the reserved image 52 become non-displayed, and the SP reach performance starts. In this case, as shown in Fig. 58 (1), the SP image 65 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 58(2), the SPSP reach effect starts. At this time, an SPSP image 66 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(3), the number "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 58(4), the transition image 64 is displayed. At this time, the SP end display performance is started. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are redisplayed. Both the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed in a semi-transparent display mode. At this time, the glossy image 51A and the aura image 51B of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 are both located at the initial position. At this time, the rotation performance and partial swing performance of the variable image 51 and the rotation performance of the reserved image 52 are started.

Next, the SP end display effect ends. At this time, as shown in FIG. 58 (5), the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed in an opaque display mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 58 (6), the three highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped. At this time, the rotation and partial swing of the variable image 51 and the rotation of the reserved image 52 are continuously performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 59 (7), the revival effect starts. At this time, the revival non-display effect also starts.
The revival performance is a performance in which the decorative pattern 41, which indicates that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win, is temporarily stopped, and then the decorative pattern 41, which indicates that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win, is displayed. In the illustrated example, a revival image 69 is displayed in the revival performance. The revival image 69 is an image that indicates or suggests that the revival performance is being performed.
The revival non-display performance is a performance in which the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden when the revival performance is performed. In the revival non-display performance, the transparency of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 that have been displayed in an opaque display mode gradually increases, and then the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden. In the illustrated example, in the revival non-display performance, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed in a semi-transparent display mode.
When the revival non-display performance is started, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 are both located at a half-rotation position. At this time, the aura image 51B of the variable image 51 is located at a left-tilted position. At this time, the rotation performance and partial swing performance of the variable image 51 and the rotation performance of the reserved image 52 are continuously performed.

Next, the revival non-display effect ends, and the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden as shown in FIG. 59 (8). Accordingly, the rotation effect and partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 end. At this time, the light emission effect starts. In the illustrated example, the revival light emission image 70 is displayed as the light emission effect.
The revival light-emitting image 70 is an image that makes the player see the revival image 69 as if it is emitting light. In the illustrated example, the revival light-emitting image 70 is displayed around the display area of the revival image 69. The revival light-emitting image 70 is, for example, an image that imitates light. The revival light-emitting image 70 may be displayed in any color. The revival light-emitting image 70 may also be displayed in the entirety or part of the area in which the revival image 69 is displayed. The time that the revival light-emitting image 70 is displayed is, for example, three seconds. In other words, the execution time of the light-emitting effect using the revival image 69 is longer than the rotation period in the rotation effect of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52.

Next, as shown in Fig. 59 (9), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the combination "444", thereby informing the player that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 remain in the non-display state.
Next, as shown in Fig. 59 (10), a promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, a button operation image 67 is displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 67 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the combination "777", as shown in FIG. 59 (11). In this way, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the combination "777", thereby informing the player that a promotion has been made. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 remain in an undisplayed state.

59(12), a light-emitting effect is started using the doublet decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, a light-emitting effect is performed in which a doublet luminous image 68 is displayed around each display area of the doublet decorative pattern 41.
Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (13), the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped with the stop display of the special pattern. The combination of numbers "777" of the decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win. Also, "777" is stopped and displayed as the small pattern 56. That is, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 matches the combination of "777". Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 maintain a non-display state. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub first variable display 81 stops.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a special effect is executed in a specific effect, the information display is hidden, and after a notification by the decorative pattern 41 in a state in which it is determined that a special game is not to be executed, the information display is displayed, and then when the decorative pattern 41 notifies that it has been determined that a special game is to be executed, the information display may be hidden. Then, in a specific effect, the small pattern 56 is displayed regardless of whether or not a special effect is executed.
In this case, the player can be made aware that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and can be made to focus on the special effects. Also, by redisplaying the information display, the player can be made aware that the variable display of the special symbols has not ended. Furthermore, by subsequently hiding the information display, the player can be made to focus on the decorative symbols 41 that notify the player that a big win game has been determined, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of change performance 6]
61 and 62 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 6) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Figures 61 and 62. Variable performance example 6 is a variable performance executed when "EB5" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 44. When "EB5" is selected as this "variable performance pattern", "N3" is executed as "normal". In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, in this variation presentation example 6, the same presentation as that explained in variation presentation example 2 with reference to Figures 52 (1) to 52 (6) is performed. That is, after the variable display of the special pattern starts, the operation presentation of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 starts, and then the reach presentation starts. In this case, as shown in Figure 61 (1), the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 41 and the number "4" which is the right decorative pattern 41 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(2), a temporary stop prompting effect is performed.
The temporary stop prompting performance is a performance that prompts whether or not the middle decorative pattern 41, which is the same number as the left and right decorative patterns 41, will temporarily stop. In the illustrated example, in the temporary stop prompting performance, the number "4" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 moves from the top to the center in the display area of the image display unit 114 while gradually slowing down the moving speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), the number "4" in the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as the combination "444." At this time, both the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed. At this time, the rotation and partial swinging of the variable image 51 and the rotation of the reserved image 52 are being performed continuously.

Next, as shown in Fig. 61 (4), a promotion prompting effect is performed. In the promotion prompting effect, a button operation image 67 is displayed. At this time, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a less decorative display mode.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 67 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the combination of "777" as shown in FIG. 61 (5). In this way, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the combination of "777", thereby informing the player that a promotion has been made. At this time, both the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are also displayed. At this time, the rotation effect and partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are also continuously performed.

61(6), a light-emitting effect is started using the doublet decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, a light-emitting effect is performed in which a doublet luminous image 68 is displayed around each display area of the doublet decorative pattern 41.
Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (7), the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped with the stop display of the special pattern. The combination of numbers "777" of the decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win. Also, "777" is stopped and displayed as the small pattern 56. That is, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 is in a state where the combination of "777" matches. Also, at this time, both the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, the rotation performance and partial swing performance of the variable image 51 and the rotation performance of the reserved image 52 are continuously performed. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub first variable display 81 is stopped.

[Example of change performance 7]
63 and 64 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 7) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Figs. 63 and 64. Variable performance example 7 is a variable performance executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 45. When "ER1" is selected as this "variable performance pattern", performances such as "normal" are not executed. In addition, variable performance example 7 is an example of a variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 in a low probability time-saving no-play state. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the above variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the above variable performance examples may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 63 (1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300. In addition, in the illustrated example, an image with a sea theme is displayed as the stage image 61. That is, the stage in the variable performance example 7 is a different stage from the stages in the variable performance examples 1 to 6. The decorativeness of the decorative pattern 41 is different between this stage and the stages in the variable performance examples 1 to 6. In addition, in this stage, the reserved image 52 has a cross shape. In the illustrated example, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 are all located at a predetermined initial position. In addition, the small pattern 56 is displayed in the same display mode in this stage and the stages in the variable performance examples 1 to 6. In addition, the small pattern 56 is displayed stopped at this time. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "4", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped. Also, at this time, the sub-first variable display 83 is displaying "4".

Then, when the reserved number for the winning entry in the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the display of the small symbol 56 begins to change, as shown in FIG. 63 (2). At this time, the reserved number display 55 in the first starting port 121 switches from "4" to "3". At this time, the display of the change on the sub-first change indicator 81 begins. At this time, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 displays "3".

Next, as shown in Fig. 63(3), the shift effect starts. At this time, the whole swing effect starts.
The whole-body swing performance as an example of the action performance is a performance in which the whole of the changing image 51 or the whole of the reserved image 52 swings. In the illustrated example, in the whole-body swing performance, the reserved image 52 continues to swing from side to side. The whole-body swing performance is started from a state in which the changing image 51 or the reserved image 52 is located at an initial position. When the whole-body swing performance is started, the changing image 51 or the reserved image 52 first starts to swing to the right.
When the overall shaking performance starts, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52 and the fourth reserved image 52 are all positioned in non-initial positions.

Next, as shown in Fig. 63(4), the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary. At this time, the enlargement effect also starts.
Next, the shift effect and the enlargement effect are finished, and as shown in Fig. 63 (5), the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. At this time, the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all located in a right-tilted position.
Next, as shown in Fig. 63 (6), the whole shaking performance continues. At this time, the moving image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all located in a left tilt position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (7), the overall rocking performance continues. At this time, the changing image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 all reach their initial positions. That is, one round trip of rocking in the overall rocking performance of the changing image 51 and the reserved image 52 is completed. Here, the time required for one round trip of rocking in the overall rocking performance, i.e., the rocking period in the overall rocking performance, is, for example, 2 seconds. In other words, the rocking period in the overall rocking performance is the same as the rotation period in the rotation performance (see FIG. 46 (3)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (8), the three decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop. At this time, stop-time light-emitting images 62 are displayed around the display area of the left decorative pattern 41, the display area of the middle decorative pattern 41, and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41, respectively. Also, at this time, the overall shaking performance of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 continues.

Then, as the special symbols are displayed, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 64 (9). Here, the combination "412" of the decorative symbols 41 displayed as stopped in FIG. 64 (9) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. In addition, as the special symbols are displayed, the small symbols 56 are also displayed as stopped. At this time, the combination "412" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. At this time, the overall shaking performance of the changing image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is also being performed continuously. At this time, the changing display on the sub first changing display 81 stops.

[Example of variation 8]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 8) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Fig. 65. This variation presentation example 8 is a variation presentation example of the decorative pattern 41 in a high probability time-saving game state. Also, variation presentation example 8 is a variation presentation example when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss. In the following explanation, differences from the above variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 65(1), the display control unit 300 stops the previous special symbol, and the image display unit 114 stops the less decorative decorative symbol 41. In addition, a sky-themed image is displayed as the stage image 61. In addition, a right-hit image 71 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The right-hit image 71 is an image for encouraging the player to launch the game ball into the right area of the game area 111. In addition, an image imitating a flame is displayed as the reserved image 52. In the illustrated example, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 are all located at a predetermined initial position. In addition, in the variable performance example 8 and the variable performance examples 1 to 7, the small symbol 56 is displayed in the same display mode. In addition, the small symbol 56 is displayed as a stopped symbol at this time. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning entries into the first start port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 shows "4", which is the reserved number for winning entries into the second start port 122. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-second variable display 82 has stopped. Also, at this time, the sub-second variable display 84 is showing "4".

Then, when the reserved number for the winning entry into the second starting port 122 is subtracted and the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the display of the small symbol 56 begins to change, as shown in FIG. 65 (2). At this time, the reserved number display 55 in the second starting port 122 switches from "4" to "3". At this time, the display of the change on the sub-second change indicator 82 begins. At this time, the sub-second reserve indicator 84 displays "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (3), a shift effect is started. At this time, a rotation effect is also started. In the example shown, in the rotation effect, the reserved image 52 continues to rotate in a clockwise direction. When the rotation effect is started, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 are all positioned in non-initial positions in the rotation direction.

Next, the shift performance ends, and as shown in FIG. 65 (4), the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed changing at high speed. At this time, the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all located in the half-rotation position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65(5), three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the special symbols. Here, the combination "758" of the decorative symbols 41 shown in FIG. 65(5) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. Also, with the stop display of the special symbols, the small symbols 56 are also stopped and displayed. At this time, the combination "758" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the rotation performance of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Also, at this time, the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 all reach their initial positions. That is, one rotation in the rotation performance of the reserved image 52 is completed. Here, the time required for one rotation in the spin effect in this high-probability time-saving play state, i.e., the rotation period in the spin effect in the high-probability time-saving play state, is, for example, 2 seconds. In other words, the rotation period in the spin effect in the high-probability time-saving play state is the same as the rotation period in the spin effect in the low-probability no-time-saving play state and the oscillation period in the overall oscillation effect. Also, at this time, the oscillation display on the sub second oscillation display 82 stops.

In addition, in a high probability time-saving game state, since the time for the special symbol to change is short, one change presentation may end before one cycle of the action presentation is performed after the start of the change presentation. And, even in a high probability time-saving game state, in a change presentation in which a reach presentation is performed, one or more cycles of the action presentation may be performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the reserved image 52 in the first display mode in the first performance mode, and can display the reserved image 52 in the second display mode in the second performance mode. Also, the performance control unit 300 can display the reserved image 52 in the first display mode in a first cycle, and can display the reserved image 52 in the second display mode in a second cycle. And, the first cycle and the second cycle are the same time. Here, the first performance mode may be, for example, a predetermined stage or a predetermined game state. Also, the second performance mode may be, for example, a stage different from the first performance mode or a game state different from the first performance mode.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the second display mode for the display mode after the hold change presentation using the hold image 52 of the first display mode, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 makes the period of operation in the performance of the pending image 52 in the first performance mode completely identical to the period of operation in the performance of the pending image 52 in the second performance mode, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may make the period of the action in the action performance of the reserved image 52 in the first performance mode substantially the same as the period of the action in the action performance of the reserved image 52 in the second performance mode. In other words, the period of the action in the action performance of the reserved image 52 in the first performance mode and the period of the action in the action performance of the reserved image 52 in the second performance mode are not limited to be completely the same.

[Example of change performance 9]
66 and 67 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 9) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Figs. 66 and 67. Variable performance example 9 is a variable performance executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 45. When "ER1" is selected as this "variable performance pattern", performances such as "normal" are not executed. In addition, in variable performance example 9, during the variable performance, the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored. In addition, in the following description, differences from each of the above variable performance examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the above variable performance examples may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 66 (1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300. At this time, the glossy image 52A is displayed in a predetermined initial position in the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52. At this time, the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state in the first special pattern display 221. At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 218 is displaying "4", which corresponds to the reserved number for the winning entry in the first starting hole 121. At this time, the variable display in the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped. At this time, the sub-first reserved display 83 is displaying "4".

Next, the reserved number for the winning entry into the first starting port 121 is subtracted, and when the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218 displays "3" as shown in FIG. 66 (2). At this time, the cyclic change of the special symbol begins in the first special symbol indicator 221.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (3), the display of the small pattern 56 begins to change. At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "4" to "3". At this time, the display of the reserved number on the sub-first change indicator 81 begins to change. At this time, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 displays "3".

Next, as shown in Fig. 66(4), a shift effect is started. At this time, a rotation effect of the reserved image 52 is also started.
Next, the shift performance ends, and as shown in Fig. 66 (5), the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed.

When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the image display unit 114 goes out, as shown in FIG. 66 (6). At this time, the LEDs in the first special symbol reserved indicator 218 and the first special symbol indicator 221 go out. At this time, the LEDs in the sub-first variable indicator 81 and the sub-first reserved indicator 83 go out.

Next, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored, as shown in FIG. 67 (7), the first special symbol reserved indicator 218 displays "3," which is the reserved number for winning in the first starting hole 121. At this time, the cyclic fluctuation of the special symbol in the first special symbol indicator 221 is resumed. Meanwhile, at this time, the LED in the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 and the LED in the sub-first reserved indicator 83 remain off. At this time, the recovery in progress image 72 is displayed. The recovery in progress image 72 is an image that notifies the user that the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is being restored. In the illustrated example, the text "Restoring" is displayed as the recovery in progress image 72.

Next, as shown in Fig. 67 (8), the change display on the sub-first change indicator 81 is resumed. Also, the sub-first hold indicator 83 displays "3".
Then, as shown in FIG. 67(9), the number "123" which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 is fixed and stopped. The number "123" is a number displayed in response to the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 being restored after being cut off. In addition, the small symbols 56 are stopped and displayed in response to the special symbols being stopped and changed. At this time, the combination "123" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. At this time, the three reserved images 52 are displayed again. At this time, the rotation effect of the three reserved images 52 is resumed. This rotation effect is resumed from a state in which the glossy images 52A of the three reserved images 52 are all located at the initial position. In addition, the rotation period in this rotation effect is the same as the rotation period in the rotation effect that was performed before the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 was cut off. At this time, the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. Also at this time, the variation display on the sub-first variation display 81 stops.

As described above, in this embodiment, the special symbol change control unit 233 performs a cyclic change in the first period as a change display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol. Also, the performance control unit 300 can display the reserved image 52 in a moving manner in the second period. The first period and the second period are different times.
In this case, the player is prevented from mistakenly believing that the cyclical fluctuation of the special pattern and the operational display of the reserved image 52 are linked, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the performance control unit 300 can execute the operational display of the pending image 52 after the cyclical display of the special pattern has begun.
In this case, even if the cyclical variation of the special pattern starts after the power is restored, the operation display of the reserved image 52 is executed, which prevents the player from mistakenly believing that the cyclical variation of the special pattern has started, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

(Variation 1)
FIG. 68 shows a modified example of the presentation in the variable presentation example.
Next, we will explain modified examples of the presentation in the above-mentioned variable presentation example.
In the above-mentioned example of a changeable display, it has been explained that the display operation is performed in such a way that the reserved image 52 moves from below the reserved base to above it (see FIG. 49 (19)). However, the display operation is not limited to the above-mentioned display mode.

For example, when the number of reserved images is incremented, a display operation effect may be performed in which the newly displayed third reserved image 52 is gradually enlarged in a small display size, as shown in FIG. 68(1). Then, when the display operation effect ends, the newly displayed third reserved image 52 may be displayed in the same display size as the reserved image 52 that is already being displayed, as shown in FIG. 68(2).

(Variation 2)
FIG. 69 shows a modified example of the presentation in the variable presentation example.
Next, another variation (variation 2) of the presentation in the variable presentation example described above will be explained.
In the above-mentioned example of the changeable performance, it was explained that at the timing when a new pending image 52 is displayed, the action display of the already displayed pending image 52 and the action display of the newly displayed pending image 52 are synchronized (see Figure 49 (20)), but this is not limited to this.

For example, as shown in FIG. 69(1), when a third reserved image 52 is newly displayed, the third reserved image 52 may be displayed with the glossy image 52A located at its initial position, regardless of the position of the glossy image 52A in the reserved image 52 that is already displayed. Then, the rotation effect of the newly displayed third reserved image 52 is started, but the glossy image 52A of this third reserved image is not aligned with the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 that is already displayed in the rotation direction of the reserved image 52. In other words, at the timing when the newly displayed reserved image 52 is displayed, the action display of the already displayed reserved image 52 and the action display of the newly displayed reserved image 52 are not synchronized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (2), the three decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop. At this time, the rotation performance of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 continues. Also, at this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are all located in their initial positions. On the other hand, the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 is located in a non-initial position.

Then, as the special symbol stops, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 69 (3). At this time, the rotation effects of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all continuing. At this time, the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 is not aligned in the rotational direction with the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52.

Next, the stop non-display effect is performed, and the variable image 51 is not displayed as shown in Fig. 69 (4). At this time, the rotation effects of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all still being performed. At this time, the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 is not aligned in the rotation direction with the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52 and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52.
69(5), the rotation effects of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all interrupted. At this time, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all displayed with the glossy image 52A positioned at the initial position.

Then, the reserved number for the winning entry into the first starting port 121 is subtracted, and when the variable display of the next special symbol starts, the variable display of the small symbol 56 starts. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (6), the shift effect starts, and the rotation effect of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is resumed. At this time, the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 is aligned with the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52 in the rotation direction. In other words, at this timing, the operation display of the first reserved image 52 and the operation display of the third reserved image 52 are synchronized. In this way, the timing at which the operation display of the already displayed reserved image 52 and the newly displayed reserved image 52 are synchronized is not limited to the timing at which the newly displayed reserved image 52 is displayed.

(Variation 3)
FIG. 70 shows a modified example of the presentation in the variable presentation example.
Next, another variation (variation 3) of the presentation in the above-mentioned variable presentation example will be described.
In the above-mentioned example of the change presentation, it has been explained that when the presentation of the motion of the pending image 52 is interrupted, the pending image 52 is not displayed in motion (see FIG. 47 (12)), but this is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 70 (1), even after the decorative pattern 41 has been fixed and stopped, the stop-non-display effect has ended, and the variable image 51 has become non-display, the rotation effect of the pending image 52 continues.
Next, the reserved number for the winning entry in the first starting port 121 is subtracted, and when the variable display of the next special symbol starts, the variable display of the small symbol 56 starts as shown in Fig. 70 (2). At this time, the reserved number display 55 in the first starting port 121 switches from "3" to "2". At this time, the rotation of the reserved image 52 continues.

Next, as shown in Fig. 70 (3), a shift effect is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 52 is rotated in a direction different from the rotation direction in the rotation effect as a shift effect. During the execution of this shift effect, the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 is interrupted.
Then, when the shift effect ends, the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is resumed. In this case, the rotation effect is resumed from a state in which the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 are both located at their initial positions. In this way, when the motion effect of the reserved image 52 is interrupted, the reserved image 52 may be displayed in a motion mode different from the motion effect.

(Variation 4)
71 and 72 are diagrams showing modified examples of the presentation in the variable presentation example.
Next, another variation (variation 4) of the presentation in the above-mentioned variable presentation example will be described.
In the above-mentioned example of the variable presentation, it has been explained that the period of operation in the action presentation is the same before the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, but this is not limited to the above.

For example, as shown in FIG. 71 (1), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are displayed changing at high speed. At this time, a rotation effect is being performed on the changing image 51 and the reserved image 52. The rotation period in this rotation effect is, for example, 2 seconds.

Next, the display mode of the third reserved image 52 is changed from the normal display mode to the blinking display mode by the hold change effect being performed. The third reserved image 52 displayed in the blinking display mode performs a rotation effect and a blinking effect.
The blinking performance as an example of the action performance is a performance in which the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 alternates between a lighting state (see FIG. 71 (2)) in which the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 appears to be lit and a lighting state (see FIG. 71 (3)) in which the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 appears to be turned off. In the blinking performance, the time from the lighting state to the lighting state, through the lighting state, to the lighting state again, that is, the blinking period in the blinking performance, is, for example, 0.5 seconds. In other words, the blinking period in the blinking performance is shorter than the rotation period in the rotation performance. In addition, the display of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 in the blinking performance is an example of the action display. In other words, the "action display" includes not only a display in which the display area of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 changes over time, but also a display in which the display mode of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 changes over time in a predetermined display area, as in the display in the blinking performance.

Next, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in Fig. 71 (4). At this time, the LED in the sub-first variable indicator 81 and the LED in the sub-first reserve indicator 83 are turned off.
Next, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored, a restoration image 72 is displayed as shown in Fig. 71 (5). Also, the change display on the sub-first change indicator 81 is resumed. Also, the sub-first hold indicator 83 displays "3".

Then, as the special symbols are displayed, the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41, the numbers "123", are displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (6). As the special symbols are displayed, the small symbols 56 are displayed as well. At this time, the three reserved images 52 are displayed again. At this time, the third reserved image 52, which is displayed in a blinking display mode, is in a lit state. At this time, the display of the change on the sub-first change indicator 81 is also stopped.

Then, the reserved number for the winning entry in the first starting port 121 is subtracted, and the variable display of the next special symbol is started. After that, when the shift performance is performed, as shown in FIG. 72 (7), the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, and the second reserved image 52 are displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 is started. Also, the rotation performance of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is performed. The rotation period in this rotation performance is 2 seconds. Also, the blinking performance of the second reserved image 52 is performed. The blinking period in this blinking performance is, for example, 2 seconds. That is, after the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the blinking period in the blinking performance is longer than before the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 was cut off. Also, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Also, the sub-first reserved display 83 displays "2".

As described above, in variant example 4, after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the performance control unit 300 lengthens the operation period in the action performance compared to before the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 was cut off.
Although a player may be able to resume playing after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after being cut off, the player may feel uneasy about the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 being cut off. In this case, if the period of the action in the action presentation is shortened to provide a presentation that provokes the player, the player's uneasiness may increase. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the period of the action in the action presentation is lengthened to limit the presentation that provokes the player, thereby suppressing the player's uneasiness from increasing when resuming playing.

In this embodiment, it has been described that the performance control unit 300 starts the action performance before starting the varying display of the decorative pattern 41 (see Figure 46 (3)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may start the action performance when starting the variable display of the decorative pattern 41. Also, the performance control unit 300 may start the action performance after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 starts the action performance after starting the changing display of the small pattern 56 (see Figure 46 (3)), but the action performance may also be started when starting the changing display of the small pattern 56.
In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 starts the action performance after updating the display content of the hold number display 55 in response to a decrease in the hold number (see Figure 46 (3)), but the action performance may also be started when the display content of the hold number display 55 is updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 300 displays a new pending image 52, it has been explained that when the increasing display performance ends, it starts the action performance of the newly displayed pending image 52 (see Figure 49 (20)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, when displaying a new pending image 52, the performance control unit 300 may start a motion performance of the newly displayed pending image 52 while the increasing display performance is being executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the performance control unit 300 interrupts the action performance after the decorative pattern 41 has been determined and stopped (see Figure 47 (12)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may interrupt the action performance when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped. Also, the performance control unit 300 may interrupt the action performance before the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the performance control unit 300 interrupts the action performance after stopping and displaying the small pattern 56 (see Figure 47 (12)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may interrupt the action performance when the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed. Also, the performance control unit 300 may interrupt the action performance before the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the performance control unit 300 suspends the action performance of the pending image 52 after hiding the variable image 51 (see Figure 47 (12)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may interrupt the action performance of the reserved image 52 when hiding the variable image 51. Also, the performance control unit 300 may interrupt the action performance of the reserved image 52 before hiding the variable image 51.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the performance control unit 300 interrupts the action performance of the pending image 52 before starting the shift performance (see FIG. 47 (12)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may interrupt the action performance of the reserved image 52 when starting a shift performance. Also, the performance control unit 300 may interrupt the action performance of the reserved image 52 while the shift performance is being executed. Also, the performance control unit 300 may interrupt the action performance of the reserved image 52 when ending the shift performance. Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may interrupt the action performance of the reserved image 52 after ending the shift performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the performance control unit 300 starts the shift performance before starting the varying display of the decorative pattern 41 (see Figure 46 (3)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may start the shift performance when starting the variable display of the decorative pattern 41. Also, the performance control unit 300 may start the shift performance after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are times when the action presentation of the pending image 52 is not performed between the time when the action presentation of the pending image 52 is interrupted and the time when it is resumed (see Figure 47 (12)), but this is not limited to this.
As an example, the performance control unit 300 may interrupt the action performance that was being performed for the displayed reserved image 52, and at the same time, start the rotation performance from a state where the reserved image 52 is located at the initial position. In other words, the "interruption" of the action display of the reserved image 52 may be such that the cyclical action display that was in progress is interrupted midway, and there may be no time when the action performance of the reserved image 52 is not being performed from the interruption to the resumption of the action performance of the reserved image 52.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the performance control unit 300 ends the operation performance of the variable image 51 after starting the stop non-display performance (see Figure 47 (11)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may end the motion performance of the variable image 51 when starting the stop non-display performance. Also, the performance control unit 300 may end the motion performance of the variable image 51 before starting the stop non-display performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the performance control unit 300 changes the transparency of the variable image 51 in the stop non-display performance (see Figure 47 (10)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, in a stop non-display performance, the performance control unit 300 may gradually reduce the display size of the changing image 51 and then make the changing image 51 invisible.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the periods of some actions (for example, rotations in the rotation performances of each other) are the same between one reserved image 52 and another reserved image 52 (see FIG. 48 (17)) that have different display modes, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible that actions with the same period are not performed in the action performances between one reserved image 52 and another reserved image 52 that have different display modes.

Furthermore, the timing at which the performance control unit 300 synchronizes the operational display of multiple pending images 52 is not limited to the examples described above.
An example of the timing at which the performance control unit 300 synchronizes the action display of the multiple reserved images 52 will be described. When one reserved image 52 in which an action performance is being performed is located at a non-initial position, another reserved image 52 may be newly displayed in a state in which it is located at the initial position. In this case, the newly displayed other reserved image 52 does not perform an action performance until the already displayed one reserved image 52 reaches the initial position. Then, at the timing when the already displayed one reserved image 52 reaches the initial position, the newly displayed other reserved image 52 performs an action performance together with the already displayed one reserved image 52. In this way, the action display of the newly displayed other reserved image 52 and the action display of the already displayed one reserved image 52 may be synchronized.
Also, for example, the performance control unit 300 may synchronize the operation display of a newly displayed pending image 52 with the operation display of an already displayed pending image 52 while an increasing display performance is being executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the performance control unit 300 starts the SP start non-display performance when displaying the transition image 64 (see FIG. 54 (2)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may start the SP start non-display performance before displaying the transition image 64. Also, the SP start non-display performance may be started after displaying the transition image 64. Also, the SP start non-display performance may be started when the SP reach performance is started. Also, the SP start non-display performance may be started after the start of the SP reach performance.

Also, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 makes the changing image 51 and the reserved image 52 invisible during the SP reach presentation, thereby preventing the player from viewing the changing image 51 and the reserved image 52, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may, for example, restrict the player from viewing the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 by displaying the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 in a layer lower than the layer in which the SP image 65 and the transition image 64 are displayed among the multiple layers of the image display unit 114. The lower layer is the layer on the rear side when the player sees the pachinko game machine 100 from the front. In addition, in the SP reach performance, the performance control unit 300 may continue the action performance of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. In this case, when the SP image 65 and the transition image 64 are hidden and the player is able to view the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be located in a non-initial position. In other words, when the player is able to view the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 again after the end of the SP reach performance, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may not be located in the initial position.

Also, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 prevents the player from viewing (hiding) the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 while the transition image 64 is being displayed (see FIG. 54 (3)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may make the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 invisible to the player before displaying the transition image 64. Also, the performance control unit 300 may make the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 invisible to the player when the SP reach performance starts. Also, the performance control unit 300 may make the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 invisible to the player after the SP reach performance starts.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 300 performs a SP reach performance, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed (see Figure 54 (4)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, when performing the SP reach performance, the reserved image 52 may be hidden while the variable image 51 may not be hidden. Also, when performing the SP reach performance, the variable image 51 may be hidden while the reserved image 52 may not be hidden. Also, when performing the SP reach performance, neither the variable image 51 nor the reserved image 52 may be hidden. In this case, the action performance of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 that are not hidden may be continued. That is, when performing the specific performance, the performance control unit 300 may change the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 in some cases, but may not change the action display of the information display in some cases. In this case, the player can be made to pay attention to the specific performance while being made aware that the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the performance control unit 300 starts the SP end display performance when displaying the transition image 64 (see FIG. 55 (7)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may start the SP end display performance after displaying the transition image 64. Also, the performance control unit 300 may start the SP end display performance when displaying the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 after displaying the transition image 64 (see FIG. 55 (9)).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the performance control unit 300 displays the transition image 64 and then displays the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 in an opaque display mode (see Figure 55 (8)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, when displaying the transition image 64, the performance control unit 300 may display the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 in an opaque display mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a variable presentation in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, when the repeating decorative pattern 41 is first displayed (see Figure 56 (3)), the presentation control unit 300 makes the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 invisible, but this is not limited to this.
For example, in a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, when the decorative pattern 41 of the same number is displayed for the first time, the performance control unit 300 may display the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. And, for example, when the promotion performance is being executed (see FIG. 56 (4)), the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be hidden. Also, for example, in a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may not be hidden until the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be hidden when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped.

Also, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 hides the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 while executing the revival performance (see FIG. 59 (8)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may display the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 when the revival performance is being performed, and then, when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (see FIG. 59 (9)), the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be hidden. Also, for example, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may not be hidden during and after the revival performance, and the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be hidden when the promotion performance is performed thereafter (see FIG. 59 (10)). Also, for example, even when the revival performance is performed, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may not be hidden until the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be hidden when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped. Also, for example, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be hidden during the revival performance, and the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be displayed again after the revival performance ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 does not hide the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 (see Figure 61 (3)) when the SP reach performance is not performed in the variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may not hide the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 at the timing when the repeated number decorative pattern 41 is first displayed (see FIG. 61 (3)), and may then hide the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52. Also, for example, the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 may not be hidden until the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, and may hide the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the performance control unit 300 starts displaying the recovery in progress image 72 and then resumes the display of changes on the sub-first change display unit 81 (see Figure 67 (8)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, when the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is restored after being cut off, the performance control unit 300 may resume the change display on the sub-first change display device 81 and then begin displaying the recovery in progress image 72.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the performance control unit 300 starts displaying the recovery in progress image 72 and then resumes displaying the number of reserved balls on the sub-first reserved display 83 (see Figure 67 (8)), but this is not limited to the above.
For example, when the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is restored after being cut off, the performance control unit 300 may resume displaying the number of reserved balls on the sub-first reserved display 83 and then begin displaying the recovery in progress image 72.

Also, in this embodiment, it has been described that the performance control unit 300 lengthens the blinking period in the blinking performance after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, compared to before the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off. Here, the performance mode for lengthening the action period in the action performance after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, compared to before the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, is not limited to the above example.
For example, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored while a blinking effect with a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds is being performed by the reserved image 52 in a blinking display mode, the reserved image 52 in a normal display mode may be displayed instead of the reserved image 52 in the blinking display mode. After that, the reserved image 52 in the normal display mode performs an action effect with an action cycle of 2 seconds. In this way, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the action cycle in the action effect may be made longer than before the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 was cut off.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the performance control unit 300 starts an enlargement performance while a shift performance is being executed (see FIG. 46 (4)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may start the enlargement performance when starting the shift performance. Also, the performance control unit 300 may end the enlargement performance before ending the shift performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movement manner in which the performance control unit 300 moves the reserved image 52 to the display area of the variable image 51 in a shift performance is the same as the movement manner in which one reserved image 52 is moved to the display area of another reserved image 52, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may, in the shift performance, cause the action of the reserved image 52 when the reserved image 52 is moved to the display area of the variable image 51 to be different from the action of the one reserved image 52 when one reserved image 52 is moved to the display area of the other reserved image 52. Also, in the shift performance, the movement direction of the reserved image 52 when the reserved image 52 is moved to the display area of the variable image 51 may be different from the movement direction of the one reserved image 52 when one reserved image 52 is moved to the display area of the other reserved image 52. That is, in the shift performance, the movement mode when the reserved image 52 is moved to the display area of the variable image 51 may be different from the movement mode when one reserved image 52 is moved to the display area of the other reserved image 52.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 moves the reserved image 52 in a shift performance in an opaque display mode (see FIG. 46 (3)), but the reserved image 52 may also be moved in a semi-transparent display mode in a shift performance.

Also, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 hides the decorative pattern 41 when displaying the transition image 64 (see FIG. 54 (2)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, when the transition image 64 is displayed, the performance control unit 300 may display the decorative pattern 41 in a less decorative manner and with a smaller display size.

Also, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 makes the action in the action performance of the variable image 51 the same as the action in the action performance of the pending image 52, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may make the action in the action performance of the changing image 51 different from the action in the action performance of the suspended image 52 .

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 changes and displays the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 by vertical scrolling (see Figure 46 (5)), but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may, for example, change the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 by horizontal scrolling (scrolling in the left and right direction). The performance control unit 300 may also change the display by updating the numbers displayed as the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 without scrolling the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56. The switching display of the small pattern 56 includes a change display that scrolls the small pattern 56 and a display that updates the numbers displayed as the small pattern 56 without scrolling the small pattern 56.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 in different shapes depending on the game state and stage.
Here, the performance control unit 300 may display the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52, which have a display mode different from the normal display mode, in a common mode regardless of the game status or stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 sets the start timing of the hold change performance to the timing when the hold image 52 is located at the initial position (see FIG. 48 (16)), but this is not limited to this. The performance control unit 300 may set the start timing of the hold change performance to the timing when the hold image 52 is in a specific motion state in the motion performance, and it does not have to be the timing when the hold image 52 is located at the initial position. Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may start the hold change performance regardless of which motion state the hold image 52 is in the motion performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 executes a hold change performance to display a changing image 51 or a hold image 52, which is a display mode different from the normal display mode, but is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may newly display the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52, which is a display mode different from the normal display mode, in response to the addition of the reserved number. In other words, the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52, which is a display mode different from the normal display mode, may be displayed without performing the reserved change performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 300 newly displays a pending image 52, the newly displayed pending image 52 is gradually changed from a display mode with a high transparency to a display mode with a low transparency (see Figure 49 (19)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, when the reserved number is 0 and the reserved number is increased while a special symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance control unit 300 may display the reserved image 52 in an opaque display mode rather than displaying it with a gradual change in transparency. Also, when the reserved number is 0 and the reserved number is increased while a special symbol is stopped and displayed, the mode of movement of the reserved image 52 in the shift performance may be different from that when the reserved number is not 0 and the reserved number is increased. Also, when the reserved number is 0 and the reserved number is increased while a special symbol is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the reserved number display 55 may be changed to "1" and then to "0", or the display mode of the reserved number display 55 may remain at "0".

In addition, in this embodiment, when the pending number is added, the performance control unit 300 updates the display content of the pending number display 55 and displays a new pending image 52 (see Figure 49 (19)), but this is not limited to this.
For example, when the number of reserved balls is incremented, the performance control unit 300 may first update the display content of the reserved ball number display 55, and then start displaying a new reserved image 52.

Also, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 changes the display mode of the pending image 52 in the increasing display performance by changing the transparency of the pending image 52 (see Figure 49 (19)), but is not limited to this.
For example, in an increasing display performance, the performance control unit 300 may change the display mode of the pending image 52 by gradually changing the shape of the pending image 52.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 performs cycle display and stop display of the patterns using the sub-first change display unit 81 and the sub-second change display unit 82, but is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control unit 300 may perform cyclic display and stationary display of symbols on the image display unit 114. In this case, the symbols that are cyclically displayed and stationary displayed on the image display unit 114 are regarded as special symbols.

Second Embodiment
(Example of special symbol display)
Using Figure 73, we will explain display examples of the special pattern display devices (first special pattern display device 221, second special pattern display device 222).

As shown in FIG. 73(a), the special symbol display shows a losing special symbol with the rightmost LED lit as the initial display mode after power is turned on.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbols starts, the display mode changes to one in which the two LEDs from the left end are lit as shown in Figure 73 (b), and thereafter (32 ms later), the display mode changes to one in which the lit position of the LEDs changes every 32 ms as shown in Figures 73 (c) to (h). Specifically, the corresponding LED is controlled to light up every 4 ms, which is the cycle of the timer interrupt, and this continues for eight timer interrupts, so that the same LED remains lit for 32 ms.

Then, a cycle of change in the display mode of Fig. 73(b)-(h) is carried out multiple times (=256 ms), and when the time for changing the special symbol has elapsed, one of the special symbols of Fig. 73(i)-(l) (miss special symbol, first jackpot special symbol, second jackpot special symbol, third jackpot special symbol) is displayed stationary for the stop time (0.5 seconds).

Furthermore, when the display of the next special symbol starts changing after the pause time has elapsed, the display state of FIG. 73(b) undergoes multiple cycle changes, and one of the special symbols of FIG. 73(i) to (l) is displayed statically for the pause time (0.5 seconds = 500 ms).

In the cycle variation, two LEDs are turned on and their lighting positions are changed (moved), but it is also possible to turn on one LED and change its lighting position, or to turn on three or more LEDs and change their lighting positions.

In addition, in the case of cyclic fluctuation, eight types of display modes are considered to be one cycle, but two types of display modes (for example, all lights on and all lights off) may be considered to be one cycle, or three or more types of display modes may be considered to be one cycle. Even in this case, it is preferable that the time of one cycle is shorter than the stop time of the special pattern (0.5 seconds = 500 ms).

In addition, in this embodiment, a small win game that keeps the variable winning section open for 1.8 seconds is not executed, but when executing a small win game, it is preferable to stop the display of the small win special symbol after performing multiple cycle fluctuations. In this case, the stop time of the small win special symbol may be shorter than 0.5 seconds (500 ms) or the display time of one display mode in the cycle fluctuation (32 ms).

(Examples of each production mode)
Using Figure 74, we will explain display examples for each presentation mode.

In presentation mode A (normal gameplay state), as shown in FIG. 74(a), the mode A background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation action) while being displayed on the image display unit 114, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first form (rectangular base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by a circular image), and the small pattern 56 is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes.

The decorative pattern 41 in the first mode scrolls downwards (updates and changes) during the change presentation, but as a pre-change action that indicates the start of this scrolling display, the pattern floats upward from the stop position for 0.75 seconds. This pre-change action of the decorative pattern 41 can also be considered as a start-up action that is performed when the scrolling display starts.

In addition, in the icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the first state (hexagon). The normal icon in the first state is configured to constantly repeat a swinging motion (performance motion) with one cycle of 2 seconds while being displayed on the image display unit 114, from a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, through a second position tilted to the right, and then back to the first position.

In presentation mode B (normal gameplay state), as shown in FIG. 74(b), the mode B background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation action) while being displayed on the image display unit 114, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second form (lantern-shaped base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by a circle image), and the small pattern 56 is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes.

The decorative pattern 41 in the second mode scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the change performance, but the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size for 0.5 seconds as a pre-change operation before the start of this scrolling (update operation).

In addition, in the icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the second state (shuttle shape). The normal icon in the second state is configured to constantly repeat a swinging motion (performance motion) with one cycle of 2 seconds while being displayed on the image display unit 114, going from a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, through a second position tilted to the right, and then back to the first position.

In presentation mode C (normal game play state), as shown in FIG. 74(c), the mode C background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation action) while being displayed on the image display unit 114, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third form (a rectangular base image BG with rounded edges, a character image CG, and a number image SG surrounded by a circular image of a pattern background), and the small pattern 56 is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes.

The decorative pattern 41 in the third mode scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the change presentation, but the decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed for 0.5 seconds as a pre-change action before the scrolling (update and change) starts.

In addition, in the icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the third state (star shape). The normal icon in the third state rotates from a first position (initial position) in which the specific apex is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the specific apex has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of 3 seconds while displayed on the image display unit 114.

In presentation mode D (high probability game state), as shown in FIG. 74(c), the mode D background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation operation) while being displayed on the image display unit 114, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image BG, number image SG), and the small pattern 56 is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes.

The decorative pattern 41 in the fourth mode scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the change performance, but as a pre-change action that indicates the start of this scrolling display, the pattern appears to float upward from the stopping position for 0.4 seconds.

In addition, in the icon display area (second pending icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth state (round). The normal icon in the fourth state rotates from a first position (initial position) in which the internal black dot is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the black dot has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of 3 seconds while displayed on the image display unit 114.

In presentation mode E (high probability game state), as shown in FIG. 74(e), the mode E background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation operation) while being displayed on the image display unit 114, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image BG, number image SG), and the small pattern 56 is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes.

The decorative pattern 41 in the fourth mode scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the change performance, but as a pre-change action that indicates the start of this scrolling display, the pattern appears to float upward from the stopping position for 0.4 seconds.

In addition, in the icon display area (second pending icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth state (round). The normal icon in the fourth state rotates from a first position (initial position) in which the internal black dot is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the black dot has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of 3 seconds while displayed on the image display unit 114.

In presentation mode F (time-saving play state), as shown in FIG. 74(f), the mode F background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation action) while being displayed on the image display unit 114, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image BG, number image SG), and the small pattern 56 is displayed in a common form (numeric image) common to all presentation modes.

The decorative pattern 41 in the fourth mode scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the change presentation, but the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size for 0.4 seconds as a pre-change action that indicates the start of this scrolling display.

In addition, in the icon display area (second pending icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fifth form (pentagon). The normal icon in the fifth form rotates from a first position (initial position) in which a specific apex is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the specific apex has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of 3 seconds while displayed on the image display unit 114.

Note that an action different from each of the pre-change actions described above may be performed. For example, the decorative pattern 41 may be rotated as a pre-change action that indicates that the scrolling display will start.

In addition, in performance modes A to F, when a special icon is displayed in the icon display area (second reserved icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the special icon is displayed in a common form (round) common to all performance modes. The special icon in the common form rotates from a first position (initial position) in which a specific part is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the specific part has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at one cycle of 2.5 seconds while displayed on the image display unit 114.

In addition, in performance modes A to F, the small symbols 56 displayed in a common manner (number images) are scrolled downwards (update and change) without performing pre-change operations during the change performance, and the update operation of repeatedly updating the number images 1 to 9 is repeated in a cycle of 0.9 seconds. Note that the update and change of the small symbols 56 suggests that a change performance is being performed.

In this way, the effect of the reserved icon changing between the first and second positions during its performance (swinging and rotating) is repeatedly executed at a period (2 or 3 seconds) that is different from the period (32 ms) during which the lighting state of the LED in the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) changes and the period of one cycle (256 ms). This makes it possible to appeal to the player that the reserved icon is performing a performance, thereby improving the performance effect.

In addition, the effect of the pending icon changing between the first and second positions during its performance (swinging and rotating) is repeatedly performed at a cycle (2 or 3 seconds) different from the blinking cycle (1 second) of the LED on the sub-first change display 81 (sub-second change display 82). This makes it possible to appeal to the player that the pending icon is performing a performance, thereby improving the performance effect.

In addition, in the change performance, the decorative pattern 41 executes one of several types of pre-change actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display). This improves the effect of the change performance, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, depending on which of the multiple types of pre-change actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) the decorative pattern 41 performs during the change performance, the time until the decorative pattern 41 scrolls (updated change) may differ. This can improve the effect of the change performance and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, even if the decorative pattern 41 executes any of the multiple types of pre-change actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) during the change performance, the start order of the pre-change actions and scrolling display (update change) of the three decorative patterns 41 may be the same (left → center → right).

In addition, depending on which of the multiple types of pre-change actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) the decorative pattern 41 performs in the change performance, the start order of the pre-change actions and scroll display (update change) of the three decorative patterns 41 may be varied (floating display: left → center → right, enlarged display: center → left → right, reduced display: right → center → left, etc.).

In addition, multiple types of pre-change behavior of the decorative pattern 41 may be provided for each presentation mode so that the likelihood of winning is different. Even in this case, the pending icon behavior may be limited to one type for each presentation mode, so that there is no likelihood of winning.

(Example of displaying the number of reserved calls)
Using Figure 75, an example of the display of the number of pending orders on the image display unit 114 will be described.

First, when the number of reserved calls is "0" and the system is waiting for customers, as shown in FIG. 75(a), no icon is displayed in the first reserved call icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C, and "0" is displayed in the reserved call number display 55 of the first start gate 121 and the reserved call number display 55 of the second start gate 122.

After that, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 and the first reserved number becomes "1", as shown in FIG. 75(b), the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) in one frame of non-animation in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the reserved number display 55 of the first starting hole 121 is updated (increased display) to "1" in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the reserved icon HI is displayed in a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, and the performance action (swinging action) starts from there.

Then, when the first reserved number decreases to "0" and the display of the first special symbol begins to change, as shown in FIG. 75(c), a 20-frame animation is started in which the reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts (decreases, changes) toward the icon display area 70C, and the reserved number display 55 in the first starting port 121 is updated to "0" (decreases) in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the transparency of the reserved icon HI changes from opaque to semi-transparent, but the performance action (swaying action) continues.

After that, when the shifting display of the hold icon HI ends, as shown in FIG. 75(d), the hold icon HI is displayed as the icon TI in a larger size than the hold icon HI and in an opaque state, and the performance action (shaking action) continues.

In this state, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 and the first reserved number becomes "1", as shown in FIG. 75(e), a 20-frame animation is started in which the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the reserved number display 55 in the first start hole 121 is updated (increased display) to "1" in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the additionally displayed reserved icon HI starts a performance operation (swaying operation) so as to be synchronized with the other icons in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is enlarged from a translucent extremely small size to a normal size accompanied by an effect image. In other words, when the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, the reserved icon HI may not start displaying from the first position (initial position).

Then, when the additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is finished, as shown in FIG. 75(f), the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the normal display mode is displayed in normal size and opaque, and the performance action (shaking action) continues.

After that, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121, the first reserved number becomes "2", and it is decided that an icon change effect will be executed, as shown in FIG. 75(g), a 20-frame animation is started in which the reserved icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) is additionally displayed (increased display) in the second display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the reserved number display 55 in the first start hole 121 is updated (increased display) to "2" in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the additionally displayed reserved icon HI starts a performance operation (rotation operation) that is not synchronized with the icon in the normal display mode (the icon TI in this case) from the first position (initial position) in which the specific part is located at the top, and is enlarged and displayed from a semi-transparent extremely small size to a normal size accompanied by an effect image.

Then, when the additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) is completed, as shown in FIG. 75(h), the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) is displayed in normal size and opaque, and the performance action (rotation action) continues.

In this state, when the first special symbol stops changing and stops, a 20-frame animation starts in which the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, as shown in FIG. 75(i). At this time, the icon TI that is erased becomes gradually more transparent and is erased, accompanied by an effect image, but even during the erased display, a performance action (shaking action) is performed.

After that, when the first reserved number decreases to "1" and the display of the first special pattern begins to change, as shown in FIG. 75(j), a 20-frame animation is started in which the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift (decreasing) towards the icon display area 70C, and the reserved number display 55 in the first starting port 121 is updated to "1" (decreasing) in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the transparency of the two reserved icons HI changes from opaque to semi-transparent, but the performance action (swaying action, rotation action) continues.

Then, when the shifting display of the two hold icons HI ends, as shown in FIG. 75(k), the hold icon HI in the normal display mode that was displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed as the icon TI in a size larger than the hold icon HI and opaque, and the performance action (swaying action) continues. Also, the hold icon HI in the first special display mode that was displayed in the second display section of the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed in the first display section in the normal size and opaque, and changes to the second special display mode (a type of special icon) through the icon change performance, but the performance action (spinning action) continues.

In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 and the first reserved number becomes "2", as shown in FIG. 75(l), a 20-frame animation is started in which a reserved icon HI in normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) in the second display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the reserved number display 55 in the first starting hole 121 is updated (increased display) to "2" in one non-animated frame. At this time, the additionally displayed reserved icon HI starts a presentation operation (shaking operation) so as to be synchronized with the other icons in normal display mode (the icon TI in this case), and is enlarged from a semi-transparent tiny size to a normal size accompanied by an effect image.

After that, when the additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode ends, as shown in FIG. 75(m), the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the normal display mode is displayed in normal size and opaque, and the performance action (shaking action) continues.

In this state, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and stops, as shown in FIG. 75(n), a 20-frame animation starts in which the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. At this time, the icon TI that is erased becomes gradually more transparent and is erased together with the effect image, but even during the erased display, a performance action (shaking action) is performed.

After that, when the first reserved number decreases to "1" and the display of the first special symbol begins to change, as shown in FIG. 75(o), a 20-frame animation is started in which the two reserved icons HI that were being displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B during the performance operation are shifted (decreased) toward the icon display area 70C, and the reserved number display 55 in the first starting port 121 is updated to "1" (decreased) in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the transparency of the two reserved icons HI changes from opaque to semi-transparent, but the performance operation (swinging operation, rotation operation) continues.

At this time, if the conditions for switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B are met, as shown in FIG. 75(p), an obscuring image (blackout image, whiteout image, etc.) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display unit 114, and visibility of the icons in the first hold icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C is restricted while the hold number display 55 in the first start port 121 and the hold number display 55 in the second start port 122 remain visible.

Then, in the rear layer of the occlusion image, as shown in FIG. 75(q), the display mode and presentation action (rotation action) of the icon TI are maintained, and the hold icon HI is switched to a hold icon HI in a normal display mode corresponding to presentation mode B. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, and the presentation action (swinging action) starts from there.

Then, when the occlusion image is erased, as shown in FIG. 75(r), it becomes possible to see the hold icon HI in the normal display mode displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B and the icon TI in the second special display mode displayed in the icon display area 70C.

When multiple hold icons are displayed in the normal display mode, the device performs a presentation operation to synchronize multiple hold icons in the normal display mode, just as it performs a presentation operation to synchronize the hold icon in the normal display mode and the icon in the normal display mode.

In addition, while the above explanation mainly focuses on examples of hold display in presentation mode A, the display format of the hold icon and the operational presentation format differ in other presentation modes, but the number of holds is basically displayed in a similar manner (including when switching presentation modes).

The first feature of the presentation examples in Figures 74 and 75 is that when the number of reserved balls increases (changing from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the non-animated increase display of the reserved ball number display 55 and the reserved ball icon is displayed in the shortest possible time period of one frame. By doing this, the change display (the decrease display of the reserved ball number display 55 and the decrease display of the reserved ball icon) can be performed immediately without dragging on, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A second feature of the presentation examples in Figures 74 and 75 is that when the reserved number decreases (changing from "1" to "0"), the reserved number display 55 is displayed as a non-animated (1 frame) decrease, and an animation (20 frames) change display (decrease display) of the reserved icon is executed (starting at the same frame update timing). By doing this, the player can be sure that the reserved number has decreased, making the game more interesting. Note that the timing (frame update timing) when the reserved number display 55 starts to display a decrease may be earlier (for example, one frame earlier) than the timing (frame update timing) when the change display of the reserved icon starts (shift display of the reserved icon to the reserved icon).

A third feature of the examples of effects in Figures 74 to 75 is that the timing (frame update timing) when the pending number display 55 completes its decrease is earlier than the timing (frame update timing) when the pending icon changes to the icon in question (the pending icon shifts to the icon in question). By doing this, it is easier for the player to understand that the pending number has decreased through the pending number display 55 while still presenting the pending number as changing, which increases the player's interest in the game. Note that the timing (frame update timing) when the pending number display 55 completes its decrease may be earlier (for example, one frame earlier) than the timing (frame update timing) when the pending icon changes to the icon in question (the pending icon shifts to the icon in question).

A fourth feature of the presentation examples in Figures 74 to 75 is that, if the reserved number increases while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the reserved number display 55 is displayed as a non-animated (1 frame) increase, and the reserved icon is displayed as an animated (20 frames) increase (starting at the same frame update timing). By doing this, the player can be sure that the reserved number has increased, making the game more interesting. Note that the timing at which the reserved number display 55 starts (frame update timing) and ends (frame update timing) the increase in the reserved icon may be earlier (for example, one frame earlier) than the timing at which the increase in the reserved icon starts (frame update timing).

A fifth feature of the examples of presentation in Figures 74 to 75 is that the timing (frame update timing) at which the display of the increase in the reserved number display 55 is completed is earlier than the timing (frame update timing) at which the additional display (increasing display) of the reserved icon is completed. By doing this, it is possible to present the appearance of a change in the reserved number while making it easier for the player to understand that the reserved number has increased through the reserved number display 55, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the presentation examples in Figures 74 and 75 is that when the reserved number increases during the variable display of special symbols (variable presentation), the reserved icon is additionally displayed (increased display) for a longer period (longer number of frames) compared to when the reserved number increases while waiting for customers. By doing this, it is possible to ensure that the player is aware that the reserved number has increased, making the game more enjoyable.

A seventh feature of the presentation examples in Figures 74 and 75 is that the presentation operation mode (operation while expanding) when the display of the increasing number of reserved icons begins (display start) is different (partly different) from the presentation operation mode (operation while maintaining size) after the display of the increasing number of reserved icons is completed (display start). By doing this, the player can understand that the number of reserved icons has increased, making the game more interesting. Note that instead of only some of the operations being different at the start of the display of the increasing number of reserved icons and after the display of the increasing number is completed, all of the operations may be different.

The eighth feature of the presentation examples in Figures 74 and 75 is that the display mode (semi-transparent) at the start of the display of the increase in reserved icons is different (partially different) from the display mode (opaque) after the display of the increase in reserved icons is completed. By doing this, the player can understand that the number of reserved icons has increased, making the game more interesting. Note that instead of just changing the transparency between the start of the display of the increase in reserved icons and the end of the display, the shape, etc. may also be different.

A ninth feature of the presentation examples of Figures 74 to 75 is that, during the variable display of the special pattern (decorative pattern), it is possible to execute a presentation action (swinging action, rotation action, etc.) in which the reserved icon and the icon repeatedly change between a first position and a second position. In this way, the presentation effect can be improved by the reserved icon and the icon, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A tenth feature of the presentation examples of Figures 74 to 75 is that in the presentation action (swinging action, rotation action) in which the reserved icon and the icon repeatedly change between the first and second positions, the time it takes to change from the first position to the second position is constant every time. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the reserved icon and the icon becoming difficult to see, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. Note that if the control load of the drawing process is large when the reserved icon and the icon change from the first position to the second position, causing a processing slowdown (one frame's worth of drawing cannot be completed), the time it takes to change from the first position to the second position will not be constant only at that time, but will be approximately constant.

An eleventh feature of the presentation examples of Figures 74 to 75 is that, during the variable display (variable presentation) of the special pattern, multiple icons (reserved icons, and the reserved icon and the icon in question) displayed in the normal display mode perform presentation actions in synchronization. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the presentation actions of the icons and enhance the presentation effect, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game. Note that the timing at which the presentation action of the reserved icon displayed in the normal display mode based on a new start winning is synchronized with the presentation action of the other reserved icons may be at the start of display, a predetermined time after the start of display, at the start of shift display, or at the completion of shift display.

A twelfth feature of the presentation examples in Figures 74 and 75 is that when a special symbol (decorative symbol) is displayed and stopped, the icon is erased, but the reserved icon continues to perform a presentation action repeatedly from the time the special symbol (decorative symbol) is displayed and stopped until the next variable display (variable presentation) begins. By doing this, the reserved icon lets the player know that the number of reserved symbols is not "0", which makes the game more interesting.

A thirteenth feature of the presentation examples in Figures 74 and 75 is that when a special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed, the transparency of the decorative symbol does not change, but the transparency of the icon increases before it is erased. This reduces the sense of discomfort felt when erasing the icon, allowing the icon to be erased naturally, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A fourteenth feature of the presentation examples of Figures 74 and 75 is that the time (scale) of one cycle of the presentation action of the reserved icon (the icon in question) is the same in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (between presentation mode A and presentation mode B, and between presentation modes C to F). This makes it possible to make the presentation action of the reserved icon (the icon in question) easier to see, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

A fifteenth feature of the presentation examples of Figures 74 to 75 is that the cycle in which the reserved icon (the icon) goes from the first position to the second position and then back to the first position is the same in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (between presentation mode A and presentation mode B, and between presentation modes C to F). This makes it easier to see the presentation of the reserved icon (the icon), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A 16th feature of the presentation examples in Figures 74 and 75 is that in the hold number display area, the size (area) of the area in which the hold number is displayed does not change depending on whether the hold number increases or decreases, but in the hold icon display area, the size (area) of the area in which the hold icons are displayed changes depending on whether the hold number increases or decreases (if there is a single hold, the hold icon is displayed in a first area, and if there are multiple hold icons, the hold icons are displayed in a second area larger than the first area). This allows the player to recognize the hold number while also understanding whether the hold number is increasing or decreasing, making the game more interesting.

A 17th feature of the presentation examples in Figures 74 and 75 is that the reserved icon displayed in the normal display mode (normal icon) can repeatedly execute a presentation action of changing between the first and second positions in a first cycle (2 or 3 seconds), and the reserved icon displayed in the special display mode (special icon), which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal display mode, can repeatedly execute a presentation action of changing between the first and second positions in a second cycle (2.5 seconds) different from the first cycle. This makes it easier to distinguish between reserved icons in the normal display mode and reserved icons in the special display mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 18th feature of the presentation examples in Figures 74 and 75 is that the small symbols can update (scroll, switch) the number images from 1 to 9 in a first cycle (0.9 seconds), and the reserved icon can change between the first and second positions in a second cycle (2 or 3 seconds) that is different from the first cycle. This prevents the player from mistaking the update of the small symbols for the presentation of the reserved icon, making the game more interesting.

A 19th feature of the presentation examples in Figures 74 and 75 is that the reserved number is displayed decreasing as the display of the special pattern begins, and while the reserved number display 55 displayed in the reserved number display area does not move during this decrease, the reserved icons displayed in the reserved icon display area do move (before the reserved number is decreased, the reserved icons are displayed in a second area larger than the first area, and after the reserved number is decreased, the reserved icons are displayed in the first area). This allows the player to recognize the reserved number while also understanding the decrease in the reserved number, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

A twentieth feature of the presentation examples of Figures 74 and 75 is that the direction of movement (downward) in the updating action of the decorative pattern (small pattern) is different from the direction of movement (left and right, etc.) in the presentation action (swaying action) of the reserved icon. By doing this, it becomes easier to distinguish and recognize the updating and changing of the decorative pattern (small pattern) from the presentation action (swaying action) of the reserved icon, which enhances the presentation effect of the changing presentation and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

When the number of reserved balls increases (changing from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, the reserved ball icon is displayed as an increment with one frame of non-animation, but it may be displayed as an increment with multiple frames of animation (e.g., five frames) so that the increment continues longer than the increment in the reserved ball display 55. This makes it easier for players to grasp the increment in the reserved balls, making the game more enjoyable.

The reserved icon is also designed to perform a presentation action while the special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped, but the reserved icon may stop its presentation action while the special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped, and resume its presentation action after the reserved icon shifts as the next special symbol begins to change (the number of reserved symbols decreases). In this way, the player can know whether or not a special symbol is being changed based on whether or not the reserved icon is performing a presentation action, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when resuming the presentation action of the reserved icon after the reserved icon has been shifted, the reserved icon may be made to resume the presentation action from its initial position at the position after the shift (reserved icon display area, the icon display area). In this way, it is possible to impress upon the player that a new variable display of the special pattern has begun, and to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even when the special symbol (decorative symbol) is frozen and the icon is erased, the icon continues to perform the presentation action, but the presentation action may be terminated by the frozen display of the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this way, it is possible to reduce the load related to display control.

In addition, multiple icons displayed in normal display mode (pending icons, and pending icons and the icon in question) are configured to perform their performance in sync, but rather than performing their performance in perfect sync, they may be configured to perform their performance in approximately sync. Note that the timing at which the performance of a pending icon displayed in normal display mode based on a new start winning approximately syncs with the performance of other pending icons may be when the display starts, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display starts, when the shift display starts, or when the shift display ends.

(Example of when a variable performance starts from a waiting state)
Using Figures 76 to 78, we will explain a specific example when the variable performance starts from the waiting for customers state.

Figure 76 is a timing chart when the variable presentation starts from the waiting state, and Figures 77 to 78 are diagrams showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 76. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations are omitted.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 76, the machine is in a customer waiting state in which the special symbol change display has not been performed since the power was turned on, and the performance mode A and volume value "3" are set. At this time, the first special symbol display 221 displays the initial symbol when the power is turned on, which is a losing special symbol (only the rightmost LED is lit), and the image display unit 114 displays a change standby screen waiting for the execution of the change performance. Specifically, the mode A background image is scrolling horizontally (performance operation), and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 are in a state in which "135", the initial symbol when the power is turned on, is displayed frozen (see FIG. 77(a)). Note that the mode A background image has been scrolling horizontally since the timing when the change standby screen is first displayed after the power is turned on.

Next, at the timing T1 in FIG. 76, when the up or down button of the effect key 162 is operated to adjust the volume, a volume value image OG indicating the current volume value "3" is displayed on the image display unit 114 with a portion of it overlapping the front side of the right decorative pattern 41, and a confirmation sound for the volume corresponding to the volume value "3" is output from the speaker 156 (see FIG. 77(b)).

When the up button of the effect key 162 is operated to increase the volume at the timing of T2 in FIG. 76, the volume value changes from "3" to "4." At this time, the image display unit 114 is updated to a volume value image OG indicating the volume value "4," and a confirmation sound (for 0.5 seconds) corresponding to the volume value "4" is output from the speaker 156 (see FIG. 77(c)).

After that, at the timing T3 in FIG. 76, when the changeover switch (not shown) is operated to lower the volume, the volume value changes from "4" to "3." At this time, the image display unit 114 is updated to a volume value image OG indicating a volume value of "3." However, because of the volume adjustment made by the changeover switch (not shown), the speaker 156 does not output a confirmation sound corresponding to the volume value of "3" (see FIG. 77(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 76, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first reserved number becomes "1", the first special symbol reserved indicator 218 displays "1", and a winning command (first special symbol storage command, first look-ahead command) is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 (see FIG. 77(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 76, when the first reserved number changes from "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is made, the game control unit 200 sends start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218 displays "0" and the first special symbol display 221 starts displaying the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) (see FIG. 77(f)).

Furthermore, since a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the winning command, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 and the sub-first hold display 83 display "1", the hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed in a non-animated manner in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the output of the first winning sound begins (see Figure 77 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in Figure 76 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the start command, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub-first hold display 83 will display "0", and the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 will begin (see Figure 78 (g)).

The hold icon HI displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B starts to shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. The hold icon HI also starts a performance operation. Furthermore, the decorative pattern 41 starts a floating display as a pre-change operation, and the small pattern 56 starts an update change (scrolling display, switching display). Furthermore, volume adjustment and light adjustment using the performance key 162 are restricted for a predetermined period (1 second), the volume value image OG is erased, and audible output of the changing BGM starts from the speaker 156 (see FIG. 78(g)).

In addition to starting the audible output of the fluctuation BGM when the decorative pattern 41 starts to float as a pre-fluctuation action, a fluctuation start sound (a start sound output for each fluctuation, a start sound as a jackpot notice, etc.) may be output.

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 76 (at the start of the third cycle fluctuation), the output of the winning sound ends (see FIG. 78(h)), and at the timing of T8 in FIG. 76 (during the fourth cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the reserved icon HI ends and the icon TI (white icon) is displayed, and then the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the decorative pattern 41 begins (see FIG. 78(i)). Note that the performance operation of the icon TI may be performed during the floating display as the pre-fluctuation operation of the decorative pattern 41. Also, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 76, the high-speed fluctuation of all decorative patterns 41 begins (see FIG. 78(j)). When the fluctuation start sound is output, it is recommended that the output of the fluctuation start sound ends at this timing (after the output of the winning sound ends).

If the performance control unit 300 fails to receive the start command normally while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the variable display of the special pattern is executed, but since the variable performance is not executed, the volume value image OG continues to be displayed without being erased, and the state in which volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the performance key 162 is maintained. Also, if the performance control unit 300 fails to receive the start command normally while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the display period of the volume value image OG may be extended.

In addition, when a light quantity value image is displayed by operating the left or right button of the performance key 162 instead of the volume value image OG, the process is basically the same as when the volume value image OG is displayed.

In this way, when a variable performance starts during a customer waiting state (a period during which volume and light intensity adjustments can be made using the performance keys 162), volume and light intensity adjustments using the performance keys 162 are restricted for a specified period (1 second). This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of players missing the important aspect of the start of the variable performance because they are concentrating on adjusting the volume or light intensity, and makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, if the variable presentation starts while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted (erased) even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds after the last adjustment operation) has not elapsed. Therefore, the variable presentation is not hindered by the volume value image OG, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the volume value is adjusted by operating a changeover switch (not shown) while the volume value image OG is not displayed, the volume value image OG is not displayed. However, if the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value image OG corresponding to the newly set volume value is displayed regardless of whether the volume is adjusted by operating the effect key 162 or the changeover switch (not shown). This allows the player to understand the newly set volume value, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, during the pre-change action (such as the pattern floating up or rotating) of the decorative pattern 41, a change effect is being performed using the performance pattern (such as the small pattern 56 and the sub first change display 81). This allows the player to understand that the special pattern change display has started due to the performance pattern, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The variable performance by the decorative pattern 41 includes pre-variation actions (such as floating or rotating the pattern) that operate the decorative pattern 41 in a predetermined display mode, and a scroll display, while the variable performance by the performance pattern (such as the small pattern 56 or the sub first variable display 81) is configured to execute the variable display of the performance pattern without operating the performance pattern in a predetermined display mode. Therefore, the pre-variation action of the decorative pattern 41 can enhance the performance effect of the variable performance, and the performance pattern can be made to understand that the variable display of the special pattern has begun, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-changing action of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the pattern floating up or rotating), the pending information (such as the pending number display 55, pending icon HI, and the LED pending display on the sub-first pending display 83 and the sub-second pending display 84) is (already) displayed as being reduced. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, during the pre-change operation (such as the floating or rotation of the pattern) of the decorative pattern 41, the movement display of the hold icon HI is started. This movement display of the hold icon HI may be a movement display from the first hold icon display area 70B to the first hold icon display area 70B. Also, it may be a movement display from the first hold icon display area 70B to the icon display area 70C. In other words, it may be possible to move the hold icon HI and display it as the icon TI.
In these cases, the player can quickly detect that reserved memory has decreased, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, during the pre-change action of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the pattern floating up or rotating), the movement display of the reserved icon HI is terminated. This makes it easier for the player to understand the flow of the game, in which the change performance is performed as the reserved memory is reduced, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to display the icon TI during the pre-changing action of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the pattern floating up or rotating). Therefore, by displaying the icon TI, it becomes easier for the player to understand the flow of the game in which the changing performance is taking place, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during the pre-change action of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the pattern floating up or rotating), it is possible to perform a presentation action of the reserved icon HI. This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect while appealing to the player that there is a reserved memory, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during the pre-change action of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the pattern floating up or rotating), it is possible to cause the icon TI to perform a special effect. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the icon TI and appeal to them that the change effect is about to begin, thereby making the game more interesting.

In addition, even before the start of pre-change actions (such as the floating or rotation of the decorative pattern 41), it is possible to execute an effect in which at least a part of the background image (the background image corresponding to each display mode, the zone background image described below) is moved (horizontal scrolling, scene change, character movement included in the background image, etc.). This makes it possible to enhance the effect of the change effect together with the decorative pattern 41, and to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during the pre-changing action of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the pattern floating up or rotating), it is possible to execute an effect in which at least a part of the background image (the background image corresponding to each presentation mode, the zone background image described below) is made to move (horizontal scrolling, scene change, character movement included in the background image, etc.). This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect of the changing effect together with the decorative pattern 41, and to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the pre-changing action of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the pattern floating up or rotating) is performed, background music (such as background music corresponding to each presentation mode) can be output. This allows the player to recognize that the changing presentation has started, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during the pre-change action of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the pattern floating up or rotating), background music (such as background music corresponding to each presentation mode) starts to be output. Therefore, the presentation effect of the change presentation can be improved even before the pre-change action of the decorative pattern 41 starts, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the scrolling display (update change) of the decorative pattern 41 in the change presentation starts at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle change when the special pattern change display is performed on the first special pattern display device 221 (second special pattern display device 222) (after the start timing of the first cycle change and after the end timing of the first cycle change), that is, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This makes it possible to add depth to the game presentation and increase the interest in the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start timing of the change display of the special pattern and the start timing of the scrolling display of the decorative pattern 41, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 221 (second special pattern display 222) displays the special pattern in a varying manner, the scrolling display (update variation) of the decorative pattern 41 in the varying performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cyclic variation (after the start timing of the second or third cyclic variation, and after the start timing of the fourth cyclic variation). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cyclic variation with the start timing of the scrolling display of the decorative pattern 41, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the varying display of the special pattern for the start of the scrolling display of the decorative pattern 41.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) displays a changing special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 starts to scroll (update) after the first cycle of change ends. Therefore, by starting the changing display of the special symbol and the scrolling display of the decorative symbol 41 in stages, the presentation effect of the game can be improved, making it possible to increase interest in the game. In addition, the player can be informed that the special symbol is the main symbol and the decorative symbol 41 is the secondary symbol, making it possible for the player to recognize the specifications of the game machine.

In addition, the update and change (scrolling display, switching display) of the small patterns 56 is started at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle change when the first special pattern display device 221 (second special pattern display device 222) displays the changing special patterns (after the start timing of the first cycle change and before the end timing of the first cycle change), that is, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start timing of the display of the changing special patterns and the start timing of the update and change (scrolling display, switching display) of the small patterns 56, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 221 (second special pattern display 222) displays the special pattern changes, the update change (scroll display, switch display) of the small pattern 56 starts at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cyclic change (before the end timing of the first cyclic change and before the start timing of the second cyclic change). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cyclic change with the start timing of the update change (scroll display, switch display) of the small pattern 56, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern change display for the start of the update change (scroll display, switch display) of the small pattern 56.

In addition, after the first display change in the cycle change when the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222), the update change (scroll display, switch display) of the small symbol 56 is started, that is, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to strictly match the timing of the first display change in the cycle change with the start timing of the update change (scroll display, switch display) of the small symbol 56, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden. Also, it is possible to inform the player that the special symbol is the main symbol and the small symbol 56 is the subordinate symbol, and it is possible for the player to recognize the specifications of the game machine.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) displays the special symbol changes, the pending display (the pending icon and pending number display 55 on the image display unit 114, and the LED pending display on the first sub-hold display 83 and the second sub-hold display 84) starts updating at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle change (after the start timing of the first cycle change and before the end timing of the first cycle change), that is, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. In addition, there is no need for complex processing to strictly match the start timing of the special symbol change display and the start timing of the pending display update, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 221 (second special pattern display 222) displays the special pattern changes, the pending display (the pending icon and pending number display 55 on the image display unit 114, and the LED pending display on the sub-first pending display 83 and sub-second pending display 84) starts updating at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes (before the end timing of the first cycle change and before the start timing of the second cycle change). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes with the start timing of the pending display update, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern change display for the start timing of the pending display update.

In addition, after the first display change in the cycle change when the special pattern is displayed on the first special pattern display 221 (second special pattern display 222), the pending display (the pending icon and pending number display 55 on the image display unit 114, and the LED pending display on the first sub-pending display 83 and the second sub-pending display 84) starts to be updated, that is, the two are intentionally not synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. In addition, there is no need for complex processing to strictly match the timing of the start of the display of the variable special pattern and the timing of the update start of the pending display, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden. In addition, the player can be impressed with the flow that the pending display was updated because the display of the variable special pattern started, making it possible for the player to understand the flow of the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) displays the special symbol in a variable manner, the shift display of the reserved icon HI starts at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation (after the start timing of the first cycle variation and before the end timing of the first cycle variation), in other words, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows for depth to be added to the game presentation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start timing of the display of the variable special symbol and the start timing of the display of the reserved icon HI in a variable manner, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 221 (second special pattern display 222) displays the special pattern changes, the shift display of the reserved icon HI starts at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes (before the start timing of the second cycle change and before the end timing of the second cycle change). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes with the start timing of the shift display of the reserved icon HI, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern change display for the start of the shift display of the reserved icon HI.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) displays a changing special symbol, the shift display (decrease display) of the reserved icon HI ends after the first cycle of change ends. This allows the game presentation to have depth, making it possible to increase interest in the game. Also, the player can be impressed with the flow of events in which the reserved icon HI shifts because the display of the changing special symbol has started, making it possible for the player to understand the flow of the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) displays the special symbol in a variable manner, the reserved icon HI starts to shift to the corresponding icon TI at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation (after the start timing of the first cycle variation and before the end timing of the first cycle variation), that is, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start timing of the display of the variable special symbol and the start timing of the display of the reserved icon HI shift to the corresponding icon TI, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 221 (second special pattern display 222) displays the special pattern, the reserved icon HI starts to shift to the corresponding icon TI at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle fluctuation (before the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation and before the end timing of the second cycle fluctuation). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle fluctuation and the start timing of the reserved icon HI shifting to the corresponding icon TI, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern display for the start of the reserved icon HI shifting to the corresponding icon TI.

In addition, after the first display change in the cycle of the special pattern change displayed on the first special pattern display device 221 (second special pattern display device 222) is completed, the pending icon HI shifts to the corresponding icon TI. This adds depth to the game presentation, making it possible to increase interest in the game. In addition, the player is impressed with the flow of events in which the pending icon HI shifts to the corresponding icon TI as the display of the special pattern change is started, making it possible for the player to understand the flow of the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) displays the special symbol variations, the audible output of the specified game sounds (variable BGM, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) starts at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation (before the start timing of the first cycle variation, after the start timing of the first cycle variation), meaning that the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows for depth to be added to the game presentation, making it possible to increase the interest in the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start timing of the display variation of the special symbol and the start timing of the audible output of the specified game sounds, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) displays the special symbol variations, the audible output of the specified game sounds (variation background music, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) is started at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variations (before the start timing of the second cycle variations and before the end timing of the second cycle variations). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variations with the start timing of the audible output of the specified game sounds, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special symbol variation display for the start of the audible output of the specified game sounds.

In addition, the audible output of the performance BGM (variable BGM for each performance mode) starts at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation when the first special pattern display 221 (second special pattern display 222) displays the varying special patterns (before the start timing of the first cycle variation, after the start timing of the first cycle variation), meaning that the two start without intentionally being synchronized. This allows for depth to be added to the game presentation, making it possible to increase the interest in the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start timing of the varying special pattern display and the start timing of the audible output of the performance BGM, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 221 (second special pattern display 222) displays the special pattern variations, the audible output of the performance BGM (variable BGM for each performance mode) is started at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variations (before the start timing of the second cycle variation and before the end timing of the second cycle variation). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variations with the start timing of the audible output of the performance BGM, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern variation display for the start of the audible output of the performance BGM.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) displays the special symbols in a variable manner, the background image (background image for each display mode, zone background image) starts displaying (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) at a different timing from the start of the first cycle of variation (when the display of the variable waiting screen starts after the power is turned on, before the start of the first cycle of variation, at the end of the customer waiting demo performance), meaning that the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows the game performance to have depth and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start of the display of the variable special symbols and the start of the display of the background image, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) displays the special symbol changes, the background image (background image for each display mode, zone background image) performance operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) is started at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes (when the display of the change waiting screen starts after the power is turned on, before the start timing of the second cycle change, at the end of the customer waiting demo performance). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes with the start timing of the background image performance operation, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special symbol change display for the start of the background image performance operation.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) displays the changing special symbols, the background image (background image for each performance mode, zone background image) is displayed (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) before the first cycle of change begins (when the display of the change waiting screen begins after the power is turned on). This allows for depth to be added to the game presentation, making it possible to increase interest in the game. Also, for example, it is possible to prevent players from feeling bored in the waiting state before the changing display of the special symbols begins, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, depending on the type of pre-change action in the change presentation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display), the number of cycle changes executed by the first special pattern display 221 (second special pattern display 222) before the decorative pattern 41 starts scrolling (updated display) may differ. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation depending on the type of pre-change action, making the game more interesting.

In addition, depending on the type of pre-change action in the change presentation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display), the number of display changes in the cyclic change performed by the first special pattern display 221 (second special pattern display 222) before the decorative pattern 41 starts scrolling (updated display) may differ. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation depending on the type of pre-change action, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when a variable performance starts while the volume value image OG is being displayed, rather than hiding the volume value image OG, the volume value image OG may be changed from being displayed (set) in a higher layer than the decorative pattern 41 to being displayed (set) in a lower layer than the decorative pattern 41, so that the volume value image OG is displayed so as to overlap behind the decorative pattern 41, thereby limiting the visibility of the volume value image OG.

(Example of a winning start during a variable performance)
Using Figures 79 to 80, we will explain specific examples of when a starting win occurs during a variable performance.

Figure 79 is a timing chart for when a start win occurs during a variable presentation, and Figure 80 is a diagram showing presentation examples at various timings in Figure 79. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations will be omitted.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 79, the first reserved number is "0" and the first special pattern display 221 is displaying the change (Yth cycle change since the start of the change) and the sub-first change display 81 is displaying the change (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 218, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting hole 121, and the sub-first reserved display 83 are displaying "0". In addition, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are updating and changing (scrolling display, switching display) in front of the Mode A background image that is scrolling horizontally, and the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the change BGM is being audibly output (see FIG. 80(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 79, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first reserved number becomes "1", the first special symbol reserved indicator 218 displays "1", and a winning command (first special symbol storage command, first pre-reading command) is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 (see FIG. 80 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 79, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the winning command, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 and the sub-first hold display 83 display "1." In addition, the hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in animation in the normal display mode on the first display unit of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the first winning sound is output (see FIG. 80(c)).

After that, at timing T3 in Figure 79, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the additional display in the animation of the pending icon HI, the additional display in the animation of the pending icon HI ends and the output of the first winning sound also ends (see Figure 80 (d)).

In this way, if a game ball enters the start hole while the special symbol is being displayed, the additional display of the animation of the reserved icon HI is executed over multiple cycles of change. This allows the player to accurately understand that a game ball has entered the start hole, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this way, if the game ball enters the start hole while the special symbol is being displayed, the winning sound (first winning sound, second winning sound) is output over multiple cycles of the change. This allows the player to accurately understand that the game ball has entered the start hole, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when a game ball enters the starting hole during the variable display of a special symbol and a winning sound (first winning sound, second winning sound) is output, the volume of the variable BGM is maintained without being reduced. This prevents the variable presentation from being hindered by the winning sound, making the game more interesting.

(Example of continuous variable performance)
Using Figures 81 to 83, a specific example of executing variable effects consecutively will be described.

Figure 81 is a timing chart for executing variable effects continuously, and Figures 82 to 83 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in Figure 81. Note that the explanation here is for effect mode A, but the explanations for effect modes B to F are omitted as they are basically the same.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 81, the first reserved number is in the state of "2", and the first special pattern display 221 is displaying the change (Nth cycle change from the start of the change) and the sub-first change display 81 is displaying the change (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 218, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the sub-first reserved display 83 are displaying "2". In addition, in front of the Mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped, the central decorative pattern 41 is scrolling (updating) at a low speed, and the small pattern 56 is updating (scrolling, switching). In addition, the first reserved icon display area 70B displays two reserved icons HI in the normal display mode, and the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, and the changing BGM is being audibly output (see FIG. 82(a)).

Next, at timing T1 in Figure 81 (the start of the N+1th cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the central decorative pattern 41 that has been scrolling (updated fluctuation) temporarily stops, the speaker 156 starts to output a temporary stop sound, the character of the central decorative pattern 41 performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking its head) and all decorative patterns 41 enter a temporarily stopped state (see Figure 82 (b)). Here, the pre-stop action of the decorative pattern 41 can also be considered as a stop-time action performance that is performed when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a stopped state.

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. 81 (during the N+2th cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 82 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 81, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the game control unit 200 sends a stop command (symbol determination command) to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 82(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in Fig. 81, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in an animation, and the decorative pattern 41 ("523") and the small pattern 56 ("523") start stopping (see Fig. 82(e)).
In addition, after the varying display on the sub-first varying display 81 stops, or after the small pattern 56 is displayed stationary, the icon TI may start to disappear in an animated manner.

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 81, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation, the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation ends (see FIG. 82 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 81, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number becomes "2" to "1", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218 displays "1", and the first special symbol display 221 starts displaying the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) (see FIG. 83(g)).

Then, at the timing of T7 in Figure 81 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the start command, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub-first hold indicator 83 will display "1", and the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 will begin (see Figure 83 (h)).

In addition, the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B start to shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, and the decorative pattern 41 starts to rise as a pre-change operation, and the small pattern 56 starts to update change (scroll display, switch display) (see Figure 83 (h)).

After that, at timing T8 in Figure 81 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the floating display of the decorative pattern 41, a pre-reading effect effect that is executed only in this fluctuation effect starts, and a blue effect image EF is displayed around the decorative pattern 41 (see Figure 83 (i)).

Next, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 81 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the two reserved icons HI ends, the first reserved icon HI is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). At this time, the icon change effect that occurs when the change starts is performed and the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, after which the scrolling display (update change) of the decorative pattern 41 begins (see FIG. 83(i)).

The action before the decorative pattern 41 stops is not limited to the above-mentioned example. For example, an animation of an effect image may be displayed around the decorative pattern 41 as the action before the decorative pattern 41 stops. For example, a rotation action of the decorative pattern 41 may be performed as the action before the decorative pattern 41 stops. For example, a floating and sinking action of the decorative pattern 41 may be performed as the action before the decorative pattern 41 stops.

In this way, the change BGM that was output before the execution of the pre-change action (such as the floating or rotation of the decorative pattern 41) can be continuously output even while the pre-change action is being executed. This makes it possible to create an effect that resembles a combination of multiple change effects, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when an icon change effect is executed at the start of a variation effect (when the icon shift display is performed), the display mode of the icon is not changed from the start of the icon shift display, but is changed when (after) the icon shift is completed. This makes it possible to highlight the change in the icon display mode and enhance the presentation effect of the icon change effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner during the pre-stop operation of the decorative symbol 41 (such as the rising and falling of the symbol, effects, and rotation). This allows the player to recognize that the variable performance has not ended during the pre-stop operation of the decorative symbol 41, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Depending on the type of variation presentation pattern, while the decorative pattern 41 that temporarily stops first (e.g. the decorative pattern 41 on the left) is performing a pre-stop action (raising and sinking of the pattern, effects, rotation, etc.), the decorative pattern 41 that temporarily stops next (e.g. the decorative pattern 41 on the right) may perform a pre-stop action or perform a variation display. This can enhance the presentation effect of the variation presentation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. The pre-stop action of the decorative pattern 41 that temporarily stops first and the decorative pattern 41 that temporarily stops next will be the same, but may be different. In addition, in the case of shortened variation, the pre-stop action may not be performed.

In addition, during the pre-stop operation of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the rising and falling of the pattern, effects, and rotation), a change performance is performed using the performance patterns (such as the small pattern 56, the sub-first change display 81, and the sub-second change display 82). Therefore, the player can be made aware that the change performance has not ended during the pre-stop operation of the decorative pattern 41, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-stop action of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the rising and falling of the pattern, effects, and rotation), it is possible to execute a disappearance effect that makes the icon TI disappear. This makes the progress of the game presentation clearer, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. The disappearance effect can also be considered as the stop/non-display effect described in the first embodiment.

In addition, after the pre-stop action of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the rising and falling of the pattern, effects, and rotation), it is possible to execute a stop display using the decorative pattern 41, and after the stop display using the decorative pattern 41, the icon TI disappears. This makes the progress of the game presentation clear, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-stop action of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the rising and falling of the pattern, effects, and rotation), a stop display can be executed using the decorative pattern 41, and after the stop display is executed using the performance pattern (such as the small pattern 56, the first sub-variable display 81, the second sub-variable display 82, etc.), a disappearance performance can be executed to make the icon TI disappear. This makes the progress of the game performance clear, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, after the decorative pattern 41 has completed its variable performance, the decorative pattern 41 can be stopped after performing pre-stop operations (such as floating and sinking patterns, effects, and rotation), and the decorative pattern 41 can be stopped without performing pre-stop operations after the variable performance of the performance patterns (small pattern 56, sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82, etc.). Therefore, while the decorative pattern 41 can enhance the performance effect of the variable performance, the performance pattern can let the player know that the variable display of the special pattern has ended, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, after the decorative pattern 41 has been put into pre-stop operation (such as rising and falling of the pattern, effects, rotation, etc.), it is possible to execute a background effect in which at least a part of the background image (such as the background image corresponding to each performance mode, the zone background image described below, etc.) operates while the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the decorative pattern 41 has stopped and displayed, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, while the decorative pattern 41 is in pre-stop motion (such as rising and falling of the pattern, effects, rotation, etc.) and while the decorative pattern 41 is in stop mode, it is possible to execute background effects that operate at least a part of the background image (such as background images corresponding to each performance mode, zone background images described below, etc.). This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling bored during the decorative pattern 41's pre-stop motion or after it has stopped and displayed, thereby making the game more interesting.

In addition, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporary stop display, stopped display) in a predetermined manner at a timing different from the end timing of the cyclic fluctuation when the first special pattern display device 221 (second special pattern display device 222) displays the cyclic fluctuation (before the start timing of the last cyclic fluctuation, before the end timing of the last cyclic fluctuation, after the start timing of the last cyclic fluctuation, after the end timing of the last cyclic fluctuation). This makes it possible to add depth to the game presentation and increase the interest in the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the two, which makes it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) displays the special symbol in a varying manner, the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped before the final cycle of variation is completed. This allows the player to understand the flow of the game, in which the display of the special symbol variations ends after the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, the small symbol 56 is displayed stationary at a timing different from the end timing of the cyclical fluctuation when the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) displays the fluctuating special symbol (after the start timing of the last cyclical fluctuation, after the end timing of the last cyclical fluctuation, and after the timing of the special symbol being displayed stationary). This makes it possible to widen the range of effects related to the stationary display of the small symbol 56, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the two, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, the reserved icon HI is caused to perform a performance action (swinging action, rotating action) while the variable performance is being performed, and the performance action of the reserved icon HI continues even after the end of the final cycle of variation when the first special pattern display device 221 (second special pattern display device 222) displays the variable special pattern. Therefore, the reserved icon HI lets the player know that the number of reserved balls is not "0", and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special pattern has stopped being displayed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends at a timing different from the end timing of the cyclical fluctuation when the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) displays the varying special symbols (after the start timing of the last cyclical fluctuation, after the end timing of the last cyclical fluctuation, and after the stop display timing of the special symbol). This makes it possible to widen the range of effects related to the disappearance display of the icon TI, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the two, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) displays a changing special symbol, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends after the cycle of change ends. This allows the player to understand the flow of the game, in which the icon TI is erased because the special symbol has stopped being displayed, and this makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) displays a special symbol, the audible output of a specified game sound (variation background music, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) that was started before the last cycle variation (during the execution of the variation performance) can be ended at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation (after the start timing of the last cycle variation, after the end timing of the last cycle variation, after the stop display timing of the special symbol). This makes it possible to expand the range of performances when the specified game sound is audibly output, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the two, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) displays a special symbol variation, it is possible to end the audible output of a specified game sound (such as a temporary stop sound) that was started before the last cycle variation (during the execution of the variation performance) before the cycle variation ends. This makes it possible to prevent the impression of the previous variation display from being dragged onto the next variation display, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) displays a changing special symbol, it is possible to continue to audibly output a specified game sound (changing BGM) that has been output before the last cycle of change even after the cycle of change has ended (during the stopped display). This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol has stopped being displayed, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) displays a changing special symbol, the background image presentation operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) that was output before the final cycle of change continues to be executed even after the cycle of change ends (during the stopped display). This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol is stopped and increases the interest of the game.

In addition, the look-ahead effects (look-ahead zone effects, look-ahead effect effects) that are executed when the variable effects begin are executed after the first cycle of fluctuations in the case of the variable display of special symbols ends. This allows the player to understand the flow of the game, in which the look-ahead effects are executed because the variable display of special symbols has begun, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Example of when the stop command cannot be received properly and a variable performance starts)
Using Figures 84 to 85, we will explain a specific example of a case where the stop command cannot be received normally and a variable performance begins.

Figure 84 is a timing chart for when the stop command cannot be received normally and a variable presentation starts, and Figure 85 is a diagram showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 84. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations are omitted.

Note that the timings T0 to T2 in Figure 84 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T2 in Figure 81, so we will omit the explanation here and only explain the timings from T3 onwards.

At the timing of T3 in FIG. 84, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the game control unit 200 sends a stop command (symbol determination command) to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 85(d)).

However, since the performance control unit 300 was unable to receive the stop command normally, the stopped display of the decorative pattern 41, small pattern 56, etc., which should normally start at timing T4 in Figure 84, is not started, and the changing display on the sub-first changing display unit 81, the display of the icon TI, the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, and the changing display of the small pattern 56 continue. Note that if the performance control unit 300 is unable to receive the stop command normally, the changing display period on the sub-first changing display unit 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern 41, and the changing display period of the small pattern 56 may be extended.

Next, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 84, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number changes from "1" to "0", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218 displays "0", and the first special symbol display 221 starts displaying the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) (see FIG. 85(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6 in Figure 84 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the start command, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 and the sub-first hold display 83 will display "0", and the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 will start from the beginning (off) (see Figure 85 (f)).

The icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased without animation, and the reserved icon HI displayed in the first display section starts to shift (decrease) to the icon display area 70C. This erasure of the icon TI without animation is regarded as the disappearance of the icon TI. Furthermore, the decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped as the change performance starts is displayed at the pattern stop position for just an instant, and then starts to rise as a pre-change operation, and the small pattern 56 that was scrolling (updating) continues to scroll without stopping (see FIG. 85(f)).

After that, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 84 (during the fourth cycle change), the shift display of the reserved icon HI ends and the icon is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). After that, the scrolling display (update change) of the decorative pattern 41 starts (see FIG. 85 (g)).

In this way, when the first command (start command) is received, the variable performance starts, and when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable performance ends. However, when the third command (next start command) is received while the variable performance has not ended, the current variable performance is forcibly ended and the next variable performance starts. In other words, when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable performance ends, but even if the second command cannot be received normally and the third command (next start command) is received, the variable performance ends. In other words, in both cases where the second command is received and where it is not received, the previous variable performance ends while the next variable performance is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to properly end the previous variable performance by starting the next variable performance, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a start command is received while the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 is momentarily displayed at the pattern stop position (in the same manner as if the stop command had been received normally) and then the variable performance (here, the floating display) is started. Therefore, the variable performance can be started in the same manner as if a start command had been received while the decorative pattern 41 was stopped, reducing the discomfort felt by the player when the variable performance starts from a temporarily stopped state of the decorative pattern 41, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when a start command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the icon TI that was being displayed is non-animated, that is, erased in a shorter time than the time required for an animated erase display. Therefore, when the pending icon HI next shifts into the icon display area 70C, the shift display is not impeded, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the presentation effect.

If the start command is received by the performance control unit 300 in a garbled state due to wiring abnormalities or noise, there may be cases where the content of the change pattern of the special symbol change display executed by the first special symbol display unit 221 (for example, a 13.5-second change for a normal reach) differs from the content of the change performance pattern of the change performance executed by the image display unit 114 (for example, a 40-second SP reach performance). In such a case, when the special symbol is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display unit 221, the image display unit 114 will be in a state where a change performance (specifically, an SP reach performance) is being executed, and when the next start command is received in this state, the current change performance will be forcibly ended and the next change performance will be started. In this regard, the same operation applies to gaming machines that send and receive start commands but do not send and receive stop commands.

(Example of when the normal variable performance ends and the machine waits for customers)
Using Figures 86 to 88, we will explain a specific example of when the normal variable performance ends and the machine enters a waiting state for customers.

Figure 86 is a timing chart for when the normal variable presentation ends and the machine enters a waiting state for customers, and Figures 87 to 88 are diagrams showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 86. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations will be omitted.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 86, the first reserved number is in the state of "0", and the first special symbol display 221 is displaying the change (Nth cycle change from the start of the change) and the sub-first reserved display 81 is displaying the change (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special symbol reserved display 218, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting hole 121, and the sub-first reserved display 83 are displaying "0". In addition, in front of the Mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, the central decorative symbol 41 is scrolling (updating) at a low speed, and the small symbol 56 is updating (scrolling, switching). In addition, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the changing BGM is audibly output. In addition, the volume value image OG is displayed so that it partially overlaps in front of the right decorative symbol 41 (see FIG. 87(a)).

Next, at the timing T1 in Figure 86 (during the Nth cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the central decorative pattern 41 that was being scrolled (updated) is temporarily stopped, the speaker 156 starts to output a temporary stop sound, the character of the central decorative pattern 41 performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking its head), and all decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped (see Figure 87 (b)).

Then, at the timing T2 in FIG. 86 (during the N+1th cycle of fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), when the down button of the performance key 162 is operated to adjust the volume, the volume value changes from "4" to "3." At this time, the image display unit 114 is updated to a volume value image OG indicating the volume value "3," and the speaker 156 starts to output a confirmation sound with a volume corresponding to the volume value "3" (see FIG. 87(c)).

After that, at timing T3 in FIG. 86 (during the N+1th cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 87(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 86 (midway through the N+2th cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the time for the special symbol to fluctuate has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 87(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 86, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts to disappear in an animated manner, and the decorative pattern 41 ("523") and the small pattern 56 ("523") start to stop. Furthermore, volume adjustment and light adjustment using the performance key 162 are restricted for a predetermined period of time (1 second), and the volume value image OG is erased, but the confirmation sound continues to be output (see FIG. 87(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 86, the output period of the confirmation sound has elapsed and the output of the confirmation sound ends (see FIG. 88(g)), and at the timing of T7 in FIG. 86, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the animated disappearance display of the icon TI, the animated disappearance display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 88(h)).

Next, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 86, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the machine enters a customer waiting state and enters a waiting period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300.

Then, at timing T9 in FIG. 86, when a stop waiting period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the command to specify the waiting state for customers, the output of the variable BGM at an audible volume is stopped (muted) (see FIG. 88(i)), and when a demo waiting period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the command to specify the waiting state for customers, a waiting demo performance is started to encourage the player to play.

If the decorative pattern 41 (small pattern 56) is stopped in response to a stop command while the confirmation sound is being output, volume adjustment using the performance key 162 is restricted, but the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. The same is true when a variable performance begins; even if a variable performance begins in response to a start command while the confirmation sound is being output, volume adjustment using the performance key 162 is restricted, but the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period has elapsed.

In addition, the audible output of the variable background music is stopped (muted) when a specified period of time has passed since the customer waiting state designation command was received, but if the customer waiting state designation command was not received correctly, the audible output of the variable background music is not stopped. For example, the audible output of the variable background music is stopped (muted) the next time a customer waiting state designation command or a jackpot game opening designation command is received.

Additional elements when the variable display stops In this way, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a static state during a variable display (a period during which volume and light intensity adjustments can be made using the display keys 162), volume and light intensity adjustments using the display keys 162 are restricted for a predetermined period (1 second). This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player missing the important aspect of the decorative pattern 41 being displayed in a static state because he or she is concentrating on adjusting the volume and light intensity, and makes the game more interesting.

Additional elements when the variation is stopped When the decorative pattern 41 is stopped while the volume value image OG is being displayed, even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds after the last adjustment operation) has not elapsed, the visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted (erased) in order to ensure the visibility of the decorative pattern 41 that is stopped. Therefore, the visibility of the decorative pattern 41 that is stopped is not hindered by the volume value image OG, and the player can confirm the decorative pattern 41 that is stopped, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

When the variable effect starts or the decorative pattern 41 is stopped during the output period of the volume confirmation sound, the volume adjustment by the effect key 162 is restricted, but the volume confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. Therefore, the player can understand that the volume has been adjusted, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the normal variable performance ends and the machine is in a waiting state, the audible output of the variable BGM continues for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, players are less likely to want to quit playing compared to when the audible output of the variable BGM stops (mutes) immediately after the normal variable performance ends, which makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, it is possible to continuously output background music (variable background music for each presentation mode) while the decorative pattern 41 is in pre-stop motion (such as rising and falling of the pattern, effects, rotation, etc.) and while the decorative pattern 41 is in stop display. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling bored during the decorative pattern 41's pre-stop motion and stop display, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during the pre-stop operation of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the rising and falling of the pattern, effects, and rotation), the volume of the BGM (variable BGM for each performance mode) can be adjusted according to the operation of a specific operation unit (such as the performance key 162). Therefore, even during the pre-stop operation of the decorative pattern 41, the BGM can be output at a volume suitable for the player, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during the pre-stop operation of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the rising and falling of the pattern, effects, and rotation), the volume of the BGM (variable BGM for each performance mode) can be adjusted according to the operation of a specific operation unit (such as the performance key 162), and the volume of the BGM can be suppressed by outputting various error notification sounds. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the error notification sounds being obstructed by the BGM, and improves the enjoyment of the game.

When the decorative pattern 41 is stopped while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value image OG may be changed from being displayed (set) in a layer above the decorative pattern 41 to being displayed (set) in a layer below the decorative pattern 41, rather than being hidden. In this way, the volume value image OG is displayed so as to overlap behind the decorative pattern 41, so that visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted, while visibility of the decorative pattern 41 is ensured, and the player can confirm the decorative pattern 41 that is stopped.

In addition, when adjusting the volume by operating the performance key 162 while waiting for customers, a volume confirmation sound is output, and when adjusting the volume by operating the performance key 162 during a variable performance, the volume confirmation sound is not output. However, it is also possible to configure so that when adjusting the volume by operating the performance key 162 while waiting for customers, the volume confirmation sound is not output, and when adjusting the volume by operating the performance key 162 during a variable performance, the volume confirmation sound is output.

In addition, the volume value image OG is displayed when adjusting the volume by operating the performance key 162 whether the machine is in a state waiting for customers or during a variable performance. However, the volume value image OG may be displayed when adjusting the volume by operating the performance key 162 while the machine is in a state waiting for customers, and the volume value image OG may not be displayed when adjusting the volume by operating the performance key 162 during a variable performance.

In addition, even if the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as stopped in response to the reception of a stop command while the confirmation sound is being output, or if a variable performance is started in response to the reception of a start command while the confirmation sound is being output, the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. However, if the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as stopped or the variable performance is started, the output of the confirmation sound may be stopped even if the output period has not elapsed. In this way, it is difficult to confuse the confirmation sound with the variable start sound or variable stop sound, making the variable start sound and variable stop sound easier to hear, and improving the enjoyment of the game.

(Example of a case where the end of the normal variation performance is delayed due to the inability to receive the stop command properly)
Using Figures 89 to 90, we will explain a specific example of a case where the end of the normal variable performance is delayed because the stop command cannot be received properly.

Figure 89 is a timing chart for when the end of the normal variable presentation is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally, and Figure 90 is a diagram showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 89. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations are omitted.

Note that the timings T0 to T3 in Figure 89 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T3 in Figure 86, so we will omit the explanation here and only explain the timings from T4 onwards.

At the timing of T4 in FIG. 89 (midway through the N+2th cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the time for the special symbol to fluctuate has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 90(e)).

However, since the performance control unit 300 was unable to receive the stop command normally, the display of the decorative pattern 41, small pattern 56, etc., which should have started at the timing of T5 in FIG. 89, does not start. The display of the change on the sub-first change indicator 81, the display of the icon TI, the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, the change of the small pattern 56, the display of the volume value image OG, and the state in which the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the performance key 162 continue (see FIG. 90 (f)). Note that if the performance control unit 300 was unable to receive the stop command normally, the display period of the change on the sub-first change indicator 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern 41, the change of the small pattern 56, the display period of the volume value image OG, and the period in which the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the performance key 162 may be extended.

Next, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 89, the output period of the confirmation sound has elapsed and the output of the confirmation sound has ended (see FIG. 90(g)). At the timing of T7 in FIG. 89, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the machine enters a customer waiting state and a waiting period in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300.

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is displayed as disappearing without animation, and the decorative pattern 41 ("523") and the small pattern 56 ("523") are displayed at the pattern stop position (= stopped and displayed state). Meanwhile, the state in which the volume can be adjusted using the performance key 162 is maintained, and the display of the volume value image OG is also maintained (see FIG. 90 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 89, when the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the previous operation of the effect key 162 for volume adjustment) has elapsed, the volume value image OG becomes non-displayed (see FIG. 90(i)), and at the timing of T10 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the variable BGM at an audible volume is stopped (muted) (see FIG. 90(j)), and when a further predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, a customer waiting demo effect is displayed to encourage the player to play.

In addition, even if the presentation control unit 300 is unable to properly receive the start command sent from the game control unit 200 while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the situation is basically the same as when the presentation control unit 300 is unable to properly receive the stop command sent from the game control unit 200 while the volume value image OG is being displayed, and the variable presentation will not be executed, so the state in which volume adjustment is possible using the presentation key 162 will be maintained, and the volume value image OG will not be erased.

In addition, if the stop command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the change display on the sub-first change display 81 will not stop, the icon TI will not disappear without animation, and the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 will not stop being displayed, so the state in which volume can be adjusted using the performance key 162 will be maintained and the volume value image OG will not be erased.

BGM Completion Furthermore, if the stop command and customer waiting state designation command are not received normally, the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 will not be displayed as stopped, and the audible output of the variable BGM will be maintained even if a predetermined period (30 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting state was entered.

In this way, when the first command (start command) is received, the variable performance starts, and when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable performance ends. However, when the third command (command to specify a waiting state for customers) is received while the variable performance has not ended, the current variable performance is forcibly ended and the machine enters a waiting state for customers. In other words, when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable performance ends, but even if the second command cannot be received normally and the third command (command to specify a waiting state for customers) is received, the variable performance ends. In other words, in both cases where the second command has been received and where it has not been received, the variable performance ends when the machine transitions to a waiting state for customers. Therefore, the variable performance can be ended appropriately by the start of the waiting state for customers, which can increase the excitement of the game.

In this way, if the presentation control unit 300 cannot properly receive the start command or stop command sent from the game control unit 200 (due to a disconnection of the command line connecting the game control unit 200 and the presentation control unit 300, or a disconnection of the connector, etc.), volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the presentation key 162 are not restricted, and a state in which volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible is maintained. This improves the convenience for the player regarding volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, if the presentation control unit 300 cannot properly receive the start command or stop command sent from the game control unit 200 (due to a disconnection of the command line connecting the game control unit 200 and the presentation control unit 300, a disconnection of the connector, etc.), the display of the volume value image OG will be maintained until the display period of the volume value image OG has elapsed. This improves the convenience of the player with regard to volume and light adjustments, and makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

If the start command is received by the performance control unit 300 in a garbled state due to wiring abnormalities or noise, there may be cases where the content of the change pattern of the special symbol change display executed by the first special symbol display unit 221 (for example, a 13.5-second change for a normal reach) differs from the content of the change performance pattern of the change performance executed by the image display unit 114 (for example, a 40-second SP reach performance). In such a case, when the special symbol is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display unit 221, the image display unit 114 is in a state where a change performance (specifically, an SP reach performance) is being executed, and when a customer waiting state designation command is received in this state, the current change performance is forcibly ended and the state transitions to a customer waiting state. In this regard, the same operation is performed for gaming machines that send and receive start commands but do not send and receive stop commands.

(Example of when the Miss Normal Reach Variable Performance ends and the customer waits)
Using Figures 91 to 93, we will explain a specific example when the miss normal reach variable presentation ends and the customer waiting state begins.

Figure 91 is a timing chart for when the Miss Normal Reach Variable Presentation ends and the player waits for customers, and Figures 92 to 93 are diagrams showing presentation examples at various timings in Figure 91. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations will be omitted.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 91, the first reserved number is "0" and the first special symbol display 221 is displaying a change in the first special symbol, and the sub-first reserved display 81 is displaying a change in the first special symbol (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special symbol reserved display 218, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting hole 121, and the sub-first reserved display 83 are displaying "0". In addition, three decorative symbols 41 and three small symbols 56 are updating and changing (scrolling display, switching display) in front of the Mode A background image that is scrolling horizontally. In addition, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the changing BGM is being audibly output (see FIG. 92(a)).

Next, at timing T1 in Figure 91, when the normal reach effect begins in which the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped at the same pattern while the decorative pattern 41 in the center scrolls at a slow speed, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) and output of the normal reach BGM begins (see Figure 92 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 91, when a dark background image is displayed on the image display unit 114 and a blackout effect is initiated, the decorative pattern 41 is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and a prompting effect encouraging the operation of the effect button 161 and the effective period of the effect button 161 are initiated. Specifically, an operation prompting image SSG imitating the effect button 161 is displayed on the image display unit 114, the audible output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (muted), and a prompt sound saying "press" is output from the speaker 156 (see FIG. 92 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in Figure 91, if the effect button 161 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a development failure effect is executed, indicating that the development to the SP reach effect has failed and the game will end in a normal reach effect. Specifically, a development failure image SIG is displayed on the image display unit 114, a failure sound "ding" is output from the speaker 156, and the audible output of the normal reach BGM is resumed (see Figure 92 (d)).

Next, at timing T4 in Figure 91, when the execution period of the blackout effect has elapsed, horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image resumes, and the decorative pattern 41 returns to the position it was in before the blackout effect began, and the normal reach effect resumes (see Figure 92 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 91, when the central decorative pattern 41, which has been scrolling (updating and changing) at a slow speed, temporarily stops at "6", the speaker 156 starts to output a temporary stop sound, the character of the central decorative pattern 41 performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking its head), and the three decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop at the reach miss result ("565"). Also, the output of the normal reach BGM stops, but the audible output of the changing BGM does not resume (see FIG. 92(f)).

After that, at timing T6 in FIG. 91, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 93 (g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 91, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the game control unit 200 sends a stop command (symbol determination command) to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 93 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 91, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, an animated disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts, and a stop display of the decorative pattern 41 ("565") and the small pattern 56 ("565") starts (see FIG. 93 (i)).

After that, at timing T9 in FIG. 91, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the animated disappearance display of the icon TI, the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animated disappearance display ends (see FIG. 93 (j)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 91, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the machine enters a customer waiting state and enters a waiting period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300. After that, when the demo waiting period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demo performance is started to appeal to the player to play.

In this way, when the normal reach variable performance is executed, the variable BGM is muted (silenced) and the normal reach BGM is output when the normal reach performance starts, so the normal reach performance can be effectively enhanced and the excitement of the game can be increased.

In addition, when the waiting state for customers occurs after a miss normal reach variation performance, the performance BGM (variation BGM, normal reach BGM) is not output before the normal reach variation performance ends, specifically, from the moment the three decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop, so that the customer can immediately know that the normal reach performance has ended or that it has become a miss, which can increase the interest.

In addition, instead of stopping the output of the performance BGM (variable BGM, normal reach BGM) when the three decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop, the variable BGM may be audibly output instead of the normal reach BGM when the three decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop. In this way, the player will not be extremely disappointed when the normal reach variable performance, which has a low chance of winning, ends in a miss.

(Specific example of when a variable performance is executed after the end of the miss SPSP reach performance)
Using Figures 94 to 96, we will explain a specific example of when a variable performance is executed after a miss SPSP reach performance has ended.

Figure 94 is a timing chart for when a variable presentation is executed after the end of a miss SPSP reach presentation, and Figures 95 to 96 are diagrams showing presentation examples at various timings in Figure 94. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations are omitted.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 94, the first reserved number is in the state of "2", and the first special pattern display 221 displays the first special pattern and the sub-first reserved display 81 displays the first reserved number (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 218, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting hole 121, and the sub-first reserved display 83 display "2". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, three decorative patterns 41 are scrolled (updated and changed), and the small pattern 56 is updated and changed (scrolled, switched). In addition, the first reserved icon display area 70B displays the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the reserved icon HI in the special display mode (blue). In addition, the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, and the changing BGM is audibly output.

Next, at the timing of T1 in Figure 94, when the normal reach effect starts, in which the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped at the same pattern while the decorative pattern 41 in the center scrolls at a slow speed, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) and the output of the normal reach BGM starts.

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 94, when a dark background image is displayed on the image display unit 114 and a blackout effect is started, the decorative pattern 41 is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and a prompting effect encouraging the operation of the effect button 161 and the effective period of the effect button 161 are started on the image display unit 114. Specifically, an operation prompting image SSG imitating the effect button 161 is displayed on the image display unit 114, the output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (not output), and a prompt sound saying "press" is output from the speaker 156 (see FIG. 95(a)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in Figure 94, when the effect button 161 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a successful development effect is executed, indicating that the development to the SP reach effect has been successful and that the SP reach effect will be executed. Specifically, a successful development image HSG is displayed on the image display unit 114, and a success sound saying "Good job" is output from the speaker 156 (see Figure 95 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in Figure 94, when the execution period of the blackout effect has elapsed, the display of the SP reach background image and the output of the SP reach BGM begin, and the execution of the SP reach effect begins. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 changes to a display mode that shows only numbers, and the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in the left and right corners of the upper left and right corners of the screen in a reduced size compared to the normal size (see Figure 95 (c)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 94, when the execution period of the SP reach performance has elapsed, the display of the SPSP reach background image and the output of the SPSP reach BGM begin, and the execution of the SPSP reach performance begins. At this time, the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a smaller size than normal, and the first hold icon display area 70B becomes hidden along with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 95(d)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 94, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped and the deciding performance starts in the final stage of the SPSP reach performance, a prompting image that prompts the player to operate the performance button 161 and the effective period of the performance button 161 begin. Specifically, an operation prompting image SSG that imitates the performance button 161 is displayed on the image display unit 114, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (not output), and a prompting sound saying "press" is output from the speaker 156 (see FIG. 95(e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 94, when the effect button 161 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a failed decision effect is executed, indicating that a big win game will not be executed. Specifically, a failed decision image HBG is displayed on the image display unit 114, and a failure sound "ding" is output from the speaker 156. In addition, the central decorative pattern 41 in the upper left corner of the screen temporarily stops at "6", and the three decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop at the reach failure result ("565") (see FIG. 95(f)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 94, when the execution period of the SPSP reach performance has elapsed, a first stop suggestion performance (for example, for 0.5 seconds) is executed to suggest that the decorative pattern 41 will be displayed as stopped. Specifically, an obscuring image (for example, an eye-catching image including the model name or a model-specific character) that obscures the background image and decorative pattern 41 is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion performance ends, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image is resumed, and the decorative pattern 41 returns to the position and first state before the start of the SP reach performance, and is displayed as temporarily stopped. Also, the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 96 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 94, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the game control unit 200 sends a stop command (symbol determination command) to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 96 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 94, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, an animated disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts, and a stop display of the decorative pattern 41 ("565") and the small pattern 56 ("565") starts (see FIG. 96 (i)).

Then, at timing T11 in FIG. 94, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the animated disappearance display of the icon TI, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 96 (j)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 94, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number becomes "2" to "1", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218 displays "1", and the display of the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) on the first special symbol indicator 221 begins (see FIG. 96 (k)).

Next, at the timing of T13 in Figure 94 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the start command, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 and the sub-first hold indicator 83 will display "1", and the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 will start from the beginning (off) (see Figure 96 (l)).

The two hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B start to shift (decrease) toward the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, the decorative pattern 41 starts to rise as a pre-change action, the small pattern 56 starts to update (scroll, switch), and the audible output of the change BGM is resumed (see FIG. 96(l)).

Note that while the SPSP reach variation effects have been explained here, the same applies to the SP reach variation effects, where playback of the normal reach BGM is suspended during the blackout effect, and in the SP reach effect after the blackout effect, the output of the normal reach BGM is not resumed and the SP reach BGM is output.

In addition, although the SPSP reach variation effect has been explained here, the same applies when the SP reach variation effect is a miss. When the decorative pattern 41 that is a miss in the SP reach effect is temporarily stopped, a first stop suggestion effect (for example, for 0.5 seconds) is executed to suggest that the decorative pattern 41 will be displayed as stopped. When the first stop suggestion effect ends, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image resumes, and the decorative pattern 41 returns to its normal size and first state and is displayed temporarily stopped.

In addition, when a look-ahead zone effect is being executed and a reach state is reached while the look-ahead zone background is displayed, and an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed, it is similar to when a reach state is reached while a normal background image such as the mode A background image is displayed and an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed, but when the decorative pattern 41, which is a miss in the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect, is temporarily stopped, a first stop suggestion effect (for example, for 0.5 seconds) is executed to suggest that the decorative pattern 41 will be displayed as stopped, and when the first stop suggestion effect ends, the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image (for example, the mode A background image) before the look-ahead zone background image is displayed is resumed, and the decorative pattern 41 returns to its normal size and first state and is displayed temporarily stopped.

In this way, in the first variable performance (normal reach variable performance) in which a blackout performance (suggestive performance) is executed that suggests whether or not an SP reach performance will be executed, the normal reach BGM continues to play but is muted (silenced) during the blackout performance, and the normal reach BGM that was muted in the normal reach performance after the blackout performance is returned to an audible output, while in the second variable performance (SP/SPSP reach variable performance) in which a blackout performance (suggestive performance) is executed that suggests whether or not an SP reach performance will be executed, the normal reach BGM is stopped from playing during the blackout performance, and the SP reach BGM is output in the SP reach performance after the blackout performance. This makes it possible to reduce the load on audio control when an SP reach performance is executed, and to improve the freedom of audio control.

In addition, when the SP Reach effect is started while the first background image (for example, the Mode A background image, which is the normal background image) or the second background image (the look-ahead zone background image) corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the background image is changed to the third background image (the SP Reach background image), which indicates a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal background image, and the decorative patterns 41 that are temporarily stopped to form the Reach state are displayed in a size smaller than the normal size. Then, when the three decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop as a miss, the background image is changed to the first background image (the Mode A background image, which is the normal background image), and the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed stopped in the normal size. This makes it possible to enhance the effect of the SP Reach effect and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, even during the execution of the SP reach performance in which the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 changes, the mode of the performance operation of the reserved icon HI or the icon TI (the content of the operation, the period of the operation, etc.) does not change. This allows the player to concentrate on the SP reach performance, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, while the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the icon TI remains displayed, while the reserved icon HI is hidden. This allows the player to concentrate on the SPSP reach effect, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, after the SPSP reach effect ends, the display of the reserve icon HI (the reserve icon in the normal display mode, the reserve icon in the special display mode) is resumed. This makes it possible to appeal to the player that the variable performance will be executed again after the variable performance in which the SPSP reach effect was executed, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the hold icon HI (hold icon in normal display mode, hold icon in special display mode) remains displayed if the SPSP reach performance is not executed after the execution of the SP reach performance, but becomes hidden if the SPSP reach performance is executed, but the small symbol 56 remains displayed regardless of whether the SPSP reach performance is executed after the execution of the SP reach performance. This makes it possible to inform the player that the display is changing, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the SPSP reach effect ends, the first stop suggestion effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed. This allows the player to understand that the SPSP reach effect has ended and that the decorative pattern 41 has stopped, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the first stop suggestion effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed to return the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 to the first mode. This reduces the sense of discomfort caused by the change in the display mode of the decorative pattern 41, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the first stop suggestion effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed to return from the SPSP reach background image to the Mode A background image. This reduces the sense of discomfort caused by the change in background image, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that while the hold icon HI and the icon TI are displayed during the blackout performance, at least one of the hold icon HI and the icon TI may be hidden and then displayed again when the SP reach performance begins.

In addition, a valid period is generated during the blackout effect, and when the effect button 161 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a successful development effect or a failed development effect is executed, but it is also possible not to generate a valid period. In this case, a successful development effect or a failed development effect may be executed, or the effect may return to a normal reach effect or develop into an SP reach effect without executing a successful development effect or a failed development effect.

In addition, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are left displayed while the SP reach performance is being performed, and the hold icon HI is hidden and the icon TI is left displayed while the SPSP reach performance is being performed, but the hold icon HI may be hidden and the icon TI is left displayed while the SP reach performance is being performed, and the hold icon HI and the icon TI may be hidden while the SPSP reach performance is being performed.

(Example of when the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends and the jackpot game is executed)
Using Figures 97 to 99, a specific example will be described in which the big win SPSP reach fluctuation presentation ends and a big win game is executed.

Figure 97 is a timing chart when the big win SPSP reach fluctuation presentation ends and the big win game is executed, and Figures 98 to 99 are diagrams showing presentation examples at various timings in Figure 97. Note that here, the case of presentation mode A will be explained, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations will be omitted.

Note that the timings T0 to T5 in Figure 97 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T5 in Figure 94, so we will omit the explanation here and only explain the timings from T6 onwards.

First, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 97, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped and the deciding performance starts in the final stage of the SPSP reach performance, a prompting image for operating the performance button 161 and the valid period of the performance button 161 begin. Specifically, an operation prompting image SSG that imitates the performance button 161 is displayed on the image display unit 114, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (not output), and a prompting sound saying "press" is output from the speaker 156 (see FIG. 98(e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 97, when the effect button 161 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a successful decision effect is executed, suggesting that a big win game will be played. Specifically, the first movable member 115a and the second movable member 115b descend (big descent) to the effect position, and the second movable member 115b moves left and right. In addition, a successful decision image SEF is displayed on the image display unit 114, and a success sound "queen, queen" is output from the speaker 156. In addition, the central decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops at "5" in the upper left corner of the screen, and the three decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop at the big win number ("555") (see FIG. 98(f)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 97, when the execution period of the SPSP reach performance has elapsed, a first stop suggestion performance (for example, for 0.5 seconds) is executed to suggest that the decorative pattern 41 will be displayed as stopped. Specifically, a shielding image (an eye-catching image including the model name) that shields the background image and decorative pattern 41, etc., is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion performance ends, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image is resumed, and the decorative pattern 41 returns to the position and first state before the start of the SP reach performance, and is displayed as temporarily stopped. Also, the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 98(g)).

In addition, a second stop suggestion effect is started, which suggests that the decorative pattern 41 will stop displaying a jackpot result. Specifically, a light-emitting display effect in which the effect image EF moves from one end of the decorative pattern 41 to the other end and then disappears is repeated twice at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 0.75 seconds) (see FIG. 98(g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 97, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the game control unit 200 sends a stop command (symbol determination command) to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the jackpot special symbol is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 99 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the stop command, the change display on the sub-first change display 81 stops. Also, as the second stop suggestion performance ends, an animated disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts, and a stop display of the decorative pattern 41 ("555") and the small pattern 56 ("555") starts (see FIG. 99 (i)).

Then, at timing T11 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the animated disappearance display of the icon TI, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 99 (j)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 97, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the game control unit 200 sends an opening designation command for the jackpot game to the performance control unit 300 (see FIG. 99 (k)).

Next, at the timing of T13 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the opening designation command for the jackpot game, the opening performance for the jackpot game begins. Specifically, an opening performance screen containing the word "jackpot" is displayed, and a right-hit image UG is displayed in the right corner of the screen, suggesting that the game ball be shot aiming at the right area (the jackpot opening) of the game area 111.

In this way, in the variable presentation resulting in a big win, the reserved icon HI (the reserved icon in the normal display mode, the reserved icon in the special display mode) remains displayed if the SPSP reach presentation is not executed after the execution of the SP reach presentation, but becomes invisible if the SPSP reach presentation is executed, but the small symbol 56 remains displayed regardless of whether the SPSP reach presentation is executed after the execution of the SP reach presentation. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the variable display is in progress, and to increase the interest of the game.
In addition, in the case of a variable presentation that results in a jackpot, even if the normal reach presentation does not develop into an SP reach presentation, the display of the hold icon HI (hold icon in normal display mode, hold icon in special display mode) is maintained.

In addition, when the SPSP reach effect, which is a big win, ends, a second stop suggestion effect (a light-emitting display effect in which the effect image EF moves from one end of the decorative pattern 41 to the other and disappears) is executed. This allows the player to understand that the SPSP reach effect has ended and that the big win decorative pattern 41 has stopped, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the duration of one light-emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect (0.75 seconds) and the cumulative duration (1.5 seconds) are different from the period (2 or 3 seconds) of the display action (shaking action, rotating action) of the reserved icon. This makes it possible to make the light-emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect stand out, and to emphasize that the jackpot decorative pattern has stopped.

In addition, the presentation mode of the light-emitting display presentation in the second stop suggestion presentation is such that the effect image EF moves from one end of the decorative pattern 41 to the other end and then disappears, but the effect image EF may also move from one end of the number image portion of the decorative pattern 41 to the other end and then disappear, or the effect image EF may move from one end of the character image to the other end and then disappear.

In addition, the cumulative presentation time of the light-emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect is shorter than the period of the presentation operation of the hold icon (2 or 3 seconds), but the presentation time of one light-emitting display effect may be set to, for example, 2 seconds, so that the cumulative presentation time becomes longer than the period of the presentation operation of the hold icon HI (2 or 3 seconds).

In addition, although the hold icon HI is redisplayed after the end of the SPSP reach performance, the hold icon HI may not be redisplayed depending on the type of SPSP reach performance. Specifically, when the first SPSP reach performance is executed or when the second SPSP reach performance resulting in a miss is executed, the hold icon HI may be redisplayed after the first stop suggestion performance is executed, and when the second SPSP reach performance resulting in a jackpot is executed, the opening performance of the jackpot game may be executed as is without executing the first stop suggestion performance (display of an eye-catching image) or redisplaying the hold icon HI.

In addition, the reserved icon HI is redisplayed after the SPSP reach effect ends, but if a revival effect resulting in a jackpot is executed after the decorative pattern 41 of the reach miss result has temporarily stopped, the reserved icon HI may be hidden again while the revival effect is being executed. In this case, the decorative pattern 41 of the jackpot result may be temporarily stopped after the revival effect is executed and the reserved icon may be redisplayed, or the opening effect of the jackpot game may be executed without displaying the decorative pattern 41 of the jackpot result or redisplaying the reserved icon HI after the revival effect is executed.

If the stop command is received normally during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 in the reach miss variation presentation is longer than the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 in the jackpot variation presentation. However, if the stop command cannot be received normally in the jackpot variation presentation, the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 in the jackpot variation presentation may be longer than the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 in the reach miss variation presentation. Also, if the stop command or opening designation command cannot be received normally in the jackpot variation presentation, the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 in the jackpot variation presentation is longer than the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 in the reach miss variation presentation.

(Example of recovery from a power outage that occurred during a variable performance)
Using Figures 100 to 103, we will explain a specific example of recovery from a power outage that occurs during a variable performance.

Figure 100 is a timing chart for when power is restored after an interruption occurs during a variable performance, and Figures 101 to 103 are diagrams showing examples of performances at various timings in Figure 100. Note that the explanation here is for performance mode A, but since performance modes B to F are basically the same, explanations will be omitted.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 100, the first reserved number is in the state of "2", and the first special pattern display 221 displays the first special pattern and the sub-first reserved display 81 displays the first special pattern (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 218, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting hole 121, and the sub-first reserved display 83 display "2". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, three decorative patterns 41 are scrolled (updated and changed), and the small pattern 56 is updated and changed (scrolled, switched). In addition, the first reserved icon display area 70B displays the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the reserved icon HI in the special display mode (blue). In addition, the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, and the changing BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 101(a)).

Next, at the timing T1 in FIG. 100, when a power outage occurs that stops the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100, the gaming control unit 200 performs processing for power outage, and the display 130 including the first special pattern display 221, etc., the sub information display 80 including the sub first variable display, etc., the image display unit 114, the sub display device, etc. become hidden, and the gaming sounds (variable BGM, etc.) output from the speaker 156 also become non-output (see FIG. 101 (b)).

When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resumed at the timing of T2 in FIG. 100, a loading screen (initial screen) including the words "NOW LOADING" is displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sub display unit, and the game control unit 200, which has restored the game control state to the state before the power failure, transmits power-on commands (here, a second power restoration command, a first special symbol storage command, and a second special symbol storage command, which indicate that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner) to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the information display on the display unit 130 is resumed, the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 221 is resumed from the state before the power failure, and the display of the first reserved number "2" on the first special symbol reserved display unit 218 is also resumed (see FIG. 101(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in Figure 100, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the power ON command, the above-mentioned power restoration notification and the initial operation (including the return operation) of the various roles (board roles, frame roles) are initiated, and information display on the sub-information display 80 begins (see Figure 101 (d)).

At this time, in the image display unit 114 during the power restoration notification, the power restoration image displayed on the entire screen is set as the top layer, and various effect images (background image corresponding to the effect mode when the power is restored, decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 which are the initial result when the power is restored, reserved icon HI corresponding to the reserved number and the effect mode when the power is restored, reserved number display 55 corresponding to the reserved number when the power is restored, etc.) are generated and displayed as image data for the power restoration notification set in a lower layer than the power restoration image. At this time, the power restoration image restricts the visibility of the various effect images, but the background image and reserved icon are in a state of performing an effect operation, and the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 are in a state of being stopped and displayed at the pattern stop position. In addition, the reserved icon HI is set to the normal display mode (white icon) even if it was in the special display mode before the power failure, and the icon TI is in a non-display state even if it was displayed before the power failure (see FIG. 101 (d)).

In addition, when the sub-information display 80 is reporting that power has been restored, the sub-first change display 81 and the sub-second change display 82 are in a stopped state with no change indication, and the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 are in a state in which they display the number of holds (see FIG. 101(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 100 (while the power restoration notification is continuing), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first reserved number becomes "3", the first special symbol reserved indicator 218 displays "3", and a winning command (first special symbol storage command, first look-ahead command) is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 (see FIG. 102 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 100, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the winning command, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 and the sub-first hold display 83 will display "3." In addition, the hold icon HI (white icon) will begin to be additionally displayed in animation in the normal display mode on the third display unit of the first hold icon display area 70B, but visibility is restricted by the power recovery image set in the upper layer (see FIG. 102(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 100, after the additional display in the animation of the pending icon HI has finished, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 102 (g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 100, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the stop command, the power restoration notification ends, and the various performance images that were restricted from viewing by the power restoration image (the background image corresponding to the performance mode when power is restored, the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 that are the initial result when power is restored, the reserve icon HI corresponding to the current number of reserved balls and the performance mode, the reserve number display 55 corresponding to the current number of reserved balls, etc.) become visible (see FIG. 103 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 100, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number becomes "3" to "2", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218 displays "2", and the first special symbol display 221 starts displaying the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) (see FIG. 103(i)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in Figure 100 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the start command, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub-first hold indicator 83 will display "2", and the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 will begin (see Figure 103 (j)).

In addition, the three hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B start to shift (decrease) toward the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, the decorative pattern 41 starts to rise as a pre-change action, the small pattern 56 starts to update (scroll, switch), and the audible output of the change BGM starts (see FIG. 103(j)).

Then, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 100 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the pending icon HI ends, the first one is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). Also, the scrolling display (update change) of the decorative pattern 41 starts (see FIG. 103 (k)).

When the machine is controlled to presentation mode D (high probability gameplay state) or to presentation mode F when the power is restored, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 will be displayed in the fourth mode, but the number image of the decorative pattern 41 will be the initial decorative pattern "753" which is the same as when the machine is controlled to presentation mode A (normal gameplay state) when the power is restored. When the machine is controlled to presentation mode D (high probability gameplay state) when the power is restored, the initial decorative pattern may be "246" or the like so as to be distinguishable from when the machine is controlled to presentation mode A (normal gameplay state) when the power is restored.

In addition, if the power supply is stopped during the waiting for customers state and then resumes and the game control state is restored, a command to designate the waiting for customers state is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300, so that the performance control unit 300 receives the command to designate the waiting for customers state while the loading screen (initial screen) is being displayed, and a variable waiting screen (where the decorative pattern 41 can be seen) is displayed, waiting for the variable performance to be executed, without a power restoration notification being issued.

In addition, if the power supply is stopped during a jackpot game and then resumes, restoring the game control state, there is a time period before the game control unit 200 next outputs a round designation command or an ending designation command, so a loading screen (initial screen) is displayed, followed by a power restoration notification, and then a presentation screen according to the command is displayed.

In this way, when the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the power restoration image displayed in the entire display area of the image display unit 114 is set to the upper layer, and image data is generated and displayed on the image display unit 114 with the reserved icon displayed in the icon display area of the image display unit 114 set to the lower layer, restricting visibility of the reserved icon in the lower layer. This makes it possible to prevent inconvenience such as player confusion after power restoration. Also, because the same display control can be performed as when the power restoration image is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control data and control load related to the display control.

In addition, even if the power recovery image restricts visibility of the reserved icon, when a special pattern storage command indicating an increase in the number of reserved items is received, image data including a reserved icon corresponding to the increase is generated. Therefore, the same display control can be performed as when the power recovery image is not displayed, making it possible to reduce the control data and control load related to the display control.

In addition, even when the power recovery image restricts visibility of the hold icon, the hold icon and background image perform a special effect. This allows the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed, making it possible to reduce the control data and control load related to the display control.

In addition, even if the power recovery image restricts visibility of the hold icon, if the number of holds increases, the hold icon is additionally displayed (increased display) through animation. This allows the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed, making it possible to reduce the control data and control load related to the display control.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 differs depending on whether the display mode is the first display mode (display mode A) or the second display mode (display modes D and F) when power is restored, but the number image of the decorative pattern 41 is set to the same number information ("753"). Therefore, even if the display mode of the decorative pattern differs depending on the display mode after power is restored, it is possible to easily grasp that the power has been restored.

In addition, in the first hold display area (first special pattern hold display 218, second special pattern hold display 219) and the second hold display area (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84), the display mode of the hold display is not changed based on the results of the pre-reading, but in the third hold display area (hold display area of image display unit 114) where the hold display is easier to see than in the first hold display area and the second hold display area, the display mode of the hold display (hold icon HI) can be changed based on the results of the pre-reading, and the power supply When the power supply stops, no hold display is performed in any of the first to third hold display areas, and after the power is restored, the hold display in the first hold display area (first special symbol hold display 218, second special symbol hold display 219) and the second hold display area (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84) resumes earlier than the hold display (visible display of the hold icon HI) in the third hold display area (hold display area of the image display unit 114). Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the power is being restored and to allow the player to grasp the number of holds at an early timing. Note that the hold display in the first hold display area may resume earlier than the hold display in the second hold display area.

In addition, the hold icon HI, which was displayed in a special display mode before the power outage, is displayed in a normal display mode after the power is restored. This eliminates the need to back up and store information indicating that the hold icon was in a special display mode in the performance control unit 300, making it possible to avoid a complex hardware configuration for the performance control unit 300.

In addition, after the power is restored, the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) resumes changing display (flashing by moving LEDs) and then the hold icon is visibly displayed. This makes it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, after the power restoration image is displayed, the initial operations (including the return operation) of the various reels (movable reels 115, sub display device, and performance button 161) are executed in a manner similar to the case where performance operations are performed at different times for each reel. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the initial operations of the various reels have been executed due to the occurrence of power restoration, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being mistaken for a performance operation.

The sub-first change indicator 81 and the sub-second change indicator 82 are configured to display a stopped state without displaying any changes during the power restoration notification, but they may display changes during the power restoration notification (after receiving the second power restoration designation command, which indicates that the special pattern is being displayed), and display a stopped state when a stop command (pattern confirmation command) is received.

(Example of when the start command cannot be received properly during a look-ahead performance)
Using Figures 104 to 106, we will explain a specific example of a case where the start command cannot be received normally during a look-ahead performance.

Figure 104 is a timing chart for when the start command cannot be received normally during the look-ahead performance, and Figures 105 and 106 are diagrams showing examples of performances at various timings in Figure 104. Note that the explanation here is for performance mode A, but since performance modes B to F are basically the same, explanations will be omitted.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 104, the first reserved number is in the state of "2", and the first special pattern display 221 displays the first special pattern and the sub-first reserved display 81 displays the first reserved number (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 218, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting hole 121, and the sub-first reserved display 83 display "2". In addition, three decorative patterns 41 and three small patterns 56 are updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display) in front of the Mode A background image during horizontal scrolling. In addition, the first reserved icon display area 70B displays the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the reserved icon HI in the special display mode (blue). In addition, the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 105(a)).

Next, at timing T1 in FIG. 104, when the look-ahead zone performance starts, the above-mentioned in-zone performance is executed. Specifically, instead of the mode A background image, the look-ahead zone background image is displayed in a horizontally scrolled state, and a zone image ZG including a text image of "ZONE" is displayed. In addition, the volume of the variable BGM is reduced and output of the zone BGM begins (see FIG. 105(b)).

Then, at the timing T2 in FIG. 104, when the central decorative pattern 41 that had been scrolling (updated and changed) temporarily stops, the speaker 156 starts to output a temporary stop sound, the character of the central decorative pattern 41 performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking its head), and all decorative patterns 41 enter a temporarily stopped state (see FIG. 105(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 104, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound stops, and when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 105(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 104, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in an animation, and the decorative pattern 41 ("523") and the small pattern 56 ("523") start to stop (see FIG. 105(e)).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 104, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation, the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation ends (see FIG. 105(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 104, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number becomes "2" to "1", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218 displays "1", and the first special symbol display 221 starts displaying the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) (see FIG. 106 (g)).

However, because the performance control unit 300 was unable to receive the start command normally, the pending display update (update of the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub first pending display 83, and the shift display of the pending icon HI) and the variable performance that should have been executed at the timing of T7 in FIG. 104 are not executed. Therefore, the stop display period of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 is extended, and the look-ahead effect performance that should have been executed for two variable performances from this variable performance is not started. However, even during the extended stop display period of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56, the horizontal scrolling of the look-ahead zone background image and the performance operation of the pending icon HI continue. (See FIG. 106 (h)). That is, the horizontal scrolling of the look-ahead zone background image continues, and the display of the zone image ZG continues. In addition, the periodic shaking operation of the pending icon HI continues.

Then, at the timing T8 in FIG. 104, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the game control unit 200 sends a stop command (symbol determination command) to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 106(i)).

However, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the stop command, the disappearance display of the icon TI and the stop display of the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56, which should normally be executed, are not executed.

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 104, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number changes from "1" to "0", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218 displays "0", and the first special symbol display 221 starts displaying the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) (see FIG. 106 (j)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in Figure 104 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the start command, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub-first hold indicator 83 will display "0", and the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 will begin (see Figure 106 (k)).

In addition, of the two reserve icons HI displayed in the first reserve icon display area 70B, the reserve icon HI (white icon) corresponding to the previous special pattern change display is erased without animation, and the reserve icon HI (blue icon) displayed in the second display section corresponding to the current special pattern change display is displayed without animation in the first display section. Then, the reserve icon HI displayed in the first display section starts to shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, and the decorative pattern 41 starts to display floating as a pre-change operation, and the small pattern 56 starts updating and changing (scrolling display, switching display) (see FIG. 106 (k)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 104 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the floating display of the decorative pattern 41, the look-ahead effect performance that should be executed for two fluctuation performances from the previous fluctuation performance starts with a delay of one performance, and a blue effect image EF is displayed around the decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 106 (l)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 104 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the reserved icon HI ends, the icon TI (white icon) is displayed. At this time, the icon change effect at the start of the change is performed and the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, and then the scrolling display (update change) of the decorative pattern 41 begins.

In this way, even if the performance control unit 300 is unable to properly receive the start command and therefore the variable performance is not executed during the variable display of the special pattern that is the target of the specified look-ahead performance (icon change performance, look-ahead zone performance), the specified look-ahead performance (icon change performance, look-ahead zone performance) is executed during the variable display of the special pattern. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the specified look-ahead performance not being executed, which can lead to a misunderstanding about the progress of the game, and makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, if the performance control unit 300 is unable to receive the start command properly and therefore the variable performance is not executed during the variable display of the special pattern that should start a specified look-ahead performance (look-ahead effect performance), the specified look-ahead performance is restricted from starting during the variable display of this special pattern, and if the variable performance is executed during the variable display of the next special pattern to be executed, the restricted look-ahead performance is started during the variable display of this special pattern. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as misunderstanding the progress of the game due to the specified look-ahead performance not being executed, and makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, if the performance control unit 300 is unable to properly receive the start command, causing the special symbol variable display to be executed but not the variable performance to be executed, the first look-ahead performance (icon change performance, look-ahead zone performance) will be executed but the second look-ahead performance (look-ahead effect performance) will not be executed. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as a misunderstanding of the progress of the game due to a specific look-ahead performance not being executed, and makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, variable BGM (suggestive performance sound) is output during the execution of a variable performance (suggestive performance) to suggest the result of the jackpot determination, and zone BGM (pre-performance sound) is output to suggest that a special game may be executed before the execution of the target variable performance that is the subject of the expectation suggestion by the look-ahead zone performance. In addition, zone BGM is output even after the target variable performance starts, and when zone BGM is output, the suggestive performance is output at a volume lower than that of the zone BGM. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect of the look-ahead zone performance and increase the interest in the game.

Note that the volume of the variable BGM is reduced while the look-ahead zone performance is being executed (while the zone BGM is being output), but the audible output of the variable BGM may also be stopped (muted) while the look-ahead zone performance is being executed.

In addition, even if the performance control unit 300 is unable to properly receive the start command and therefore a performance change that would initiate an icon change performance or a look-ahead zone performance that is executed over multiple performance changes is not executed, the icon change performance or the look-ahead zone performance may be started from the next performance change that is executed.

In addition, a look-ahead effect effect is executed as a look-ahead effect that intermittently indicates the expected degree of expectation that a special game will be executed, but instead of the look-ahead effect effect, a look-ahead countdown effect may be executed that performs a countdown effect (displaying a countdown image and outputting a countdown sound) for each variable effect, or a look-ahead chance eye effect may be executed that stops and displays so-called chance eyes (numbers that follow a certain rule, such as 556 or 667) for each variable effect, or any of these three look-ahead effects may be executed.

(Example of when a power-on command is received while a menu image is displayed)
A specific example in which a power-on command is received while a menu image is being displayed will be described with reference to FIGS.

Figure 107 is a timing chart when a power-on command is received while a menu image is being displayed, and Figure 108 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in Figure 107. Note that the explanation here is for effect mode A, but the explanations for effect modes B to F are omitted as they are basically the same.

First, at timing T0 in Figure 107, the machine is in a customer waiting state where the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed. At this time, the first special symbol display 221 displays a losing special symbol, and the image display unit 114 displays the Mode A background image scrolling horizontally (performance operation), with the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 displayed frozen at the losing result ("537") that is the stopping result of the previous variable performance. Also, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) (see Figure 108 (a)).

Next, when the effect button 161 is operated at the timing T1 in FIG. 107, the menu operation period is valid, and the image display unit 114 displays a menu image MG including multiple selection items (a "Machine Description" item that displays an explanation of the pachinko gaming machine 100, a "Performance Customization" item for customizing the effects in the variable effects, and a "Pachi Log" item for log management linked to a mobile phone) superimposed in front of the decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 108(b)).

When the power supply to the game control unit 200 is stopped due to an abnormality in the wiring connecting the power supply board 160 and the game control unit 200 (such as a broken wire or a loose connector) at the timing T2 in FIG. 107, the game control unit 200 performs processing for when the power is cut off, and the display unit 130 including the first special symbol display unit 221 goes into a non-display state. At this time, the display state of the sub information display unit 80, the image display unit 114, and the sub display device continues (see FIG. 108(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 107, when the power supply to the game control unit 200 is resumed, a checksum judgment is made as to whether the data in the game RWM area is corrupted, and if the data is corrupted, a process is performed to initialize the game control state. Then, the game control unit 200 sends power-on commands (here, a power-on command, a first special symbol storage command, and a second special symbol storage command) to the performance control unit 300. Also, information display on the display 130 (such as display of a losing special symbol on the first special symbol display 221) begins (see FIG. 108(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 107, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control unit 300 received the power-on command, a loading screen (initial screen) containing the words "NOW LOADING" is displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sub-display device, the information display on the sub-information display 80 becomes hidden for a moment, and the speaker 156 goes into a state where game sounds (variable background music, etc.) are not output (see FIG. 108(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 107, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the loading screen (initial screen) was displayed, the above-mentioned power-on notification and the initial operation (including the return operation) of the various devices (board device, frame device) are started, and information display on the sub-information display 80 is started (see FIG. 108(f)).

At this time, in the image display unit 114, in front of the Mode A background image where horizontal scrolling (performance operation) has begun, the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 are displayed in a frozen state with the initial result ("135") when the power is turned on, and the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 display "0". In addition, a power-on notification sound is output from the speaker 156, and muted output at the beginning of the variable BGM is started (see FIG. 108(f)).

When a power restoration command is received while the menu image MG is being displayed, the process is essentially the same as when a power-on command is received, except that the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 displayed on the image display unit 114 are the initial numbers ("753") that appear when power is restored, and no power-on notification sound is output.

Volume Compensation Also, if a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) is received while the volume value image OG is displayed, the process is basically the same as when a power-on command is received while the menu image MG is displayed.

In this way, if the command that the presentation control unit 300 receives from the game control unit 200 while the menu image MG is displayed on the image display unit 114 is a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command), the menu image is made invisible on the image display unit 114 and an image corresponding to the power-on command (loading screen, etc.) is displayed. This allows smooth cooperation between the game control unit 200 and the presentation control unit 300.

In this embodiment, a launch permission designation command is sent to the payout control unit 330 in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, making it possible to launch game balls, but it is also possible to send a launch permission designation command to the payout control unit 330 when the game progress control is started, so that game balls can be launched after the game is ready to be played.

In addition, in this embodiment, the payout control unit 330 can perform payout control even in a pre-start state before game progress control has begun, so it is possible to pay out game balls (ball lending) based on a payout request from a ball lending machine installed alongside the gaming machine 1, but it may also be possible to pay out game balls (ball lending) based on a payout request from the ball lending machine after game progress control has begun and the game is ready to play.

In addition, in this embodiment, since a backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control unit 330 (payout RAM 333), there is no unpaid payout ball number data remaining in the payout control unit 330 (payout RAM 333) when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on. However, a backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control unit 330 (payout RAM 333). In this case, if the unpaid payout ball number data remains in the payout control unit 330 (payout RAM 333) when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, it may be possible to pay out game balls based on this unpaid payout ball number data even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display 130 is provided outside the play area 111, but the display 130 may be provided inside the play area 111.

In addition, in this embodiment, prize balls (prize value) are awarded based on the fulfillment of the awarding conditions (a game ball entering the winning slot, starting slot, or large winning slot), but the player's balls may be managed as data and prize ball data may be awarded (added to the balls held data).

In addition, although there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect in this embodiment, multiple look-ahead zone effects with different jackpot expectancies may be provided. In this case, when two look-ahead zone effects overlap during a variable effect, the zone image of one look-ahead zone effect may be displayed across the screen at the top and/or bottom, and the zone image of the other look-ahead zone effect may be displayed across the screen at the left and/or right. In this way, two look-ahead zone effects can be achieved at the same time, improving the effect of the effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, a blackout effect is executed as a jackpot prediction effect, but instead of the blackout effect, a whiteout effect in which the image display unit 114 turns white may be executed. In this case, the basic flow of the effect may be the same as that of the blackout effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the manner in which the variable presentation is executed is basically the same in the normal game state and the specific game state (probable bonus game state, time-limited game state). However, for example, it is possible to notify the player of first information (information suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot, information regarding the execution of a special game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player during the execution of the latter part of the variable presentation consisting of a front-stage performance and a rear-stage performance in the normal game state (a case of a pre-reach performance and a reach performance, a case of a normal reach performance and a SP reach performance, a case of an SP reach performance and an SPSP reach performance, a case of a pre-reach performance and a case in which the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, a case in which the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped during a reach performance and a case in which the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, etc.) and to notify the player of second information different from the first information (additional information regarding a song that can be selected by operating the performance key 162, the status of mission completion, etc.) during the execution of the latter part of the variable presentation consisting of a front-stage performance and a rear-stage performance in the specific game state. In addition, as a variable presentation consisting of an early presentation and a late presentation in the normal game state, a common late presentation may be executed after a first early presentation, or a common late presentation may be executed after a second early presentation different from the first early presentation, and information regarding the execution of a special game may be notified in the common late presentation executed when a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first judgment is made as to whether or not to enter a special game state advantageous to the player, the right to the first judgment is stored, and when a predetermined condition is met, a second judgment is made as to whether or not to enter a special game state before the first judgment is made, and a predetermined presentation can be executed using, for example, a presentation means including the image display unit 114.
The reserved pattern corresponding to the stored right can be displayed on the image display unit 114, and when a first judgment is made for the right, a predetermined pattern corresponding to the right can be displayed on the image display unit 114. Based on the result of the second judgment, a first change effect is executed to change the reserved pattern to a first display mode suggesting that the special game state is likely to be entered, and based on the result of the first or second judgment, a second change effect is executed to change the predetermined pattern to a second display mode suggesting that the special game state is likely to be entered, and when the reserved pattern and the predetermined pattern are displayed, a predetermined suggestion effect can be executed, and the first or second change effect can be executed thereafter. When the special effect suggesting that the special game state is likely to be entered based on the result of the first judgment is not executed, if the right determined to be the special game state by the second judgment is stored, the first change effect can be executed more easily than the second change effect. This can realize an effect that changes the predetermined pattern (the pattern) and the reserved pattern that can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not a special game can be executed. When the notification effect is executed, for example, an operation enabled state is set in which operation on the effect button 161 is enabled, and if it is determined that a special game will not be executed during a first period in the specific game state, the notification effect is executed at a first rate, and if it is determined that a special game will not be executed during a second period shorter than the first period in the specific game state, the notification effect is executed at a second rate higher than the first rate. This can increase the player's interest by using the effect button 161, for example.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to perform a special performance that suggests that there is a high possibility that a jackpot game will be played, and in the special performance, there is a time when a first performance that suggests that a jackpot game will be played is performed, and a time when a second performance that suggests that a jackpot game may not be played is performed. After the second performance is performed in the special performance, whether or not it is determined that a jackpot game will be played, it is possible to perform a re-challenge performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot game will be played, and whether or not a re-challenge performance is performed, before the second performance in the special performance, it is possible to perform a suggestion performance that suggests that a re-challenge performance may be performed. The re-challenge performance is, for example, a performance that can be performed after a special performance (such as a normal reach performance, an SP reach performance, or an SPSP reach performance) suggests that the result of the special pattern lottery may be a miss. An example of a re-challenge performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance button 161. In addition, as a re-challenge performance, a mini-game by a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko game machine 100 may be performed in the performance image. In addition, as a re-challenge effect, a battle between characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 may be performed in the effect image. This can increase the interest of the game in relation to the execution of the re-challenge effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, decorative patterns are displayed in a changing manner in conjunction with the changing display of special patterns, and decorative patterns indicating the judgment result are displayed in a stopped state in conjunction with the stopped display of special patterns, and during the changing display of decorative patterns, which is performed in response to a determination that a special game will be played, a preview performance can be executed to notify the player that a special game will be played.
Then, when a determination result indicating that a special game is to be executed is obtained, one of a plurality of variation patterns including a first variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is a first time and a second variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is a second time longer than the first time is selected. Furthermore, when the first variation pattern is selected, a first preview performance is executed as a preview performance with a first probability, and when the second variation pattern is selected, a second preview performance different from the first preview performance is executed as a preview performance with a second probability different from the first probability, and when the second preview performance is executed, during the period from when the variable display of the special symbol starts to when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a decorative pattern of a first mode is displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol starts, and a decorative pattern of a second mode smaller than the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed during the execution of a predetermined performance during the variable display of the special symbol, and when the first preview performance is executed, the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed while the decorative pattern of the second mode is not displayed, and when the first preview performance is executed, the probability that the game is controlled in a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the special game is executed is higher than the probability that the game is controlled in the first game state. This makes it possible to execute a performance with high interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a changing manner in conjunction with the changing display of the special pattern, and the decorative pattern 41 indicating the judgment result is displayed in a stopped state in conjunction with the stopped display of the special pattern, and during the changing display of the decorative pattern 41, which is performed in response to a determination that a special game will be executed, a preview performance can be executed to notify the player that a special game will be executed.
Then, when a determination result indicating that a special game is to be executed is obtained, one of a plurality of variation patterns including a first variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is a first time and a second variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is a second time longer than the first time is selected.
The preview performance executed at a predetermined execution timing and the preview performance executed at a plurality of execution timings can be executed, and when the first variation pattern is selected, the first preview performance is executed as the preview performance with a first probability, and when the second variation pattern is selected, the second preview performance different from the first preview performance is executed as the preview performance with a second probability different from the first probability, and when the second preview performance is executed, during the period from when the variable display of the special pattern starts to when the special pattern is stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed when the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 starts, and the decorative pattern 41 of the second mode smaller than the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed during the execution of a predetermined performance during the variable display of the special pattern, and when the first preview performance is executed, the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed while the decorative pattern 41 of the second mode is not displayed, and the first preview performance is executed without displaying the decorative pattern 41 of the second mode. This makes it possible to execute a performance with high interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a changing manner in conjunction with the changing display of the special pattern, and the decorative pattern 41 indicating the judgment result is displayed in a stopped state in conjunction with the stopped display of the special pattern, and during the changing display of the decorative pattern 41, which is performed in response to a determination that a special game will be executed, a preview performance can be executed to notify the player that a special game will be executed.
Then, when a determination result indicating that a special game is to be executed is obtained, one of a plurality of variation patterns including a first variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is a first time and a second variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is a second time longer than the first time is selected. In addition, when the first variation pattern is selected, the first preview performance is executed as the preview performance with a first probability, and when the second variation pattern is selected, the second preview performance different from the first preview performance is executed as the preview performance with a second probability different from the first probability, and when the second preview performance is executed, during the period from when the variable display of the special pattern starts to when the special pattern is stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed when the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 starts, and the decorative pattern 41 of the second mode smaller than the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed during the execution of a predetermined performance during the variable display of the special pattern, and the first preview performance may include a display of the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode while notifying that a special game will be executed without displaying the decorative pattern 41 of the second mode, and the second preview performance may be executed more easily when the pre-performance is executed than when the pre-performance is not executed. This makes it possible to execute a performance with high interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a varying manner in conjunction with the varying display of the special pattern, and the decorative pattern 41 indicating the judgment result is displayed in a stopped state in conjunction with the stopped display of the special pattern. During the varying display of the decorative pattern 41, which is performed in response to a determination that a special game will be played, a preview effect can be executed to notify the player that a special game will be played, and a specific effect can be executed during a specific period.
Then, when a determination result indicating that a special game is to be executed is obtained, one of a plurality of variation patterns including a first variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is a first time and a second variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is a second time longer than the first time is selected. Furthermore, when the first variation pattern is selected, the first preview performance is executed as the preview performance with a first probability, and when the second variation pattern is selected, a second preview performance different from the first preview performance is executed as the preview performance with a second probability different from the first probability, and when the second preview performance is executed, during the period from when the variable display of the special pattern starts to when the special pattern is stopped and displayed, when the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 starts, the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed, and during the execution of a predetermined performance during the variable display of the special pattern, the decorative pattern 41 of the second mode is displayed, and when the first preview performance is executed, the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed while the decorative pattern 41 of the second mode is not displayed, and the first preview performance is executed, and a specific performance can be executed as the preview performance. This makes it possible to execute a performance with high interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a changing manner in conjunction with the changing display of the special pattern, and the decorative pattern 41 indicating the judgment result is displayed in a stopped state in conjunction with the stopped display of the special pattern, and during the changing display of the decorative pattern 41, which is performed in response to a determination that a special game will be executed, a preview performance can be executed to notify the player that a special game will be executed.
Then, when a determination result indicating that a special game is to be executed is obtained, one of a plurality of variation patterns including a first variation pattern in which the variation time of the special pattern is a first time, a second variation pattern in which the variation time of the special pattern is a second time longer than the first time, and a third variation pattern in which the variation time of the special pattern is a third time longer than the second time is selected. Also, when the first variation pattern is selected, the first preview performance is executed as the preview performance with a first probability, when the second variation pattern is selected, the second preview performance different from the first preview performance is executed as the preview performance with a second probability different from the first probability, while the first preview performance is not executed, when the third variation pattern is selected, the second preview performance is executed with a third probability different from both the first probability and the second probability, when the second preview performance is executed, during the period from when the variable display of the special pattern starts to when the special pattern is stopped and displayed, when the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 starts, the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed, and during the execution of a predetermined performance during the variable display of the special pattern, the decorative pattern 41 of the second mode smaller than the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed, and when the first preview performance is executed, the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed, while the decorative pattern 41 of the second mode is not displayed, and the first preview performance is executed. This makes it possible to execute a performance with high interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of first movement pattern data indicating the movement pattern at the start of the change of one of the plurality of performance patterns is stored, a plurality of second movement pattern data indicating the movement pattern at the end of the change of one of the plurality of performance patterns is stored, and performance pattern data defining a combination of performances by the performance patterns using the first movement pattern data and the second movement pattern data is stored.
Then, the variable presentation may be controlled based on the presentation pattern data, the first operation pattern data is used to control the operation at the start of the variation of one presentation pattern, and the second operation pattern data is used to control the operation at the end of the variation of one presentation pattern, and the operation at the start of the variation of one of the multiple presentation patterns differs according to each of the multiple first operation pattern data, and the operation at the end of the variation of one of the multiple presentation patterns differs according to each of the multiple second operation pattern data. This makes it possible to simplify the control of the presentation.

In this embodiment, a plurality of first movement pattern data showing a movement pattern at the start of the variation of one of the plurality of performance patterns is stored, a plurality of second movement pattern data showing a movement pattern at the end of the variation of one of the plurality of performance patterns is stored, and a third movement pattern data showing a movement pattern during the variation of one of the plurality of performance patterns is stored.Furthermore, the presenter stores performance pattern data that defines a combination of performances by the performance patterns using the first movement pattern data, the second movement pattern data, and the third movement pattern data.
Then, based on the performance pattern data, the variable performance is controlled, the first operation pattern data is used to control the operation at the start of the variation of one performance pattern, the third operation pattern data is used to control the operation during the variation of one performance pattern, and the second operation pattern data is used to control the operation at the end of the variation of one performance pattern. Also, the operation at the start of the variation of one of the multiple performance patterns differs according to each of the multiple first operation pattern data, and the operation at the end of the variation of one of the multiple performance patterns differs according to each of the multiple second operation pattern data, and the first operation pattern data includes the first operation pattern data A and the first operation pattern data B. And, when the multiple performance patterns are caused to start varying based on the result of the special game judgment, it may be configured such that one of the multiple performance patterns is caused to start varying using the first operation pattern data A, and another of the multiple performance patterns is caused to start varying using the first operation pattern data B. This makes it possible to simplify the control of the performance.

[Pattern change action performance of decorative pattern 41]
Next, the pattern change action presentation of the decorative pattern 41 will be described.
In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, it is possible to execute a pattern change presentation (pattern change action presentation) in which the pre-change operation and the during-change operation each have their own characteristics.
The symbol change action presentation includes a default action and a special action different from the default action. In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the probability of executing the symbol change presentation using the special action is increased compared to when a jackpot is lost. In the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment, the special action is executed to make the player expect to win the jackpot.
In addition, the pattern change action presentation can be executed in appropriate combination with various pattern change presentations in this embodiment.

For example, in the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment, in the pattern change presentation executed when the lottery result is a jackpot, a special action is executed, so that the player can expect to win the jackpot in the pattern change presentation. Here, the expectation of the jackpot may be made different depending on the type of special action described later. Furthermore, a special action may be provided that is used only when a jackpot is determined, and is not used when a loss is determined.
Furthermore, for example, when it is determined by a pre-determination that there is a reserved ball that will win a jackpot, a special action may be executed as a continuous advance notice performance in the pattern change performance before the pattern change is performed for the reserved ball. For example, when the pattern change performance using the same type of special action is executed consecutively (for example, two or more times or three or more times), the expectation of a jackpot may be increased compared to when the special action is executed only once. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot may be increased as the pattern change using the same type of special action is executed more consecutively.

Next, the default actions and special actions will be specifically described.
In the following explanation, the pattern change effect in the time-saving state will be used as an example, but the pattern change action effect may also be executed in the non-time-saving state.

(default action)
As shown in FIG. 109(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114.
Then, as shown in Fig. 109 (2), the decorative pattern 41 starts to change with the start of the next special pattern change display. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 performs a pre-change action of moving upwards as if floating for a moment. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 109 (3), the decorative pattern 41 starts scrolling vertically downwards. In this example, all three decorative patterns 41 move together (synchronously).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 109(4), the decorative pattern 41 scrolls vertically downward at high speed.

109(5), the scroll speed of the decorative symbols 41 gradually decreases. In this example, all three decorative symbols 41 move together (synchronously).
Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (6), the three decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop, and an illuminated image HG that creates an illuminating effect behind the decorative patterns 41 is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds).
Then, as shown in Fig. 109(7), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped with the stop of the variation of the special symbols. In the example shown in Fig. 109(7), the three decorative symbols 41 are misses, and a miss is shown as the lottery result.
In addition, when the lottery result of the jackpot is indicated, after the high-speed scrolling of FIG. 109 (4), for example, a reach effect (including an SP reach effect and an SPSP reach effect) is executed, and the display stops at a decorative pattern 41 of the same number.

Next, the special actions will be described in detail. The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment has four types of special actions: "reverse vertical scroll," "horizontal rotation change," "enlargement change," and "reel change."

(Special action (reverse vertical scroll))
As shown in FIG. 110(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114.
Then, as shown in FIG. 110(2), the decorative pattern 41 starts to change with the start of the next special pattern change display. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 performs a pre-change action of moving downward as if sinking for a moment. After that, as shown in FIG. 110(3), the decorative pattern 41 starts scrolling by moving vertically toward the upper side. In this example, all three decorative patterns 41 move together (synchronized). Here, the small pattern 56 of this embodiment changes vertically and scrolls downward. Therefore, when the decorative pattern 41 is a special action and performs reverse vertical scrolling, the direction of change (update) between the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 will be different.
110(4), the decorative symbols 41 scroll vertically upward at high speed. In this example, the three decorative symbols 41 move together (synchronously).

After that, as shown in Fig. 110(5), the speed of scrolling of the two decorative patterns 41 gradually decreases. Then, as shown in Fig. 110(6), the doublet decorative pattern 41, which is a set of two decorative patterns 41, temporarily stops. When the doublet decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, a luminous image HG is displayed behind the doublet decorative pattern 41 for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds).
110(7), the two decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reduced size and are moved to the corner of the screen.
Then, as shown in FIG. 110(8), when the lottery result indicates a big win, the decorative pattern 41 of the same number is fixed and stopped along with the stopping of the variation of the special pattern.
In addition, if a losing lottery result is shown, after the high-speed scrolling of Figure 110 (4), the decorative pattern 41 of the losing number is fixed and stopped.

(Special Action (Horizontal Rotation Variation))
As shown in FIG. 111 (1), as the variation of the previous special pattern ends, the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114.
Then, as shown in FIG. 111(2), the decorative pattern 41 starts to change with the start of the change display of the next special pattern. At this time, the three decorative patterns 41 perform a pre-change action of rotating horizontally to the right for a moment at each position. In addition, a number obtained by adding "+1" to the number of the currently displayed pattern is displayed behind each decorative pattern 41. Specifically, when the numbers "1", "2", and "3" are displayed as the three decorative patterns 41, the numbers "2", "3", and "4" are displayed behind each decorative pattern 41, respectively. The numbers in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the numbers behind it change direction according to the horizontal rotation (rotation) of the decorative pattern 41.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (3), the three decorative patterns 41 each start rotating horizontally in the opposite direction, to the left. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 111 (4), the three decorative patterns 41 each rotate horizontally at high speed.

After that, as shown in Fig. 111 (5), the horizontal rotation speed of the three decorative patterns 41 gradually decreases. Then, as shown in Fig. 111 (6), the decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop, and a light-emitting image HG that creates a light-emitting effect behind the decorative patterns 41 is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds).
Then, as shown in Fig. 111 (7), the decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped when the special symbols stop varying. In the example shown in Fig. 111 (7), three decorative symbols 41 are misses, and a miss is displayed as the lottery result.
In addition, when the lottery result of the jackpot is indicated, after the high-speed horizontal rotation as shown in FIG. 111 (4), for example, a reach effect (including an SP reach effect and an SPSP reach effect) is executed, and the reel stops at a decorative pattern 41 of the same number.

(Special Action (Expanded Change))
As shown in FIG. 112(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114.
112(2), the decorative symbols 41 start to change as the next special symbol starts to change. At this time, the three decorative symbols 41 each perform a pre-change operation in which the display size is enlarged compared to before the change starts.
112(3), the three decorative patterns 41 start scrolling downward while still enlarged. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 112(4), the three decorative patterns 41 each scroll downward at high speed vertically while still enlarged.

112(5), the decorative pattern 41 remains enlarged while the scroll speed gradually decreases. Then, as shown in FIG. 112(6), the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops and a light-emitting image HG that provides a light-emitting effect is displayed behind the decorative pattern 41 for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds).
Then, as shown in FIG. 112(7), the decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped with the stop of the special symbols. In the example shown in FIG. 112(7), the three decorative symbols 41 are misses, and the lottery result shows a miss. Note that, when the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped, they are reduced from the enlarged state and displayed back to their original size (for example, the size before the start of the change).
In addition, when the lottery result of the jackpot is indicated, after the high-speed scrolling of FIG. 112 (4), for example, a reach effect (including an SP reach effect and an SPSP reach effect) is executed, and the display stops at a decorative pattern 41 of the same number.

(Special action (rotary movement))
As shown in FIG. 113(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114.
Then, as shown in FIG. 113(2), the decorative symbols 41 start to change with the start of the display of the next special symbol. At this time, the three decorative symbols 41 displayed on the screen are reduced in size, and a number obtained by adding "+1" to the number and a number obtained by subtracting "-1" from the number are displayed above and below the three decorative symbols 41 displayed on the screen, respectively. That is, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed like slot reels.
Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 113(3), scrolling begins vertically, making the reels appear as if they are spinning.
Then, as shown in FIG. 113(4), the three decorative patterns 41 are each scrolled vertically downward at high speed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113(5), the scrolling speed of the three decorative patterns 41 gradually decreases.
113(6), the doublet decorative pattern 41, which is a set of two decorative patterns 41, is temporarily stopped. When the doublet decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, a luminous image HG is displayed behind the doublet decorative pattern 41 for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds).
113(7), the two decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reduced size and moved to the corner of the screen.
Then, as shown in FIG. 113(8), when the lottery result indicates a big win, the decorative pattern 41 stops as a fixed repeat number decorative pattern 41 in conjunction with the stopping of the variation of the special pattern.
In addition, if a losing lottery result is shown, after the high-speed scrolling of Figure 113 (4), the decorative pattern 41 of the losing result is fixed and stopped.

Next, an example of a pattern change action presentation in a no-time-reduction state will be described.
In this example, the decorative pattern 41 used from the start of the variable display in the no-time-saving state is different in appearance from the decorative pattern 41 used from the start of the variable display in the time-saving state. Specifically, the decorative pattern 41 used in the time-saving game state is a number image SG surrounded by a circle image (for example, see FIG. 109(1)). On the other hand, the decorative pattern 41 in the no-time-saving state is a character image CG and a number image SG surrounded by a circle image.

In the example of the pattern change presentation in the no time-saving state, the default action is the same as the series of actions described with reference to FIG. 109, except that the form of the decorative pattern 41 is different. In contrast, the pattern change action presentation in the pattern change presentation in the no time-saving state is as follows.

(Special action (reverse vertical scroll))
As shown in FIG. 114(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114.
114(2), the decorative symbol 41 starts to change as the next special symbol starts to change. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 performs a pre-change action of moving downward as if sinking for a moment.
After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (3), the decorative pattern 41 starts scrolling vertically upward. In this example, all three decorative patterns 41 move together (synchronously). Here, the small pattern 56 of this embodiment changes vertically and scrolls downward. Therefore, when the decorative pattern 41 is a special action and performs reverse vertical scrolling, the direction of change (update) between the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 is different.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 114 (4), the decorative pattern 41 scrolls vertically upward at high speed.

114(5), the speed of scrolling of the two decorative symbols 41 gradually decreases, and the two decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop at a line of doublets. That is, a normal reach effect is executed.
After that, as shown in FIG. 114(6), the scrolling speed of the central decorative pattern 41 gradually decreases.
114(7), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped with the stop of the special symbols. In this example, the three decorative symbols 41 are misses, and a miss is displayed as the lottery result.

When the lottery result of the jackpot is shown, after the reach effect shown in FIG. 114 (5), for example, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed, and finally, the decorative pattern 41 with the repeated numbers is confirmed and stopped. Also, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a reduced size, or only a number image SG surrounded by a circle image may be used without using a character image CG.

In addition, even in the pattern change performance without time reduction, in addition to the above-mentioned "reverse vertical scroll", it is possible to execute special actions such as "horizontal rotation change" (see Figure 111), "enlargement change" (see Figure 112), and "reel change" (see Figure 113).

[Event 1 when a command cannot be received]
115(a) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the events and the chance eye light emission effects when no command is received. Specifically, FIG. 115(a) is a timing chart when a command is received, and FIG. 115(b) is a timing chart when no command is received.

Here, the chance eye light emitting effect is an effect in which a chance eye display effect is executed and a chance eye light emitting image is displayed.
The chance eye display effect is an effect that displays the chance eye. Here, the chance eye is three decorative patterns 41 combined with different patterns of the same color. The chance eye display effect, for example, notifies or suggests that there is a high possibility of a big win in the next or subsequent variable display of the special pattern. The chance eye display effect is one aspect of the advance notice effect. The predetermined same color may be any color. As the chance eye, at least a part of each of the three decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in the same color. For example, as the chance eye display effect, the three decorative patterns 41 may be changed to green in their entirety. Note that the chance eye display effect can be regarded as a same-color effect that displays multiple performance patterns in a predetermined same-color pattern in a manner that notifies that a special game will not be performed. In addition, the execution timing of the chance eye display effect is not limited to when the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. For example, the chance eye display effect may be performed when the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary, or the chance eye display effect may be performed during the variation of the decorative pattern 41. Also, for example, the decorative pattern 41 may start to change after the chance eye display effect is performed, or the chance eye display effect may be performed immediately after the start of the change of the decorative pattern 41. Also, for example, after the start of the change of the decorative pattern 41, the chance eye display effect may be performed and then the reach may be established. Moreover, when any chance eye display effect is performed, the chance eye light emitting image described below may be displayed.

The chance eye light-emitting image is an image for making the player see the three decorative patterns 41, which are the chance eye, as if they are emitting light. The chance eye light-emitting image is, for example, an image that imitates light. The chance eye light-emitting image may be displayed in any color. In the illustrated example, when the chance eye is displayed, the chance eye light-emitting image is displayed around the area in which the decorative pattern 41, which is temporarily stopped, is displayed when the decorative pattern 41 constituting the chance eye is temporarily stopped. The chance eye light-emitting image may not be displayed around the area in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, but may be displayed near the area in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed. The chance eye light-emitting image may be displayed in the entirety or part of the area in which the decorative pattern 41 constituting the chance eye is displayed. The chance eye light-emitting image may not be displayed when the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped while the center decorative pattern 41 is not temporarily stopped, but may be displayed when the three decorative patterns 41, which are the chance eye, are temporarily stopped.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, commands are sent from the game control unit 200 to the presentation control unit 300 as the game progresses. Here, for example, if an event such as a communication error occurs between the game control unit 200 and the presentation control unit 300, the presentation control unit 300 may not be able to receive the command sent by the game control unit 200. In other words, when certain conditions are met, the presentation control unit 300 may not be able to properly receive the command from the game control unit 200.

Below, with reference to Figures 115(a) and (b), we will explain the processing of the game control unit 200 and the performance control unit 300 when the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command. Specifically, first, with reference to Figure 115(a), we will explain the processing when a command is received. Then, with reference to Figure 115(b), we will explain the processing when a command cannot be received.

In the following description, it is assumed that the fluctuation start command and the pre-determination result command include a command for specifying the number of reservations, i.e., a number-of-reservations designation command.
In addition, the chance eye light emission effect in the following description is executed according to the scenario of the look-ahead effect, that is, the schedule data of the look-ahead effect. Here, the schedule data of the look-ahead effect specifically specifies the effect content to be executed for each of the multiple consecutive pattern changes.

The schedule data for the look-ahead performance in the illustrated example specifies that the chance eye light-emitting performance is executed in each of three consecutive pattern changes, including the pattern change (the change in question) executed at the time of winning (see t13, t15, and t17 in the figure). The schedule data for the look-ahead performance also specifies the color of the chance eye light-emitting image displayed in each pattern change. For example, the schedule data for the look-ahead performance specifies that a blue chance eye light-emitting image is displayed in the first and second chance eye light-emitting performances, and that a green chance eye light-emitting image is displayed in the third chance eye light-emitting performance.

The performance control unit 300 has multiple schedule data in advance, and selects and sets one of the schedule data in response to the pre-determination result command. In addition, although an example is described here in which the schedule data specifies a performance for three consecutive pattern changes including the relevant change, this is not limiting. For example, the schedule data may specify a performance for multiple pattern changes that do not include the relevant change.

Now, as shown in FIG. 115(a), when a command is received, the game control unit 200 starts changing the special symbols (see t11 in the figure). At this time, the game control unit 200 sends a change start command to the performance control unit 300. Then, upon receiving the change start command, the performance control unit 300 starts changing the decorative symbols.

In addition, here, when the special pattern starts to change, the reserved number is "2". That is, the reserved number recognized by the game control unit 200 is "2". Also, the change start command sent by the game control unit 200 includes a reserved number designation command, and this reserved number designation command specifies the reserved number as "2". Therefore, the presentation control unit 300, which receives the change start command, recognizes the reserved number as "2". In addition, in this case, the reserved numbers recognized by both the game control unit 200 and the presentation control unit 300 match each other.

Then, when the ball enters the first starting hole 121 (wins) (see t12 in the figure), the game control unit 200 transmits a pre-determination result command. The performance control unit 300, which receives this pre-determination result command, performs processing to execute the chance eye light-up performance, which is one form of advance notice performance. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 sets schedule data for the look-ahead performance.

Furthermore, with the winning of the first starting hole 121 (see t12 in the figure), the reserved number recognized by the game control unit 200 becomes "3". Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 recognizes the reserved number as "3" by receiving a pre-determination result command that includes a reserved number designation command.

Then, the performance control unit 300 executes a chance eye light-up performance at the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (see t13 in the figure). Then, although not shown in the figure, the game control unit 200 sends a change stop command to the performance control unit 300 at the timing when the special symbol stops changing. In response to this, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol.

Then, when the game control unit 200 sends the next change start command to the performance control unit 300, the performance control unit 300 starts changing the decorative pattern (see t14 in the figure). The performance control unit 300 also executes the chance eye light-up performance at the timing when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see t15 in the figure). Then, although not shown in the figure, when the game control unit 200 sends a change stop command to the performance control unit 300, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative pattern. Then, when the next change start command is sent, the performance control unit 300 starts changing the decorative pattern (see t16 in the figure), and then executes the chance eye light-up performance (see t17 in the figure).

Next, referring to FIG. 115(b), we will explain the processing when a command cannot be received. Note that the processing of the game control unit 200 shown in FIG. 115(b) is the same as the processing of the game control unit 200 shown in FIG. 115(a).

In the example of FIG. 115(b), an event occurs in which the performance control unit 300 is unable to receive commands from the game control unit 200 between the ball entering the first starting hole 121 and the timing when the next fluctuation start command is received (see t12 to t14 in the figure). As a result, the performance control unit 300 does not receive the fluctuation start command (see t14 in the figure). Furthermore, the event in which the performance control unit 300 is unable to receive commands from the game control unit 200 is resolved between the timing when the next fluctuation start command is received (see t14 in the figure) and the timing when the next fluctuation start command is received (see t16 in the figure). As a result, the performance control unit 300 receives the next fluctuation start command (see t16 in the figure).

Now, as shown in FIG. 115(b), even if the command cannot be received, similarly to FIG. 115(a) above, after the special symbol starts to vary (see t11 in the figure), the game control unit 200 sends a pre-determination result command to the performance control unit 300 when the ball enters the first starting hole 121 (see t12 in the figure). Then, the performance control unit 300 executes the chance eye light-up performance (see t13 in the figure).

Then, the game control unit 200 stops the fluctuation of the special symbol and starts the fluctuation of the next special symbol (see t14 in the figure). Normally, the performance control unit 300 would receive a fluctuation stop command and a fluctuation start command at this timing, firmly stop the temporarily stopped (oscillating) decorative symbol, and start the next fluctuation. However, in this example, due to the occurrence of an event that prevents the performance control unit 300 from receiving a command from the game control unit 200, the performance control unit 300 does not receive the command (see the cross in the figure). Therefore, after executing the chance eye light-up performance, the performance control unit 300 does not firmly stop the oscillating decorative symbol, and allows the decorative symbol to continue to oscillate.

Also, because the next special symbol has started to change (see t14 in the figure), the reserved number recognized by the game control unit 200 becomes "2". On the other hand, since the performance control unit 300 has not received the change start command including the reserved number designation command, it does not recognize that the reserved number will become "2", and continues to recognize the reserved number as "3". In other words, the reserved number recognized by the performance control unit 300 is different from the reserved number that should be recognized. In other words, the reserved numbers recognized by both the game control unit 200 and the performance control unit 300 do not match each other. In this state, even if it is the timing to temporarily stop the decorative symbol (see t15 in the figure), the performance control unit 300 does not execute the chance eye light-up performance (see the cross in the figure).

Then, when the game control unit 200 sends the next fluctuation start command to the performance control unit 300, the issue where the performance control unit 300 cannot receive commands from the game control unit 200 has been resolved, so the performance control unit 300 receives the fluctuation start command and starts fluctuating the decorative patterns (see t16 in the figure). Furthermore, upon receiving the fluctuation start command, the performance control unit 300 recognizes the reserved number as "1". To explain further, upon receiving the reserved number designation command included in the fluctuation start command, the performance control unit 300 changes the recognized reserved number from "3" to "1".

Here, in the case where a command is received, when the reserved number designation command included in the fluctuation start command is received, the reserved number recognized by the performance control unit 300 decreases by 1. However, in the example in FIG. 115(b), the reserved number changes from "3" to "1", that is, the reserved number decreases by 2, which is a change in the reserved number that is different from the case where a command is received. In this way, when a situation different from the original change in the reserved number is recognized, the performance control unit 300 does not execute the chance eye light-up performance. In other words, when the performance control unit 300 detects an abnormality in the recognized reserved number, it prohibits the chance eye light-up performance. To explain further, when a difference occurs between the reserved number recognized by the game control unit 200 and the performance control unit 300, the performance control unit 300 performs a process to reset all the schedule data of the look-ahead performance. In the example shown in the figure, by performing this reset process, even if it is the timing when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see t17 in the figure), the performance control unit 300 does not execute the chance eye light-up performance set in the schedule data of the look-ahead performance (see the cross mark in the figure). That is, the scheduled light emission performance, the chance eye light emission performance, is not performed. Also, as described above, when an event occurs in which the change start command cannot be received, the performance control unit 300 may not execute the disappearance performance (see FIG. 82(e)) when the next change start command is received and the change performance of the decorative pattern 41 is started. That is, when an event occurs in which the change start command cannot be received, the performance control unit 300 may omit the disappearance performance that was performed when the event in which the change start command cannot be received does not occur. Also, when an event occurs in which the change start command cannot be received, the performance control unit 300 may shorten the execution time of the shift performance (see FIG. 46(3)) performed when the next change start command is received and the change performance of the decorative pattern 41 is started, compared to when the event in which the change start command cannot be received does not occur. Also, when an event occurs in which the change start command cannot be received, the performance control unit 300 may omit the shift performance.

If an event occurs in which a command cannot be received normally as described above, and the process of resetting the schedule data for the look-ahead performance is not performed, a malfunction may occur, such as the chance eye light-emitting performance being executed for a variation other than the one that would normally execute the chance eye light-emitting performance. In these cases, it may result in a situation where an unintended variation provokes the player, or an intended variation does not provoke the player. Therefore, in the illustrated example, in order to avoid these situations, the process of resetting the schedule data for the look-ahead performance is performed. To explain further, in the illustrated example, the chance eye light-emitting performance is prevented from being executed even if it is not a so-called look-ahead variation that is the target of the schedule data for the look-ahead performance.

Figures 116(a) and (b) are diagrams explaining the relationship between events when a command cannot be received and the reach light-emitting effect. Specifically, Figure 116(a) is a timing chart when a command is received, and Figure 116(b) is a timing chart when a command cannot be received. Here, the reach light-emitting effect is an effect that displays the left and right decorative patterns 41, which are reach eyes, and the reach eye light-emitting image.

Here, the reach eye light-emitting image is an image for making the player see the left and right decorative patterns 41, which are reach eyes, as if they are emitting light. The reach eye light-emitting image is, for example, an image that imitates light. The reach eye light-emitting image may be displayed in any color. The reach eye light-emitting image is displayed, for example, in the vicinity of the area in which the left and right decorative patterns 41, which are reach eyes, are displayed in the image display area of the image display unit 114. More specifically, the reach eye light-emitting image is displayed in the vicinity of the area in which the left decorative pattern 41 is displayed and in the vicinity of the area in which the right decorative pattern 41 is displayed. The reach eye light-emitting image is displayed around the area in which the left and right decorative patterns 41, which are reach eyes, are displayed. The reach eye light-emitting image may be displayed in the entirety or part of the area in which the left and right decorative patterns 41, which are reach eyes, are displayed. The reach eye light-emitting image of this embodiment is displayed when a reach is established.

Below, with reference to Figures 116(a) and (b), other processing by the game control unit 200 and the performance control unit 300 when the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command will be explained. Specifically, first, with reference to Figure 116(a), the processing when a command is received will be explained, and then with reference to Figure 116(b), the processing when a command cannot be received will be explained.

The processing of the game control unit 200 shown in Figs. 116(a) and 116(b) is the same as the processing of the game control unit 200 shown in Figs. 115(a) and 115(b). In addition, the performance control unit 300 shown in Figs. 116(a) and 116(b) executes reach light emission performance for each variation.

First, as shown in FIG. 116(a), the game control unit 200 starts changing the special symbols (see t21 in the figure), and the game control unit 200 sends a change start command to the performance control unit 300. Then, the performance control unit 300 starts changing the decorative symbols. At this time, the number of reserved symbols recognized by the game control unit 200 and the performance control unit 300 is "2".

Then, when the ball enters the first starting hole 121 (see t22 in the figure), the game control unit 200 sends a pre-determination result command. Note that, unlike the example shown in Figure 115 above, in the example shown in Figure 116, the performance control unit 300 does not set schedule data for the pre-reading performance.

Then, the performance control unit 300 executes a reach light emission performance at a predetermined timing (see t23 in the figure). Then, although not shown in the figure, the game control unit 200 sends a change stop command to the performance control unit 300 at the timing when the change of the special symbol stops. In response to this, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol.

Then, when the game control unit 200 sends the next change start command to the performance control unit 300, the performance control unit 300 starts changing the decorative symbols (see t24 in the figure). The performance control unit 300 also executes a reach light-up performance at a specified timing (see t25 in the figure). Then, although not shown in the figure, when a change stop command is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300, the performance control unit 300 confirms and stops the decorative symbols. Then, when the next change start command is sent, the performance control unit 300 starts changing the decorative symbols (see t26 in the figure), and then executes a reach light-up performance at a specified timing (see t27 in the figure).

Next, referring to FIG. 116(b), the processing in the case where the command cannot be received will be described. In the illustrated example, as in the example shown in FIG. 115, an event occurs in which the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200 between the ball entering the first starting hole 121 and the timing of receiving the next fluctuation start command (see t22 to t24 in the figure). As a result, the performance control unit 300 cannot receive the fluctuation start command (see t24 in the figure). In the illustrated example, the event in which the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200 is resolved after the timing of receiving the next fluctuation start command (see t24 in the figure) and before the timing of receiving the next fluctuation start command (see t26 in the figure). As a result, the performance control unit 300 receives the next fluctuation start command (see t26 in the figure).

First, as in FIG. 116(a) above, in FIG. 116(b) as well, after the special symbols start to vary (see t21 in the figure), when the ball enters the first starting hole 121, the game control unit 200 sends a pre-determination result command to the performance control unit 300 (see t22 in the figure). Then, the performance control unit 300 executes a reach light emission performance at a predetermined timing (see t23 in the figure).

Then, the game control unit 200 stops the fluctuation of the special symbol and starts the fluctuation of the next special symbol (see t24 in the figure). Normally, the performance control unit 300 receives the fluctuation stop command and the fluctuation start command at this timing, stops the temporarily stopped decorative symbol, and starts the next fluctuation. However, in this example, due to the occurrence of an event in which the performance control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200, the performance control unit 300 cannot receive the command (see the cross in the figure). Therefore, the performance control unit 300 does not stop the decorative symbol, but continues the swinging state. In addition, the reserved numbers recognized by both the game control unit 200 and the performance control unit 300 do not match each other. In this state, even if it is the timing to execute the next reach light-emitting performance (see t25 in the figure), the performance control unit 300 does not execute the reach light-emitting performance (see the cross in the figure).

When the game control unit 200 transmits the next change start command to the performance control unit 300, the event that the performance control unit 300 cannot receive commands from the game control unit 200 has been resolved, so the performance control unit 300 receives the change start command and starts changing the decorative pattern (see t26 in the figure). In addition, the performance control unit 300 recognizes the reserved number as "1" by receiving the change start command including the reserved number designation command. Here, the performance control unit 300 recognizes a change in the reserved number that is different from when a command is received, that is, the reserved number changes from "3" to "1" in response to the reserved number designation command. However, unlike the case shown in FIG. 115(b) above, the performance control unit 300 performs processing without imposing any restrictions on the reach performance. In other words, the performance control unit 300 executes the reach light emission performance (see t27) at a predetermined timing.

As described above, unlike the case shown in FIG. 115(b), even if a command cannot be received, the reach light emission performance is executed according to the next fluctuation start command received after the command was not received. This simplifies the processing of the performance control unit 300 when a command cannot be received, as compared to the mode in which special processing is executed when a command cannot be received, for example, as shown in FIG. 115(b) above.

As shown in FIG. 115(b) above, the control to reset the schedule data of the look-ahead performance is not limited to the case where a chance eye light-emitting performance, i.e., a light-emitting performance using a decorative pattern, is set in the schedule data of the look-ahead performance. For example, a reserved change performance, i.e., a look-ahead performance using a variable image 51 and a reserved image 52, may be set in the schedule data of the look-ahead performance.

In addition, decorative patterns are images that players are more likely to notice than variable images 51 and reserved images 52. Therefore, as in the example shown in FIG. 115(b) above, by imposing a prohibition on executing a look-ahead performance using decorative patterns, player misconceptions are more effectively suppressed. To explain further, players are likely to focus on decorative patterns, and by performing a light-emitting performance using decorative patterns even though the look-ahead variation is not the target of the schedule data for the look-ahead performance, players are prevented from mistakenly expecting a special game to be played.

In addition, in the above explanation, the control by the performance control unit 300 to reset the schedule data of the look-ahead performance has been described, but this is not limited to this. In other words, even if the command cannot be received, the performance control unit 300 may control to execute the look-ahead performance according to the schedule data of the look-ahead performance without resetting the schedule data of the look-ahead performance. This type of control simplifies the processing of the performance control unit 300 compared to when the performance control unit 300 controls to reset the schedule data of the look-ahead performance.

In addition, in the above explanation, it has been described that the fluctuation start command and the pre-determination result command include a reserved number designation command, but this is not limited to this. The reserved number designation command may be sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 at other times, or together with other commands. Also, instead of the reserved number designation command, a command indicating an increase or decrease in the reserved number may be sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300.

In addition, in the above explanation, even if a command cannot be received, the reach light effect is executed according to the next received fluctuation start command after the command was not received, but this processing is not limited to the reach effect. For example, even if a command cannot be received, the jackpot light effect may be executed according to the next received fluctuation start command after the command was not received. Here, the jackpot light effect is an effect that displays the doublet decorative pattern 41 and the doublet light effect 68.

[Event 2 when a command cannot be received]
117(a) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the event when a command cannot be received and the timing of the light-emitting performance using a decorative pattern. Specifically, FIG. 117(a) is a timing chart showing the timing of the performance by the decorative pattern when a command is received, and FIG. 117(b) is a timing chart showing the timing of the performance by the decorative pattern when a command cannot be received.

Next, referring to Figures 117(a) and (b), we will explain the change in the swing time of the decorative pattern when the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command. Specifically, referring to Figure 117(a), we will explain the processing when a command is received. Also, referring to Figure 117(b), we will explain the processing when a command cannot be received.

In each of Figures 117(a) and (b), explanations are given using an example of a variation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach light-up effect is executed (see "reach miss" in the figure), and an example of a variation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot and a reach light-up effect and a jackpot light-up effect are executed (see "jackpot" in the figure).

First, an example of a "missed reach" variation when the command shown in FIG. 117(a) is received will be described. In this variation example, when the performance control unit 300 receives the variation start command, the performance control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative symbols (see t31 in the figure). Then, the performance control unit 300 executes a reach light-emitting performance at a specified timing (see t32 in the figure). Then, when the performance control unit 300 receives a variation stop command, it fixes and stops the decorative symbols (see t34 in the figure). Here, the time from the timing at which the reach light-emitting performance is executed (see t32 in the figure) to the timing at which the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped (see t34 in the figure) is defined as time T1.

Next, an example of a "jackpot" variation when the command shown in FIG. 117(a) is received will be described. In this variation example, when the performance control unit 300 receives the variation start command, the performance control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative symbols (see t31 in the figure). Then, the performance control unit 300 executes a reach light-up presentation at a predetermined timing (see t32 in the figure), and then executes a jackpot light-up presentation (see t33 in the figure). Then, when the performance control unit 300 receives a variation stop command, it stops the decorative symbols (see t34 in the figure). Although not shown in the figure, after the decorative symbols have been fixed and stopped, the jackpot game is played.

Here, the time from when the big win light-emitting effect is executed (see t33 in the figure) to when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped (see t34 in the figure) is set to time T2. This time T2 is shorter than time T1 (T2<T1).

Next, an example of a "missed reach" fluctuation when the command shown in FIG. 117(b) cannot be received will be explained. In this example, it is assumed that the performance control unit 300 is unable to properly receive the fluctuation stop command for the next fluctuation (see t34 in the figure) due to an event in which the performance control unit 300 is unable to receive a command from the game control unit 200. Also, it is assumed that by the time the performance control unit 300 receives the next fluctuation stop command (see t35 in the figure) for the next fluctuation, the event in which the performance control unit 300 is unable to receive a command from the game control unit 200 is resolved, and the performance control unit 300 receives the next fluctuation stop command.

In the example shown in FIG. 117(b), when the performance control unit 300 receives the variation start command, the performance control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative pattern (see t31 in the figure). Then, the performance control unit 300 executes the reach light emission performance at a predetermined timing (see t32 in the figure).

Normally, the performance control unit 300 receives a fluctuation stop command and fixes and stops the temporarily stopped (swaying) decorative pattern, but in this example, an event occurs that prevents the performance control unit 300 from receiving a command from the game control unit 200, so the command cannot be received (see the cross in the figure). As a result, the performance control unit 300 does not fix and stop the swaying decorative pattern, but allows the decorative pattern to continue in a swaying state.

Then, when the performance control unit 300 receives the next variation stop command, it fixes and stops the decorative pattern (see t35 in the figure). Here, the time from the timing of executing the reach light emission performance (see t32 in the figure) to the timing of fixing and stopping the decorative pattern (see t35 in the figure) is set to time T3.

Next, an example of "jackpot" fluctuation when the command shown in FIG. 117(b) cannot be received will be explained. In this example, it is assumed that the performance control unit 300 misses the fluctuation stop command (see t34 in the figure) due to an event in which the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200. Also, it is assumed that by the time the performance control unit 300 receives the next fluctuation stop command (see t36 in the figure), the event in which the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200 is resolved, and the performance control unit 300 receives the next fluctuation stop command.

Although not shown in the figure, the big win game is executed after the performance control unit 300 receives the variation stop command and stops the decorative pattern. The timing of receiving the next variation stop command (see t36 in the figure) is the timing of receiving the variation stop command for the first pattern variation that starts after the big win game.

In the example shown in FIG. 117(b), when the performance control unit 300 receives the variation start command, the performance control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative pattern (see t31 in the figure). Then, the performance control unit 300 executes a reach light-up performance at a predetermined timing (see t32 in the figure), and then executes a jackpot light-up performance (see t33 in the figure).

Normally, the performance control unit 300 would receive a fluctuation stop command and fix and stop the temporarily stopped (swaying) decorative pattern, but in this example, an event has occurred that prevents the performance control unit 300 from receiving a command from the game control unit 200, so the command cannot be received (see the cross in the figure). Therefore, the performance control unit 300 does not fix and stop the swaying decorative pattern, but allows the decorative pattern to continue in a swinging state. Then, upon receiving the next fluctuation stop command, the performance control unit 300 fixes and stops the decorative pattern (see t36 in the figure).

Here, the time from when the big win light-emitting effect is executed (see t33 in the figure) to when the decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped (see t36 in the figure) is taken as time T4. This time T4 is longer than time T3 (T4>T3) because it includes the time to execute the big win game, for example. On the other hand, when a command is received as shown in FIG. 117(a) above, time T2 is shorter than time T1. In other words, the length of each time is reversed depending on whether an event occurs in which the command cannot be received normally.

Now, the performance of FIG. 117 executed by the performance control unit 300 described above can be understood as follows. That is, the time T1 from when the reach-time light-emitting performance is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives the fluctuation stop command for the fluctuation for which the reach-time light-emitting performance is executed is longer than the time T2 from when the jackpot light-emitting performance is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives the fluctuation stop command for the fluctuation for which the jackpot light-emitting performance is executed, and the time T3 from when the reach-time light-emitting performance is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives the next fluctuation stop command for the fluctuation stop command without receiving the fluctuation stop command for the fluctuation for which the reach-time light-emitting performance is executed is shorter than the time T4 from when the jackpot light-emitting performance is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives the next fluctuation stop command for the fluctuation stop command without receiving the fluctuation stop command for the fluctuation for which the jackpot light-emitting performance is executed.

Unlike the illustrated example, when the performance control unit 300 is unable to receive a command due to an event in which the performance control unit 300 is unable to receive a command from the game control unit 200, for example, the temporarily stopped (swaying) decorative pattern is hidden and an image informing of an error is displayed. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 117(b) above, when a command cannot be received, the swaying decorative pattern is not stopped, and a performance is executed in which the decorative pattern continues to sway, thereby ensuring continuity with the performance executed up to that point. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling strange. In addition, by continuing the swaying state of the decorative pattern, when the event in which the performance control unit 300 is unable to receive a command from the game control unit 200 is resolved and a fluctuation stop command is received, it is possible to execute a continuous performance that does not feel strange to the player, in which the swaying decorative pattern is stopped.

In addition, in the case of a "jackpot" variation when the command shown in FIG. 117(b) cannot be received, the temporarily stopped decorative symbols will be displayed for a long period of time. This makes it possible to suggest to staff at the gaming establishment (pachinko parlor) where the pachinko gaming machine 100 is installed that an event has occurred in which the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the gaming control unit 200, while minimizing the player's sense of discomfort, as compared to a mode in which the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are not displayed and an image informing of an error is displayed.

In each of the above Figures 117(a) and (b), a variation example has been described in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, and a reach light-up effect and a jackpot light-up effect are executed as a "jackpot", but this is not limited to the above. For example, a variation example may be one in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, and a reach light-up effect and a chance light-up effect are executed. This variation example can be understood as follows. That is, the time T1 from when the reach light-emitting effect is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives the change stop command for the change for which the reach light-emitting effect is executed is longer than the time from when the chance eye light-emitting effect is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives the change stop command for the change for which the chance eye light-emitting effect is executed, and the time T3 from when the reach light-emitting effect is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives the next change stop command for the change stop command without receiving the change stop command for the change for which the reach light-emitting effect is executed is shorter than the time from when the chance eye light-emitting effect is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives the next change stop command for the change stop command without receiving the change stop command for the change for which the chance eye light-emitting effect is executed.

Note that, although the above-mentioned FIG. 117(a) and (b) respectively describe examples of variations of "miss reach" and "jackpot", the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the above-mentioned effects may be executed across the variations of multiple special symbols. To explain further, for example, a variation example may be one in which the result of the first special symbol drawing is a miss and a chance eye light-up effect is executed, and the result of the next special symbol drawing is a jackpot and a jackpot light-up effect is executed. The relationship between this variation example and the variation example of "miss reach" described in the above-mentioned FIG. 117(a) and (b) can be understood as follows. That is, the time T1 from when the reach light-emitting effect is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives the fluctuation stop command for the fluctuation for which the reach light-emitting effect is executed is longer than the time from when the chance eye light-emitting effect is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives the fluctuation stop command for the fluctuation for which the chance eye light-emitting effect is executed, and the time T3 from when the reach light-emitting effect is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives the next fluctuation stop command after the fluctuation stop command without receiving the fluctuation stop command for the fluctuation for which the reach light-emitting effect is executed is shorter than the time from when the chance eye light-emitting effect is executed until the performance control unit 300 receives the fluctuation stop command for the fluctuation for which the chance eye light-emitting effect is executed without receiving the fluctuation stop command for the fluctuation for which the chance eye light-emitting effect is executed.

In the above explanation, the performance control unit 300 was not able to properly receive the fluctuation stop command, but this is not limited to the above. If the performance control unit 300 is not able to properly receive a specified command (specific command), the above processing may be performed. Here, specific commands include, for example, a fluctuation start command or an ending command.

As described above, the start action performance using the decorative pattern 41 during the cycle change of the special pattern, the change performance using the decorative pattern 41, the stop action performance using the decorative pattern 41, the increase display performance, the shift performance, the action performance, the disappearance performance of the change icon TI or the reserved icon HI when the excess icon TI (change image 51) or the reserved icon HI (reserved image 52) is disappeared when the performance control unit 300 does not receive a command normally, the performance using the small pattern 56, and other various performances during the change of the special pattern have been described, but the time of each performance may be as follows. For example, the time of the start action performance using the decorative pattern 41 may be longer or shorter than the time of the stop action performance using the decorative pattern 41, and these times may differ depending on the expectation of the special game being played. For example, if the expectation of a big win in the change of the special pattern is relatively low, the start action performance in that change may be longer (or shorter) than the stop action performance, or may be the same. In addition, when the expectation level is relatively high, the stop operation performance may be longer (or shorter) than the start operation performance, or may be the same. In addition, regardless of the expectation level, the time of the variable performance using the decorative pattern 41 may be longer than each of the start operation performance and the stop operation performance (and the sum of these times). In addition, the time of the start operation performance may be longer, shorter, or the same as the execution time of the shift performance. In addition, the time of the stop operation performance may be longer, shorter, or the same as the execution time of the shift performance. In addition, the time of the start operation performance may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the operation in the operation performance. In addition, the time of the stop operation performance may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the operation in the operation performance. In addition, the time of the stop operation performance may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the operation in the operation performance. In addition, the time of the stop operation performance may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the disappearance performance. In addition, the time of the start operation performance may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the disappearance performance. In addition, the duration of the start-up action presentation may be longer, shorter, or the same as the duration of the presentation for the disappearance of the icon TI or the reserved icon HI when the redundant icon TI (variable image 51) or reserved icon HI (reserved image 52) is made to disappear when a command is not received normally.

The time of the change performance using the small pattern 56 (or the sub-first change display 81) may be longer than each of the start-time action performance and the stop-time action performance using the decorative pattern 41. The time of the change performance using the small pattern 56 (or the sub-first change display 81) may be longer than the sum of the time of the start-time action performance and the time of the stop-time action performance. The time of the change performance using the small pattern 56 (or the sub-first change display 81) may be longer than the sum of the time of the start-time action performance and the time of the change performance using the decorative pattern 41. The time of the change performance using the small pattern 56 (or the sub-first change display 81) may be longer than the sum of the time of the change performance using the decorative pattern 41 and the time of the stop-time action performance.

In addition, when a performance using the movable role 115 is performed during the fluctuation of the special pattern, the time from when the movable role 115 starts to move until it returns to its initial position may be longer than the time of the start-time operation performance in that fluctuation. In addition, the time from when the movable role 115 starts to move until it returns to its initial position may be shorter than or the same as the time of the start-time operation performance. In addition, when a performance using the movable role 115 is performed during the fluctuation of the special pattern, the time from when the movable role 115 starts to move until it returns to its initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the stop-time operation performance using the decorative pattern 41 in that fluctuation. In the case where a performance using the movable role 115 is performed during the fluctuation of the special pattern, the time from when the movable role 115 starts to move until it returns to its initial position may be shorter, longer, or the same as the time of the fluctuation performance using the decorative pattern 41 in that fluctuation. In addition, when a performance using the movable role 115 is performed during the variation of the special pattern, the time from when the movable role 115 starts to operate until it returns to the initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the execution time of the shift performance in that variation. In addition, the time from when the movable role 115 starts to operate until it returns to the initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of operation in the operation performance. In addition, the time from when the movable role 115 starts to operate until it returns to the initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the disappearance performance. In addition, the time from when the movable role 115 starts to operate until it returns to the initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the disappearance performance of the icon TI or the reserved icon HI when the extra icon TI (variable image 51) or the reserved icon HI (reserved image 52) is disappeared when the command is not received normally.

In addition, when an operation prompting image SSG (button operation image 67) is displayed to prompt the user to operate the effect button 161 while the special pattern is changing, the maximum time for which a valid period suggestion image suggesting the valid period for operating the effect button 161 is displayed may be longer than each of the times (and the sum of these times) of the start and stop action effects using the decorative pattern 41 during that change.In addition, the maximum time for which a valid period suggestion image is displayed may be shorter than the time of the change effect using the decorative pattern 41 during that change.

In addition, when an operation prompting image SSG (button operation image 67) is displayed while the special pattern is changing, the maximum time for which the valid period suggestion image is displayed may be longer than the execution time of the shift effect.In addition, when an operation prompting image SSG is displayed while the special pattern is changing, the maximum time for which the valid period suggestion image is displayed may be longer than the disappearance effect (the disappearance effect during normal times, the disappearance effect of the icon TI (changing image 51) or the reserved icon HI (reserved image 52) when an extra icon TI or reserved icon HI is made to disappear when a command is not received normally).

In addition, when the operation prompting image SSG (button operation image 67) is displayed and a performance using the movable role object 115 is executed during the change of the special pattern, the maximum time for which the valid period suggestion image is displayed may be shorter, longer, or the same as the time from when the movable role object 115 starts to move to when it returns to its initial position. In addition, when an effect image is displayed at the start of the change of the special pattern, the display time of the effect image may be shorter, longer, or the same as the start-time action performance using the decorative pattern 41 in that change. In addition, the display time of the effect image may be shorter, longer, or the same as each of the stop-time action performance and the change performance using the decorative pattern 41 in that change. In addition, when a pre-reading chance eye performance is executed, when an effect image indicating a chance eye is displayed, the display time of the effect image may be shorter, longer, or the same as the stop-time action performance using the decorative pattern 41 in that change. Also, when a pre-reading chance eye performance is executed, the display time of the effect image may be shorter, longer, or the same as the start-time action performance using the decorative pattern 41 in the change. Also, when a pre-reading chance eye performance is executed, the display time of the effect image may be shorter, longer, or the same as the change display performance using the decorative pattern 41 in the change.

The duration of the start-up action presentation using the decorative pattern 41 is longer than the time for one cycle of the special pattern to fluctuate. The duration of the fluctuating action presentation using the decorative pattern 41 is longer than the time for one cycle of the special pattern to fluctuate. The duration of the stop-up action presentation using the decorative pattern 41 is longer than the time for one cycle of the special pattern to fluctuate.

The execution time of the shift effect may be longer than the time of one cycle of the special pattern. The execution time of the increase display effect may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of one cycle of the special pattern. The execution time of the disappearance effect during normal times may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of one cycle of the special pattern. The execution time of the disappearance effect of the icon TI or the reserved icon HI when the extra icon TI (changing image 51) or the reserved icon HI (reserved image 52) is disappeared when the command is not received normally may be shorter, longer, or the same as the time of one cycle of the special pattern. The execution time of the disappearance effect of the icon TI or the reserved icon HI when the extra icon TI (changing image 51) or the reserved icon HI (reserved image 52) is disappeared when the command is not received normally may be longer than the time of one unit change in the cycle of the special pattern.

The period of change of the sub-first change indicator 81 during the change of the first special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the cycle change of the first special symbol. The period of change of the sub-first change indicator 81 during the change of the first special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the unit change in the cycle change of the first special symbol. The period of change of the sub-second change indicator 82 during the change of the second special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the unit change in the cycle change of the second special symbol. The period of change of the sub-second change indicator 82 during the change of the second special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the unit change in the cycle change of the second special symbol.

In the above embodiment, a gaming machine was described in which, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a jackpot game is played and the game state is changed via the jackpot game. In other embodiments, even if a jackpot is not determined, the game may be transitioned from the low-probability no-time-reduction game state to the time-reduction game state. For example, if the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability no-time-reduction game state (the number of consecutive times determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination) reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (e.g., 300 times), the game may be transitioned to a time-reduction game state for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 50 times, or 100 times or more) even if the change is not determined to be a jackpot. In this case, if the special pattern does not change a predetermined number of times before a jackpot is determined, the time-reduction game state ends and the game returns to the low-probability no-time-reduction game state. Alternatively, even if the result of the jackpot determination is a miss (i.e., even if the random number value for the special symbol lottery acquired at the time of winning the starting gate is a value indicating a miss), if the random number value for the special symbol lottery acquired at the time of winning (jackpot symbol random number value) is a predetermined value, the game may be shifted to a time-saving game state for a predetermined number of times. In addition, in the case of shifting to a time-saving game state based on the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol, the above-mentioned predetermined upper limit number may be variable or fixed. For example, in the case of shifting to a time-saving game state based on the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol, the time-saving game state may be granted when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol becomes a first number, and the time-saving game state may be granted when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol becomes a second number. In this case, the number of times of time-saving granted may be different depending on the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol, and the number of times of time-saving granted may be set to be larger as the number of times of fluctuation increases. In addition, in the case of shifting to a time-saving game state based on the number of times of fluctuation of the jackpot symbol, the number of times of time-saving granted may be different depending on the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol. For example, when the acquired jackpot random number value is a first value, a first number of time-saving times may be given, and when the acquired jackpot random number value is a second value, a second number of time-saving times may be given. In addition, there may be a case where the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the number of times of variation of the special pattern, and a case where the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the jackpot random number value. In this case, the number of time-saving times to be given may be different between a case where the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the number of times of variation of the special pattern and a case where the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the jackpot random number value. For example, when the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the number of times of variation of the special pattern, a time-saving game state of 50 times may be shifted, and when the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the jackpot random number value, a time-saving game state of 30 times may be shifted, which is less than the time-saving game state. Conversely, the number of time-saving times may be greater when the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the jackpot random number value than when the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the number of times of variation of the special pattern. In addition, in the case where the time-saving game state is shifted to without going through a jackpot in this way, if a time-saving game state is further granted without going through a jackpot during the shifted time-saving game state, the time-saving game state may continue for the number of newly granted time-saving times. For example, if a time-saving game state of 50 times is granted without going through a jackpot, and when a special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, and a time-saving game state of 50 times is granted without going through a jackpot, the time-saving game state of 50 times may be shifted to. Alternatively, in this case, the number of time-saving times may be added. For example, if a time-saving game state of 50 times is granted without going through a jackpot, and when a special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, and a time-saving game state of 50 times is granted without going through a jackpot, the newly granted 50 times may be added to the remaining 20 times, and a time-saving game state of 70 times may be granted. Also, during such a time-saving game state that does not go through a jackpot, the time-saving game state that does not go through a jackpot may not be granted. Also, in a configuration in which a transition to a time-saving game state is made based on the number of times the special symbol changes or the random number value of the jackpot symbol without going through a jackpot, a time-saving suggestion effect that suggests a transition to a time-saving game state may be performed. For example, if the number of times the special symbol changes is close to the above-mentioned predetermined upper limit number, the time-saving suggestion effect may be configured to be easily executed. Conversely, if the number of times the special symbol changes is close to the above-mentioned predetermined upper limit number, the time-saving suggestion effect may be configured to be difficult to perform. Also, in a start-time operation effect using the decorative symbol 41, a time-saving suggestion effect may be performed. For example, if the decorative symbol 41 moves in a specific manner at the start of the change, the possibility of transitioning to a time-saving game state may be suggested. Also, in a change display effect using the decorative symbol 41, a time-saving suggestion effect may be performed. Also, in a stop-time operation effect using the decorative symbol 41, a time-saving suggestion effect may be performed.

Although the above describes various effects of the pachinko gaming machine 100, it is possible to apply or combine all or part of the contents described with other effects, controls, etc., even if not specifically mentioned. In addition, although various embodiments and variations have been mentioned, it is possible to apply or combine the contents of such embodiments and variations with other effects, etc., even if not specifically mentioned in this document. In addition, it is possible to combine various embodiments and variations with each other, or to replace parts of them, even if not specifically mentioned in this document.

41...decorative pattern, 100...pachinko game machine, 114...image display unit, 200...game control unit, 231...random number acquisition unit, 234...special pattern determination unit, 300...performance control unit

Claims (1)

A main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance control means for controlling a performance in response to a command transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means
An acquisition means for acquiring determination information when a start condition is satisfied;
A determination means capable of determining whether or not to play a special game in accordance with the determination information;
a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a reserved memory;
A variable display means for displaying the special symbols in a fixed state for a predetermined period of time after performing a cyclical variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbols,
The performance control means includes:
A variable performance can be executed in which the performance pattern is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped in association with the variable display and stop display of the special pattern,
It is possible to variably display specific symbols and then stop display them in association with the variably display and stop display of the special symbols,
The effect pattern is stopped and displayed at a timing after the end of the last cycle of the variable display of the special pattern and before the predetermined time has elapsed,
The display of the specific symbol is started at a timing after the start of the first cycle of the special symbol variation and before the end of the first cycle of the special symbol variation ,
It is possible to additionally display the reserved display in response to an increase in the reserved memory, and to reduce the reserved display in response to a decrease in the reserved memory when a specific command related to the variable display is received,
The display area of the hold display includes a first display area and a second display area in which the hold display can be displayed after the hold display is displayed in the first display area,
A gaming machine that, when the hold display is displayed in the first display area and the second display area, if the specific command related to the changing display is received without receiving the specific command related to the next changing display, hides the hold display in the second display area and executes the decreasing display of the hold display in the first display area.